sUtrANi सूत्राणि

lagh laghu sutra-
( ) Sutra text PadacCheda

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
. u_no _topic sutra_english sutra-desc1 desc2 sutra_added_words
Next Previous
02.

1 1 1 1.1.1 1.1.1 16 3288 40 , and are called --------------------
1.1.2
02.

1 1 1.1.2 1.1.2 17 134 33 , and are called 1.1.3 1.1.1
In the absence of any special role whenever or
is enjoined about any expression by using the
terms or , it is to be understood to come in
1 1 3 1.1.3 1.1.3 34 595 the room of the (, , , ) of that expression. - 1.1.4 1.1.2
The and substitutions which otherwise
would have presented themselves do not take
place, when such an 3.4.114 affix follows,
1 1 4 1.1.4 1.1.4 2656 2034 which causes a portion of the root to be elided. - 1.1.5 1.1.3
And that, which otherwise would have caused
or , does not do so, when it has an indicatory
1 1 5 1.1.5 1.1.5 2217 1335 , , - 1.1.6 1.1.4
The and substitutions which otherwise
would have presented themselves do not however
come, in the place of the vowels of 'to shine'
1 1 6 1.1.6 1.1.6 2190 1876 and 'to go', and of the augment called - 1.1.7 1.1.5
01.

Consonants unseparated by a vowel are called
1 1 7 1.1.7 1.1.7 30 3926 19 conjunct consonants. 1.1.8 1.1.6
01.
That which is pronounced by the nose along with
1 1 8 1.1.8 1.1.8 9 2787 13 the mouth is called or nasal. 1.1.9 1.1.7
01.
Those whose place of utterance and effort are
1 1 9 1.1.9 1.1.9 10 1759 14 equal are called or homogeneous letters. 1.1.10 1.1.8
There is however no homogeneity between vowels
and consonants, though their place and effort be
1 1 10 1.1.10 1.1.10 13 2141 equal. 1.1.11 1.1.9
02. A dual case affix ending in or or is called
, or excepted vowels which do not admit
1 1 11 1.1.11 1.1.11 100 683 64 or conjugation. 1.1.12 1.1.10
02.
The same letters after the of the pronoun
1 1 12 1.1.12 1.1.12 101 129 64 are 1.1.13 1.1.11
The affix (the Vedic substitute of the case-affixes)
1 1 13 1.1.13 1.1.13 102 3424 is a 1.1.14 1.1.12
02.
A particle 1.4.56 consisting of a single vowel, with
1 1 14 1.1.14 1.1.14 103 2190 68 the exception of the particle is 1.1.15 1.1.13
02.

1 1 15 1.1.15 1.1.15 104 936 69 The final of a particle is a 1.1.16 1.1.14
02. The final of a vocative singular 2.3.49 before the
word according to , in a secular or non-
1 1 16 1.1.16 1.1.16 105 3665 70 vedic literature is a 1.1.17 1.1.15
The particle before , according to is
1 1 17 1.1.17 1.1.17 106 702 a 1.1.18 1.1.16
The particle replaces in non-vedic literature
1 1 18 1.1.18 1.1.18 107 829 and it is a in the opinion of 1.1.19 1.1.17
The final and of words giving the sense of the
1 1 19 1.1.19 1.1.19 109 682 locative case are 1.1.20 1.1.18
The words having the form of 'to give' and 'to
1 1 20 1.1.20 1.1.20 2373 1845 place' are called - 1.1.21 1.1.19
An operation should be performed on a single
1 1 21 1.1.21 1.1.21 348 532 letter, as upon an initial or upon a final. 1.1.22 1.1.20
1 1 22 1.1.22 1.1.22 2003 1674 The affixes and ae called - 1.1.23 1.1.21
05. The words 'many' , 'class' and the words
ending in the affix --
5.2.39 and -- 5.2.41
1 1 23 1.1.23 1.1.23 258 2583 206 are called numerals ( ). 1.1.24 1.1.22
The -s having or as their final are called
1 1 24 1.1.24 1.1.24 369 3500 1.1.25 1.1.23
05.

And the -s ending with the affix are called
1 1 25 1.1.25 1.1.25 259 1569 207 1.1.26 1.1.24
1 1 26 1.1.26 1.1.26 3012 1177 The affixes and are called 1.1.27 1.1.25
05.

The words 'all' and the rest are called or
1 1 27 1.1.27 1.1.27 213 3690 170 pronouns. 1.1.28 1.1.26
The above words are optionally when they
occur in a compound signifying direction --
1 1 28 1.1.28 1.1.28 292 3206 2.2.26. - 1.1.29 1.1.27
The words etc. are not when they occur
1 1 29 1.1.29 1.1.29 222 2045 in a compound. 1.1.30 1.1.28
In the Instrumental Determinative Compounds the
1 1 30 1.1.30 1.1.30 223 1775 words etc. are not 1.1.31 1.1.29
And in Collective Compound --
1 1 31 1.1.31 1.1.31 224 1941 2.2.26, the words etc. are not 1.1.32 1.1.30
Their compounds are optionally when
1 1 32 1.1.32 1.1.32 225 3202 the nominative plural termination follows. - 1.1.33 1.1.31
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
05. And also the words 'first', 'last', words with
the affix -- 5.2.42, 'few',
'half', 'some' and 'half' are optionally
1 1 33 1.1.33 1.1.33

226 2484 179 , before the Nominative Plural termination. 1.1.34 1.1.32
The words 'prior', 'after', 'posterior',
05. 'south', 'north', 'other', 'inferior',
when they discriminate relative position, not when
they are appellatives, are optionally before
1 1 34 1.1.34 1.1.34

218 2421 175 the affix 1.1.35 1.1.33
05.
The word 'own', when it does not mean a
kinsman or property is optionally before the
1 1 35 1.1.35 1.1.35 219 3871 176 affix 1.1.36 1.1.34
05.

The word always being a , when
meaning 'outer' or 'lower garment', is optionally so
1 1 36 1.1.36 1.1.36 220 240 177 before the affix 1.1.37 1.1.35
The words 'heaven' etc. and the particles --
1.4.56, are called or
1 1 37 1.1.37 1.1.37 447 3875 indeclinables. 1.1.38 1.1.36
And the words ending in or secondary
affixes -- 4.1.76, which are not declined in
1 1 38 1.1.38 1.1.38 448 1648 all the cases are also or indeclinables. 1.1.39 1.1.37
The words formed by those or primary affixes --
3.1.93, which end with a or in a , ,
1 1 39 1.1.39 1.1.39 449 1155 and are also or indeclinables. 1.1.40 1.1.38
The words ending in , --
3.4.16, and
1 1 40 1.1.40 1.1.40 450 1190 are or indeclinables. 1.1.41 1.1.39
-
The compound called is also or
1 1 41 1.1.41 1.1.41 451 405 indeclinable. 1.1.42 1.1.40
1 1 42 1.1.42 1.1.42 313 3393 The affix 7.1.20 is called 1.1.43 1.1.41
The first five case affixes comprised in the
05.
(i.e. the three case-terminations of the

Nominative, and the singular and dual of the

Accusative) are also called , except the
1 1 43 1.1.43 1.1.43 229 3753 183 case-affixes of the neuter gender. 1.1.44 1.1.42
1 1 44 1.1.44 1.1.44 24 2069 May or may not' is called or option. 1.1.45 1.1.43
The vowels which replace the semi-vowels
1 1 45 1.1.45 1.1.45 328 604 are called 1.1.46 1.1.44
04.
Of whatsoever the augments enunciated are

distinguished by an indicatory or , they precede
1 1 46 1.1.46 1.1.46 36 533 103 or follow it accordingly. augment 1.1.47 1.1.45
The augment that has an indicatory comes after
the last among the vowels and becomes the final
1 1 47 1.1.47 1.1.47 37 2781 position of that which it augments. augment 1.1.48 1.1.46
Of vowels, is the substitute, when short is to
1 1 48 1.1.48 1.1.48 323 903 be substituted. 1.1.49 1.1.47
The force of the negative case in a stra is that of
the phrase 'in the place of', when no special rules
1 1 49 1.1.49 1.1.49 38 3487 qualify the sense of Genitive 6th-Case. 1.1.50 1.1.48
02.
When a common term is obtained as a substitute,
the likest of its significates to that in the place of
1 1 50 1.1.50 1.1.50 39 3835 23 which it comes, is the actual substitute. 1.1.51 1.1.49
02.
When a letter of comes as a substitute
1 1 51 1.1.51 1.1.51 70 818 37 for it is always followed by 1.1.52 1.1.50
02.
The substitute takes the place of only the final letter
(of that which is denoted by a term exhibited in the
1 1 52 1.1.52 1.1.52 42 369 27 Genitive 6th-Case. 1.1.53 1.1.51
02. And the substitute which hs indicatory (even
though it consists of more than one letter) takes the
place of the final letter only of the original
1 1 53 1.1.53 1.1.53 43 1372 59 expression. 1.1.54 1.1.52
03.
That which is enjoined to come in th room of what
follows is to be understood as coming in the room
1 1 54 1.1.54 1.1.54 44 528 88 only of the first letter thereof. 1.1.55 1.1.53
A substitute consisting of more than one letter and
02.
a substitute having an indicatory take the place of

the whole of the original expression exhibited in the
1 1 55 1.1.55 1.1.55 45 226 58 Genitive 6th-Case. 1.1.56 1.1.54
05.
A substitute ( ) is like the former occupant

( ) but not in the case of a rule the occasion for

the operation of which is furnished by the letters of
1 1 56 1.1.56 1.1.56 49 3834 163 the original term. 1.1.57 1.1.55
A substitute in the room of a vowel caused by
something that follows, should be regarded as that
whose place it takes when a rule would else take
1 1 57 1.1.57 1.1.57 50 44 effect on what stands anterior to the original vowel. 1.1.58 1.1.56
Not so, in rules relating to the finals of words, to the
doubling of letters, to the affixing of , to the
elision of , to accent, to homogenous letters, to
, to the lengthening of vowels and to the
1 1 58 1.1.58 1.1.58

51 2040 substitution of and characters. 1.1.59 1.1.57
Before an affix having an initial vowel, which
causes reduplication, the substitute which takes the
place of a vowel is like the original vowel even in
form, only for the purpose of reduplication and no
1 1 59 1.1.59 1.1.59 2243 1968 further. 1.1.60 1.1.58
01.

The substitution of a blank () signifies
1 1 60 1.1.60 1.1.60 53 127 6 disappearance. 1.1.61 1.1.59
05.

The disappearance of an affix when it is caused by

the words , or are designated by those
1 1 61 1.1.61 1.1.61

260 2480 209 terms respectively. 1.1.62 1.1.60
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
05.

When elision of an affix has taken place (), the

affix still exerts its influence and the operations
1 1 62 1.1.62 1.1.62 262 2478 210 dependant upon it, take place as if it were present. 1.1.63 1.1.61
05.
Of the base ( ), whose affix has been elided by

the use of the three words containing , the

operations dependant on it do not take place,
1 1 63 1.1.63 1.1.63 263 2063 211 regarding such base. 1.1.64 1.1.62
02.
The final portion of a word, beginning with the last
1 1 64 1.1.64 1.1.64 79 57 52 among the vowels in the word, is called 1.1.65 1.1.63
05.

The letter immediately preceding the last letter of a
1 1 65 1.1.65 1.1.65 249 370 196 word is called penultimate (). 1.1.66 1.1.64
02. When a term is exhibited in the seventh case in
these stras, the operation directed, is to be
understood as effecting the state of what
1 1 66 1.1.66 1.1.66 40 1689 22 immediately precedes the which the term denotes. 1.1.67 1.1.65
An operation casused by the exhibition of a term in
02. the Ablative 5th case, is to be understood to enjoin
the substitution of something in the room of that
which immediately follows the word denoted by the
1 1 67 1.1.67 1.1.67 41 1685 87 term. 1.1.68 1.1.66
In this Grammar, when an operation is directed with
regard to a word, the individual form of the word
posesssing meaning is to be understood, except
1 1 68 1.1.68 1.1.68 25 3862 with regard to aword which is a definition. 1.1.69 1.1.67
The letters of the i.e. the vowels and
semi-vowels and a term having for its indicatory
01.
letter, refer to their own form as well as to their
homogeneous letters, except when they are used
1 1 69 1.1.69 1.1.69 14 87 17 as -s or affixes. 1.1.70 1.1.68
02. The letter which has after or before it, besides
referring to its own form, refers to those
homogeneous letters which have the some
1 1 70 1.1.70 1.1.70 15 1665 34 prosodial length or time. - 1.1.71 1.1.69
01.

An initial letter, with a final letter as a final, is the
1 1 71 1.1.71 1.1.71 2 522 8 name of itself and of the intervening letters. 1.1.72 1.1.70
An injunction which is made with regard to a
particular attribute, applies to words having that
attribute at their end as well as to that attribute
1 1 72 1.1.72 1.1.72 26 2890 itself. 1.1.73 1.1.71
That word, among the vowels of which the first is a
1 1 73 1.1.73 1.1.73 1335 3290 , is called 1.1.74 1.1.72
1 1 74 1.1.74 1.1.74 1336 1799 The words etc. are called 1.1.75 1.1.73
A word that has the letters and as the first
among its vowels, gets also the designation of
1 1 75 1.1.75 1.1.75 1338 901 1.2.1 1.1.74
All affixes after the verb 'to study' and the verb
'to be crooked' and the rest, are as if they had
an indicatory ( ), except those affixes which
1 2 1 1.2.1 1.2.1 2461 1286 have an indicatory ( ) or ( ). 1.2.2 1.1.75
An affix which begins with the augment --

7.2.35, is after the root
1 2 2 1.2.2 1.2.2 2536 3158 'to fear, to move'. 1.2.3 1.2.1
After the verb 'to cover', the affix beginning
1 2 3 1.2.3 1.2.3 2447 3256 with the augment is regarded optionally like augment 1.2.4 1.2.2
A -- 3.4.113, affix not
1 2 4 1.2.4 1.2.4 2234 3722 having an indicatory 1.2.5 1.2.3
The affixes of (Perfect Tense) not coming after
a conjunct consonant, are as if they had an
1 2 5 1.2.5 1.2.5 2242 429 indicatory ( ). 1.2.6 1.2.4
The (Perfect Tense) affixes after the roots
1 2 6 1.2.6 1.2.6 3393 685 'to kindle' and 'to become' are also 1.2.7 1.2.5
The affix is after 'to be gracious',
'to squeeze', 'to wrap up', 'to tear', 'to
1 2 7 1.2.7 1.2.7 3323 2795 suffer', 'to speak' and 'to dwell'. 1.2.8 1.2.6
The affixes and 3.1.7 are after 'to
weep', 'to know', 'to steal', 'to seize',
1 2 8 1.2.8 1.2.8 2609 2944 'to sleep' and 'to ask'. 1.2.9 1.2.7
The affix beginning with a letter of the
1 2 9 1.2.9 1.2.9 2612 596 is like after the verbs ending in vowels. 1.2.10 1.2.8
And after a root ending in a consonant and
preceded by a vowel of the , the affix
1 2 10 1.2.10 1.2.10 2613 3913 beginning witha consonant, is like 1.2.11 1.2.9
After roots ending in a consonant, that adjoins a
vowel of , the substitutes of the --
3.3.161
and -- 3.1.44, when they begin with a
consonant of , are when the
1 2 11 1.2.11 1.2.11 2300 2988 affixes follow. 1.2.12 1.2.10
And after the verbs ending in , the substitutes of
and the affix , are , when they begin
1 2 12 1.2.12 1.2.12 2368 823 with and the affixes follow. 1.2.13 1.2.11
Optionally after the verb , the and the
beginning with consonants, in the ,
1 2 13 1.2.13 1.2.13 2700 3101 are 1.2.14 1.2.12

The affixes are after the root
1 2 14 1.2.14 1.2.14 2697 3897 'to kill'. 1.2.15 1.2.13
The affix before affixes is after
1 2 15 1.2.15 1.2.15 2698 2839 the verb when meaning 'to divulge'. 1.2.16 1.2.14
The affix before affixes is
1 2 16 1.2.16 1.2.16 2730 3254 optionally when means 'to expose'. 1.2.17 1.2.15
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix before affixes is after
'to stand' and 1.2.20 verbs,

and these verbs change their into before these
1 2 17 1.2.17 1.2.17 2389 3829 terminations. 1.2.18 1.2.16
The affix when it takes the augment (i.e.
1 2 18 1.2.18 1.2.18 3322 2017 when it is ) is not 1.2.19 1.2.17
The affixes are not after the verbs
'to lie down', 'to sweat', 'to melt',
1 2 19 1.2.19 1.2.19 3052 2208 'to be unctuous', and 'to offend'. 1.2.20 1.2.18

The affix is not after the verb 'to
1 2 20 1.2.20 1.2.20 3055 2797 forbear'. 1.2.21 1.2.19
The affix is optionally not after the

verbs with a penultimate if used impersonally or
1 2 21 1.2.21 1.2.21

3056 746 denoting the beginning of action. 1.2.22 1.2.20
The affix and the are not
1 2 22 1.2.22 1.2.22 3051 2406 after the verb 'to purify'. 1.2.23 1.2.21
The is optionally after the verbs
1 2 23 1.2.23 1.2.23 - 3324 2243 having a penultimate ending in a and 1.2.24 1.2.22
The is optionally after the verbs
1 2 24 1.2.24 1.2.24 3325 3044 'to cheat', 'to pluck' and 'to dare or abhor'. 1.2.25 1.2.23
The is optionally , according to the
opinion of after the verbs 'to be
1 2 25 1.2.25 1.2.25 3326 1777 thirsty', 'to sprinkle' and 'to become lean'. 1.2.26 1.2.24
After a verb which begins in a consonant and ends
in a letter of and has as its penultimate
or and or , the and affixes are
1 2 26 1.2.26 1.2.26 2617 2911 optionally 1.2.27 1.2.25
01. A vowel whose time is that of short , and the
prolated , is called respectively short,
1 2 27 1.2.27 1.2.27 4 830 9 long and prolated. 1.2.28 1.2.26
The short, long and prolated, when enunciated as
such, by using these terms, are to be understood to
1 2 28 1.2.28 1.2.28 35 46 come in the place of vowels only. 1.2.29 1.2.27
01.
The vowel that is perceived as having a high tone
1 2 29 1.2.29 1.2.29 5 700 10 is called or acutely accented. 1.2.30 1.2.28
01.
The vowel that is perceived as having a low tone is
1 2 30 1.2.30 1.2.30 6 2217 11 called or gravely accented 1.2.31 1.2.29
01. The vowel that has the combination of and

tones is said to be or circumflexly
1 2 31 1.2.31 1.2.31 7 3645 12 accented. 1.2.32 1.2.30
Of it ( -s) the first portion is , to the extent
1 2 32 1.2.32 1.2.32 8 1706 of a half measure, or prosodial length. 1.2.33 1.2.31
In addressing a person from a distance the tone is
1 2 33 1.2.33 1.2.33 3662 885 called or monotony. 1.2.34 1.2.32
In sacrificial works there is Monotony, except in
(silent repetition of a formula), vowels (16
1 2 34 1.2.34 1.2.34 3663 2819 sorts of ) and the Vedas. 1.2.35 1.2.33
The pronounciation of the word , may
optionally be by raising the voice (accutely
1 2 35 1.2.35 1.2.35 3664 701 accented), or it may be pronounced with monotony. 1.2.36 1.2.34
The monotony is optional in the recitation of the
1 2 36 1.2.36 1.2.36 3665 3199 Vedas or they may be recited with accents. 1.2.37 1.2.35
There should be no Monotony in the recitation of
the hymns and in those hymns, the
vowels, that would otherwise have taken the
1 2 37 1.2.37 1.2.37 3666 2080 accent, take the accent instead. 1.2.38 1.2.36
The words and in those hymns have
1 2 38 1.2.38 1.2.38
3667 1913 accent. 1.2.39 1.2.37
The Monotony takes the place of the vowels
which follow the vowels, in close proximity
1 2 39 1.2.39 1.2.39 3668 3878 ( ). 1.2.40 1.2.38
The accent called is substituted in the room
of an vowel, which has an or
1 2 40 1.2.40 1.2.40 3669 734 vowel following it. 1.2.41 1.2.39
05.

1 2 41 1.2.41 1.2.41 251 295 198 An affix consisting of a single letter is called 1.2.42 1.2.40
A - compound, the case of each member is
the same, is called or Appositional
1 2 42 1.2.42 1.2.42 745 1602 Determinative compound. 1.2.43 1.2.41
In (this book, in the stras relating to) compound,
the word that is exhibited in the Nominative -1st
1 2 43 1.2.43 1.2.43 653 2486 case, is called or the secondary word. 1.2.44 1.2.42
A word which hs one fixed case, (while the word
compounded with it may vary its case) is also
, except for the purposes of the the rule
which requires the to stand first in a
1 2 44 1.2.44 1.2.44 655 883 compound. 1.2.45 1.2.43
05.

A significant form of a word, not being a verbal root

(), or an affix ( ) is called a or
1 2 45 1.2.45 1.2.45 178 350 135 crude-form. 1.2.46 1.2.44
05.

The forms ending affixes or affixes, or
1 2 46 1.2.46 1.2.46 179 1142 136 compound are also called 1.2.47 1.2.45
The short vowel is substituted in the neuter, for the
1 2 47 1.2.47 1.2.47 318 3978 final vowel, of a 1.2.48 1.2.46
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
A short vowel is the substitute of which
ends with the word 'a cow' and of that which
ends with what has as its termination a feminine
1 2 48 1.2.48 1.2.48 656 1333 affix, when regarded as 1.2.49 1.2.47
When a affix is elided by the word there
takes place the elision by of feminine affix of
1 2 49 1.2.49 1.2.49 1408 3003 the 1.2.50 1.2.48
The short is substituted in the place of , when
1 2 50 1.2.50 1.2.50 1703 650 the affix is elided by 1.2.51 1.2.49
When a affix is elided by using the word
, then the gender and number (of the derivative
1 2 51 1.2.51 1.2.51 1294 3013 word) agree with those of the original word. 1.2.52 1.2.50
And of adjectives (the gender and number are the
same as of the word formed by elision of the
and which they qualify) so far as the
(or kind of species) is concerned, (or when not
1 2 52 1.2.52 1.2.52 1300 3266 expressing ). 1.2.53 1.2.51
This (concord or gender and number, of primitive
and derivative nouns, and of attributes and
substantives need not be taught (or approved),
because it has the authority of (conventional
1 2 53 1.2.53 1.2.53 1295 1629 term or idiom). 1.2.54 1.2.52
The stras declaring elision need not also be
taught, because of the non-currency of the
etymological meaning of the words supposed to be
1 2 54 1.2.54 1.2.54 1296 3016 formed by elision. 1.2.55 1.2.53
And if the etymological meaning 'be held
authoritative', then when such meaning is absent,
1 2 55 1.2.55 1.2.55 1297 2894 the word also should vanish. 1.2.56 1.2.54
(Nor need be taught) the rule relating to the
dependance of the meaning of a word on the
principal ( in a compound) or on the affix
( ) because the authority of the meaning (of a
word, compound or derivative) consists in
1 2 56 1.2.56 1.2.56 1298 2489 something else. 1.2.57 1.2.55
And a rule fixing the meaning of Tense () and
(sequence) is equally (unnecessary, and
1 2 57 1.2.57 1.2.57
1299 1071 need not be taught). 1.2.58 1.2.56
In (a common) name (expressive of) class, in
1 2 58 1.2.58 1.2.58

817 1508 denoting the singular, the plural is optionally used. 1.2.59 1.2.57
The plural of the pronoun 'I', is used
optionally, though the sense requires a singular or
1 2 59 1.2.59 1.2.59

818 440 a dual number. 1.2.60 1.2.58
And the dual of and , when
signifying asterisms, (also connotes optionally
1 2 60 1.2.60 1.2.60
819 2573 plural). 1.2.61 1.2.59
In the Vedas, the two stars, , may optionally
1 2 61 1.2.61 1.2.61
3387 1450 be singular, (and connote a dual). 1.2.62 1.2.60
In the Vedas, the two stars may optionally
1 2 62 1.2.62 1.2.62
3388 3261 be in the singular number. 1.2.63 1.2.61
In the compounds of the stars and
1 2 63 1.2.63 1.2.63

820 1740 , the dual constantly comes in place of the plural. - 1.2.64 1.2.62
05.

Of the words having the same form and all in the
same one case-termination, the last one is only
1 2 64 1.2.64 1.2.64 188 3671 145 retained. 1.2.65 1.2.63
The (or patronymic word becomes
and is retained, when compounded) with a
patronymic word , provided that the specific
difference in form between them be in their signs
1 2 65 1.2.65 1.2.65 931 3292 (affix) only. 1.2.66 1.2.64
And so also a feminine word, ending with a
affix, when similarly spoken along with the same
word but which ends with a affix, is only
1 2 66 1.2.66 1.2.66 932 3823 retained and it is treated like a masculine. 1.2.67 1.2.65
A word in the masculine gender, similarly spoken
along with the same word, but ending with the
feminine affix, becomes and the latter is
1 2 67 1.2.67 1.2.67 933 2389 dropped. 1.2.68 1.2.66
The words 'brother' and 'son', when spoken
of along with 'sister' and 'daughter'
respectively are only retained and the latter are
1 2 68 1.2.68 1.2.68
934 2709 dropped. 1.2.69 1.2.67
A neuter noun, which has the same form, only
differing in affix, is optionally retained and the other
1 2 69 1.2.69 1.2.69

935 2114 is dropped and it is like a singular number. neuter 1.2.70 1.2.68
The word 'father' is optionally only retained
1 2 70 1.2.70 1.2.70 936 2372 when spoken of along with 'mother'. 1.2.71 1.2.69
The word 'father-in-law', is optionally only
retained, when spoken of along with 'mother-
1 2 71 1.2.71 1.2.71 937 3465 in-law'. 1.2.72 1.2.70
The pronouns etc. when spoken of along with
any other noun, (pronoun other than etc.) are
always retained as (to the exclusion of
1 2 72 1.2.72 1.2.72 938 1800 others). 1.2.73 1.2.71
The feminine noun is only retained when denoting a
1 2 73 1.2.73 1.2.73 939 1348 collection of domestic animals, not being young. feminine 1.3.1 1.2.72
02.
The words beginning with 'to become' and
1 3 1 1.3.1 1.3.1 18 2694 49 denoting action, are called or verbal roots. 1.3.2 1.2.73
02.

The nasalised vowels are in or original
1 3 2 1.3.2 1.3.2 3 759 36 enunciation. 1.3.3 1.3.1
01.

1 3 3 1.3.3 1.3.3 1 3914 5 In , the final consonant of roots etc. is 1.3.4 1.3.2
05.

The final dental consonants and the final and

are not , in affixes called or inflective
1 3 4 1.3.4 1.3.4 190 2067 150 affixes. 1.3.5 1.3.3
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
1 3 5 1.3.5 1.3.5 2289 524 The initial , , are 1.3.6 1.3.4
1 3 6 1.3.6 1.3.6 474 3470 The initial of an affix is indicatory. 1.3.7 1.3.5
05.

The initial palatals and linguals of an affix are
1 3 7 1.3.7 1.3.7 189 1425 148 indicatory. 1.3.8 1.3.6
05.

The initial and and the gutturals of all affixes,
1 3 8 1.3.8 1.3.8 195 2974 155 except , are indicatory. 1.3.9 1.3.7
01.

Of this, (namely of that which has been called ),
1 3 9 1.3.9 - 1.3.9 62 1701 7 there is elision. 1.3.10 1.3.8
When a rule involves the case of equal numbers of
02. substitutes and of things for which these are to be
substituted, their mutual correspondence or
assignment of each to each, is according to the
1 3 10 1.3.10 1.3.10 128 2832 30 order of enumeration. 1.3.11 1.3.9
In these aphorisms, when a word is marked with a
accent, by that an or a governing
1 3 11 1.3.11 1.3.11 46 3879 rule is to be understood. 1.3.12 1.3.10
After a root which has an indicatory vowel
( ) or an indicatory ( ), the affixes are -
1 3 12 1.3.12 1.3.12 2157 196 those of the 1.3.13 1.3.11
An affix is the substitute of the affix
3.4.69 when it denotes the action of the verb or the
1 3 13 1.3.13 1.3.13 2679 2660 object of the verb. 1.3.14 1.3.12
In denoting the agent, when reciprocity of action is
to be expressed, the affixes of the are
1 3 14 1.3.14 1.3.14 2680 1004 employed. 1.3.15 1.3.13
After verbs having the sense of 'motion', or 'injury',
when expressing interchange of action, the
1 3 15 1.3.15 1.3.15 2681 2020 affixes are used. 1.3.16 1.3.14
And after the verbs which take the words
'each other' and 'one another', as (or
dependant qualifying words), the affixes of
are not used, though reciprocity of action
1 3 16 1.3.16 1.3.16
2682 630 be denoted. 1.3.17 1.3.15
After the verb 'to enter', when preceded by the
1 3 17 1.3.17 1.3.17 2683 2236 preposition , the affixes are employed 1.3.18 1.3.16
After the verb 'to purchase', when preceded by
, or , the affix is employed,
even when the fruit of the action does not accrue to
1 3 18 1.3.18 1.3.18 2684 2320 the agent. 1.3.19 1.3.17
After the verb 'to conquer', preceded by or
1 3 19 1.3.19 1.3.19 2685 3175 , the affix is employed. 1.3.20 1.3.18
After the verb 'to give', preceded by , and
when not meaning 'to open the mouth', the
affix is used, even when the fruit of the
1 3 20 1.3.20 1.3.20 2686 477 action does not accrue to the agent. 1.3.21 1.3.19
After the verb 'to play', preceded by , ,
1 3 21 1.3.21 1.3.21 2687 1210 or as well as , the affix is used. 1.3.22 1.3.20
After the verb 'to stand', preceded by , ,
1 3 22 1.3.22 1.3.22 2689 3627 , , the affix is used. 1.3.23 1.3.21
After the verb 'when meaning to indicate one's
intentions to another', or 'to make an award as an
1 3 23 1.3.23 1.3.23 2690 2447 arbitrator', the affix is employed. 1.3.24 1.3.22
After the verb 'to stand', preceded by , when
not meaning 'to get up or rise', as from a seat; the
1 3 24 1.3.24 1.3.24 2691 747 affix is used. 1.3.25 1.3.23
1 3 25 1.3.25 1.3.25 2692 804 meaning 'to adore', the affix is used. 1.3.26 1.3.24
1 3 26 1.3.26 1.3.26 2693 10 meaning 'to adore', the affix is used. 1.3.27 1.3.25
After the word 'to shine', when used
intransitively and preceded by or the
1 3 27 1.3.27 1.3.27 2694 751 affix is used. 1.3.28 1.3.26
After the verb 'to stop' and 'to injure', when
used intransitively and preceded by , the
1 3 28 1.3.28 1.3.28 2695 479 affix is used. 1.3.29 1.3.27
After the verbs 'to go', 'to become hard',
'to ask', 'to find fault', 'to go', 'to hear'
and 'to know', when used intransitively and
1 3 29 1.3.29 1.3.29

2699 3656 preceded by , the affix is used. 1.3.30 1.3.28
After the verbs 'to call', preceded by , ,
and , the is used, even, when the fruit
1 3 30 1.3.30 1.3.30 2703 2214 of the action does not accrue to the agent. 1.3.31 1.3.29
After the verbs 'to call', when meaning 'to
challenge' and preceded by , the is
used, even, when the fruit of the action does not
1 3 31 1.3.31 1.3.31 2704 3844 accrue to the agent. 1.3.32 1.3.30
After the verb when meaning 'to divulge', 'to
revile', 'to serve', 'to use violence', 'to cause
change', 'to recite' and 'to do an act tending to
effect a desired purpose', the is used,
even when the fruit of the action does not accrue to
1 3 32 1.3.32 1.3.32

2705 1270 the agent. 1.3.33 1.3.31
After the verb preceded by , when the sense
is that of 'overcoming or defeat', the is
used, even when the fruit of the action does not
1 3 33 1.3.33 1.3.33 2706 156 accrue to the agent. 1.3.34 1.3.32
After the verb preceded by , even when the
fruit of the action does not accrue to the agent, and
when the sense is that of 'making sound' (literally
having 'sound' for its object), the affix is
1 3 34 1.3.34 1.3.34 2707 3299 used. 1.3.35 1.3.33
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
After the verb preceded by , when used
1 3 35 1.3.35 1.3.35 2708 11 intransitively, the is used. 1.3.36 1.3.34
After the verb 'to lead', when used in the sense
of 'to guide so as to render the person guided
worthy', 'to lift up', 'make one a spiritual guide', 'to
determine the true sense', 'to employ on wages', 'to
pay debt' and 'to give as in charity', even when the
fruit of the action does not accrue to the agent, the
1 3 36 1.3.36 1.3.36

2709 3670 is used. 1.3.37 1.3.35
After the verb , when it governs an incorporeal
object in the agent, as its object, the is
1 3 37 1.3.37 1.3.37 2710 1003 used. 1.3.38 1.3.36
After the verb 'to move', when used in the
senses of 'continuity', 'energy' and 'development',
1 3 38 1.3.38 1.3.38 2711 3280 the is used. 1.3.39 1.3.37
After the verb , preceded by and , when
used in the senses of 'continuity', 'energy' and
1 3 39 1.3.39 1.3.39 2712 764 'development', the is used. 1.3.40 1.3.38
After the verb , preceded by an , the
is used,when in the sense of 'the rising of
1 3 40 1.3.40 1.3.40 2713 473 a luminary'. 1.3.41 1.3.39
After the verb preceded by , the is
1 3 41 1.3.41 1.3.41 2714 3298 used, when in the sense of 'placing of foot-steps'. 1.3.42 1.3.40
After the verb preceded by , the is
used when it is preceded by and , both
conveying the same sense; viz. that of 'beginning
1 3 42 1.3.42 1.3.42 2715 2564 an action'. 1.3.43 1.3.41
After the verb the is optionally used,
1 3 43 1.3.43 1.3.43 2716 212 when it is not preceded by any preposition. 1.3.44 1.3.42
After the verb , when used in the sense of
1 3 44 1.3.44 1.3.44 2717 286 'denying', the is used. 1.3.45 1.3.43
And when used intransitively after the verb , the
is used, when the fruit of the action does
1 3 45 1.3.45 1.3.45 2718 12 not accrue to the agent. 1.3.46 1.3.44
After the verb , preceded by and , the
is used, when Not Used in the sense of
1 3 46 1.3.46 1.3.46 2719 3660 'remembering with regret'. 1.3.47 1.3.45
After the verb , the is used, when used
in the senses of 'showing brilliance, or proficiency
in', pacifying', 'knowledge', 'effort', 'difference of
1 3 47 1.3.47 1.3.47
2720 2667 opinion' and 'flattering'. 1.3.48 1.3.46
After the verb , the is used, when used
in the sense of 'speaking articulately in a similar
1 3 48 1.3.48 1.3.48 2721 3320 manner'. 1.3.49 1.3.47
After the verb , preceded by when it is
intransitively used, the is used, when the
sense is that of 'speaking articulately in a similar
1 3 49 1.3.49 1.3.49
2722 231 manner'. 1.3.50 1.3.48
After the verb , the is used otpionally,
when the sense is that of 'contradicting with each
1 3 50 1.3.50 1.3.50
2723 3223 other'. 1.3.51 1.3.49
After the verb 'to swallow', when preceded by ,
1 3 51 1.3.51 1.3.51 2724 388 the is used. 1.3.52 1.3.50
After the verb 'to swallow', when preceded by
, the affix is used in the sense of
1 3 52 1.3.52 1.3.52 2725 3620 'promising'. 1.3.53 1.3.51
After the verb 'to walk' preceded by , when
1 3 53 1.3.53 1.3.53 2726 731 used intransitively, the is used. 1.3.54 1.3.52
After the verb 'to walk' preceded by , and
when connected with a noun in the Instrumental -
1 3 54 1.3.54 1.3.54 2727 3630 3rd Case, the is used. 1.3.55 1.3.53
And after the verb 'to give', preceded by ,
and connected with a noun in the Instrumental - 3rd
Case, the affix is used, provided this
Instrumental Case has the sense of the Dative - 4th
1 3 55 1.3.55 1.3.55

2728 1841 Case. 1.3.56 1.3.54
After the verb 'to give', preceded by , when
used in the sense of 'espousing', the is
1 3 56 1.3.56 1.3.56 2729 802 used. 1.3.57 1.3.55
After the Desideratives formed by the affix , of
the verbs 'to know', 'to hear', 'to remember'
1 3 57 1.3.57 1.3.57 2731 1530 and 'to see', the is used. 1.3.58 1.3.56
After the Desiderative of 'to know' when
1 3 58 1.3.58 1.3.58 2732 2151 preceded by , the affix is Not used. 1.3.59 1.3.57
After the Desideratives of 'to hear', when
preceded by and , the affix is Not
1 3 59 1.3.59 1.3.59

2733 2481 used. 1.3.60 1.3.58
After the verb 'to decay', when it has one of the
affixes with an indicatory ( ) the is
1 3 60 1.3.60 1.3.60 2362 3356 used. 1.3.61 1.3.59
After the verb 'to die', when it has one of the
affixes having an indicatory , as well as when it
takes the affixes (Aorist 3.2.110) and
1 3 61 1.3.61 1.3.61 2538 2803 (Benedictive 3.3.159), the is used. 1.3.62 1.3.60
The verb which is in its primitive form
before taking of the affix , will also be
when it ends in the affix in other words; after a
Desiderative verb, is used, if it would
1 3 62 1.3.62 1.3.62 2734 2422 have been used after the primitive verb. 1.3.63 1.3.61
Like the verb that takes the affix , if the verb be
conjugated with the terminations, so of
the verb when subjoined thereto as an auxiliary,
the terminations are of the , even when
1 3 63 1.3.63 1.3.63 2240 556 the fruit of the action does not acccrue to the agent. 1.3.64 1.3.62
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
After the verb 'to join', the is used,
when it is preceded by and except with
reference to sacrificial vessels even when the fruit
1 3 64 1.3.64 1.3.64

2735 2563 of the action does not accrue to the agent. 1.3.65 1.3.63
After the verb 'to sharpen', preceded by ,
1 3 65 1.3.65 1.3.65 2736 3619 the is used. 1.3.66 1.3.64
After the verb , the is used, except in
1 3 66 1.3.66 1.3.66 2737 2682 the sense of protecting. 1.3.67 1.3.65
After a verb ending in the affix (causal) the
is used, provided that when the object in
the non- or non-causal sense becomes the agent
in the causal; and when it does not mean 'to
remember with regret', even when the fruit of the
1 3 67 1.3.67 1.3.67

2738 1583 action does not accrue to the agent. 1.3.68 1.3.66
After the causatives of the verbs 'to fear' and
'to wonder' even when the fruit of the action does
not accrue to the agent the is employed,
when the fear is produced directly by the causative
1 3 68 1.3.68 1.3.68 2594 2678 agent. 1.3.69 1.3.67
After the causatives of the verbs 'to covet' and
'to go' the is used in the sense of
'deceiving' even though the fruit of the action does
1 3 69 1.3.69 1.3.69 2739 1303 not accrue to the agent. 1.3.70 1.3.68
After the causative of the verb 'to melt or stick',
the is employed, when used in the sense
of showing respect, subduing and deceiving, even
though the fruit of action does not accrue to the
1 3 70 1.3.70 1.3.70
2592 3001 agent. 1.3.71 1.3.69
After the causative of the verb , the is
used, when it has the word 'incorrect', as an
or dependent word and is used in the sense
of 'repeated wrong utterance', even when the fruit
1 3 71 1.3.71 1.3.71 2740 2780 of action does not accrue no the agent. 1.3.72 1.3.70
After the verb marked with a or which has an
indicatory , the terminations of the
are used, when the fruit of the action accrues to the
1 3 72 1.3.72 1.3.72 2158 3876 agent. 1.3.73 1.3.71
After the verb 'to tell', preceded by , when
the fruit of the action accrues to the agent, the
1 3 73 1.3.73 1.3.73 2741 292 terminations are of the 1.3.74 1.3.72
After a verb ending in the affix (causal) when the
fruit of the action accrues to the agent, the
1 3 74 1.3.74 1.3.74 2564 1580 is used. 1.3.75 1.3.73
After the verb 'to strive', preceded by ,
and , when it does not refer to a book, the
is used, when the fruit of the action
1 3 75 1.3.75 1.3.75
2742 3651 accrues to the agent. 1.3.76 1.3.74
After the verb , when not preceded by any
, the terminations are of the , when the
1 3 76 1.3.76 1.3.76
2743 210 fruit of the action accrues to the agent. 1.3.77 1.3.75
The is optionally used, when the fact of
the fruit of the action accruing to the agent is
indicted by an i.e. by a word used along
1 3 77 1.3.77 1.3.77
2744 3253 with the verb. 1.3.78 1.3.76
After the rest i.e. all those verbs not falling under
any one of the previous provisions, the terminations
of the are used, in marking the agent i.e. in
1 3 78 1.3.78 1.3.78 2159 3428 the active voice. 1.3.79 1.3.77
After the verb 'to make' preceded by the and
, is used, even the fruit of the action
goes to the agent and when the sense is that of
1 3 79 1.3.79 1.3.79 2745 209 'divulging' etc. 1.3.80 1.3.78
After the verb 'to throw', coming after ,
and , is used, even though the fruit of
1 3 80 1.3.80 1.3.80 2746 311 the action goes to the agent 1.3.81 1.3.79
After the verb 'to bear', coming after ,
is used, even though the fruit of the action accrues
1 3 81 1.3.81 1.3.81 2747 2543 to the the agent. 1.3.82 1.3.80
After the verb 'to bear', preceded by ,
is used when the fruit of the action accrues
1 3 82 1.3.82 1.3.82 2748 2325 to the agent. 1.3.83 1.3.81
After the verb 'to sport', preceded by and
1 3 83 1.3.83 1.3.83 2749 3330 , is used. 1.3.84 1.3.82
And also after , the verb takes the affixes of
1 3 84 1.3.84 1.3.84 2750 797 the 1.3.85 1.3.83
After the verb 'to sport', preceded by ,
is optionally used, when employed
1 3 85 1.3.85 1.3.85 2751 3242 intransitively. 1.3.86 1.3.84
After the verbs 'to know', 'to fight', 'to
destroy', 'to be born', 'to go', 'to move',
'to run' and 'to flow', ending in the affix (i.e.
when used in the causative), is used, even
1 3 86 1.3.86 1.3.86 2752 2626 when the fruit of the action goes to the agent. 1.3.87 1.3.85
And after the causatives of verbs which have no
sense of the 'eating or swallowing' and 'shaking or
moving' is used, even when the fruit of the
1 3 87 1.3.87 1.3.87 2753 2166 action goes to the agent. 1.3.88 1.3.86
The affixes of the are used after the causal
of that verb, which in its non-causal state was
intransitive and had a being endowed with reason
for its agent, even when the fruit of the action
1 3 88 1.3.88 1.3.88
2754 83 accrues to the agent. 1.3.89 1.3.87
But the affixes of the are not used after the
causals of the verbs 'to drink', 'to tame',
'to extend', 'to exert oneself', 'to be
bewildered', 'to shine' 'to dance', 'to
1 3 89 1.3.89 1.3.89

2755 2042 speak' and 'to dwell'. 1.3.90 1.3.88
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affixes of the are used optionally after
1 3 90 1.3.90 1.3.90 2669 3100 the denominative verbs ending in the affix 1.3.91 1.3.89
After the verbs 'to shine' etc., the terminations
of the are optionally employed, when the
1 3 91 1.3.91 1.3.91 2345 1926 affixes of (Aorist) follow. 1.3.92 1.3.90
After the verbs 'to exist' etc., is
optionally used when the affixes (Future and
1 3 92 1.3.92 1.3.92 2347 3293 conditional) and (Desiderative) follow. 1.3.93 1.3.91
After the verb 'to be fit', is optionally
used, when (1st Future) is affixed, as well as
1 3 93 1.3.93 1.3.93 2351 3011 when and are affixed. 1.4.1 1.3.92
05.

From this up the the aphorism

14001- 2.2.38 only one name of each thing named is to be
1 4 1 1.4.1 22038 1.4.1 232 457 186 understood. 1.4.2 1.3.93
04.

When rules of equal force prohibit each other then
1 4 2 1.4.2 1.4.2 175 3178 132 the last in the order herein given is to take effect. 1.4.3 1.4.1
Word-forms ending in long and being names of about
1 4 3 1.4.3 1.4.3 266 2880 females called 1.4.4 1.4.2
Feminine words ending in and which admit the
substitute and 6.1.77 are not called ;
except the word (which is called not
1 4 4 1.4.4 1.4.4 _

303 2232 withstanding its substituting ). 1.4.5 1.4.3
Feminine words ending in and though admiting
and 6.1.77 substitutes, are optionally
termed when the affix (Genitive Plural)
follows, but not so the word , which is always
1 4 5 1.4.5 1.4.5
_ 304 3127 1.4.6 1.4.4
When a case-affix having an indicatory ( )
follows, then feminine words ending in short and
are optionally termed , as well as feminine
nouns in long and which admit and ;
1 4 6 1.4.6 1.4.6 _ 293 1373 but not so the word which is always 1.4.7 1.4.5
05.

The rest of the words that end in short and are
1 4 7 1.4.7 1.4.7 243 3437 190 with the exception of the word 1.4.8 1.4.6
05.

The word is called only when it is in a
1 4 8 1.4.8 1.4.8 257 2269 205 compound. 1.4.9 1.4.7
The word when used in connection with a noun
ending in the 6th or genitive case, is , optionally,
1 4 9 1.4.9 1.4.9 3389 3489 in the (Veda). 1.4.10 1.4.8
1 4 10 1.4.10 1.4.10 31 3967 A short vowel is called 'light'. 1.4.11 1.4.9
When a conjunct consonant followsm a short vowel
1 4 11 1.4.11 1.4.11 32 3562 is termed 'heavy'. 1.4.12 1.4.10
1 4 12 1.4.12 1.4.12 33 1879 And a long vowel is also called 'heavy'. 1.4.13 1.4.11
05.
After whatsoever there is an affix enjoined, wether
verbal or crude-form, that which begins therewith in
the form in which it appears when the affix follows
1 4 13 1.4.13 1.4.13
199 2846 152 it, is called an 'Inflective base'. 1.4.14 1.4.12
01.
That which ends in 'case-affix' 4.1.2 or
1 4 14 1.4.14 1.4.14 29 3763 20 3.4.78 (tense-affix), is called or inflected word. 1.4.15 1.4.13
The word-form ending in , is called when
1 4 15 1.4.15 1.4.15 2651 2082 follows (i.e. the affixes , and 1.4.16 1.4.14
When an affix having an indicatory follows then
1 4 16 1.4.16 1.4.16 2252 3734 that which precedes it is called - , 1.4.17 1.4.15
05.
When the affixes beginning with a 4.1.2 and
ending in 5.4.151 follow, not being
1 4 17 1.4.17 1.4.17
230 3889 184 1.1.43 then that which precedes is called 1.4.18 1.4.16
05. And when an affix with an initial or an initial
vowel, being one of the affixes, beginning with
and ending in , follows, not being ,
1 4 18 1.4.18 1.4.18
231 2810 185 then what precedes, is called 1.4.19 1.4.17
The word-form ending in or in is called when
an affix with the force of 'whose is it' or 'in
1 4 19 1.4.19 1.4.19

1896 1682 whom it is' 5.2.94, follows. 1.4.20 1.4.18
Words like etc. are valid forms in the
1 4 20 1.4.20 1.4.20 ? 3370 341 1.4.21 1.4.19
05.

In expressing multeity, a Plural case affix is
1 4 21 1.4.21 - - -- 1.4.21 ? 187 2608 143 employed. 1.4.22 1.4.20
05.

The dual and singular case-affixes are employed
1 4 22 1.4.22 - - -- 1.4.22 186 1985 142 severally in the sense of duality and unity. 1.4.23 1.4.21
The phrase (meaning 'in the special relation
14023- to a word expressing an action') is to be understood
1 4 23 1.4.23 ;
14055 1.4.23 534 1053 in the following aphorisms. - - 1.4.24 1.4.22
A noun whose relation to an action is that of a fixed
point from which departure takes place is called
1 4 24 1.4.24

1.4.24 586 2009 or Ablation. 1.4.25 1.4.23
In case of words implying 'fear' and 'protection from
danger' that from which the danger of fear
1 4 25 1.4.25

1.4.25
588 2675 procedes is called - 1.4.26 1.4.24
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
In the case of the verb 'to be tired or weary
of', that which becomes unbearable, is called
1 4 26 1.4.26
1.4.26
589 2303 - 1.4.27 1.4.25
In case of verbs having the sense of 'preventing,
the desired object from which one is prevented or
1 4 27 1.4.27

1.4.27
590 3145 warded off', is called Ablation or - 1.4.28 1.4.26
When concealment is indicated, the person whose
1 4 28 1.4.28

1.4.28

591 245 sight one wishes to avoid, is called - 1.4.29 1.4.27
The noun denoting the teacher is called Ablation or
, in relation to the action signifying formal
1 4 29 1.4.29

1.4.29
592 469 teaching. - 1.4.30 1.4.28
The prime cause of the agent of the verb 'to be
1 4 30 1.4.30

1.4.30
593 1484 born', is called - 1.4.31 1.4.29
The source of the agent of the verb 'to become' is
1 4 31 1.4.31

1.4.31
594 2683 called - 1.4.32 1.4.30
The person whom one wishes to connect with the
1 4 32 1.4.32

1.4.32

569 1009 object of giving, is called or receipient. - 1.4.33 1.4.31
In case of verbs having the signification of the root
'to like', the person or thing that is pleased or -
1 4 33 1.4.33

1.4.33
571 2942 satisfied, is called or receipient. 1.4.34 1.4.32
In case of verbs 'to praise', 'to take away',
'to stand', 'to curse', the preson whom it is
intended to inform of or persuade by, these actions, -
1 4 34 1.4.34

1.4.34

572 3459 is called 1.4.35 1.4.33
In the case of the verb 'to owe', the creditor is -
1 4 35 1.4.35

1.4.35
573 2003 called 1.4.36 1.4.34
In the case of the verb 'to desire', the thing -
1 4 36 1.4.36

1.4.36
574 3847 desired is called 1.4.37 1.4.35
In the case of the verbs having the sense of
'to be angry', 'to injure', 'to envy', 'to
detract', the person against whom the feeling of -
1 4 37 1.4.37

1.4.37

575 1213 anger etc. is directed is called 1.4.38 1.4.36
But in the case of the verbs and , when
preceded by prepositions, the person against whom
the feeling of anger etc. is directed is called -
1 4 38 1.4.38

1.4.38

576 1214 or object. 1.4.39 1.4.37
In the case of the verbs 'to propitiate' and 'to
look to', the person about whose good or bad
1 4 39 1.4.39

1.4.39
577 2931 fortune questions are asked is called - 1.4.40 1.4.38
In the case of the verb preceded by the
prepositions and and meaning 'to promise',
the person to whom promise is made (literally: the
person who as the agent of the former verb) is -
1 4 40 1.4.40

1.4.40

578 2482 called 1.4.41 1.4.39
In the case of the verb preceded by and
and meaning 'to encourage by repeating', the
person who was the agent of the prior action, which -
1 4 41 1.4.41

1.4.41

579 215 is repeated, is called 1.4.42 1.4.40
That which is especially auxiliary in the
accomplishment of the action is called Instrument -
1 4 42 1.4.42

1.4.42 560 3715 or 1.4.43 1.4.41
That which is especially auxiliary in the
accomplishment of the action, of the verb 'to
1 4 43 1.4.43

1.4.43
562 1865 play' is called - object, as well as - 1.4.44 1.4.42
In the case of hiring on wages, that which is
especially auxiliary in the accomplishment of the
action of the verb 'employing on stipulated
1 4 44 1.4.44

1.4.44

580 2308 wages', is optionally called or receipient. - 1.4.45 1.4.43
That which is related to the action as the site where
the action is performed by reason of the agent or
-
the object being in that place is called or
1 4 45 1.4.45
1.4.45 632 536 location. 1.4.46 1.4.44
That which is the site of the verbs 'to lie down',
'to stand', 'to sit', when preceded by the
-
preposition , is however called or
1 4 46 1.4.46 1.4.46
542 152 object. 1.4.47 1.4.45
That which is the site of the verb 'to
1 4 47 1.4.47 1.4.47
543 308 enter', is also called - 1.4.48 1.4.46
That which is the site of the verb 'to dwell',
when preceded by , , and is called
1 4 48 1.4.48 1.4.48
544 805 - 1.4.49 1.4.47
That which is intended should be most effected by
1 4 49 1.4.49 1.4.49 535 998 the act of the agent is called the object or - 1.4.50 1.4.48
If that which is not intended to be most affected by
the act becomes however similarly connected with --
1 4 50 1.4.50 1.4.50
538 1624 the action it also is called 1.4.51 1.4.49
And if that which is not spoken of as coming
under any of the special relations of Ablation etc., is
1 4 51 1.4.51 1.4.51 539 7 also called - 1.4.52 1.4.50
Of the verbs having the sense of 'motion',
'knowledge or information' and 'eating' and of verbs
that have some literary work for their object and of
intransitive verbs, that which was the agent of the
verb in its primitive (non- or non-causal state), is
called the or object, in its causative state (when --
1 4 52 1.4.52 1.4.52

540 1260 the verb takes the affix ). 1.4.53 1.4.51
The agent of the verb in its non- (primitive) form
in the case of 'to lose' and 'to make', is
optionally called or object when these verbs
1 4 53 1.4.53 1.4.53

541 3947 take the affix. - 1.4.54 1.4.52
Whatever the speaker chooses as the independent,
principal and absolute source of action is called
1 4 54 1.4.54 1.4.54 559 3864 or agent. - 1.4.55 1.4.53
That which is the mover thereof, i.e. of the
independent source of action, is called or cause, --
1 4 55 1.4.55

1.4.55 2575 1610 as well as or agent. 1.4.56 1.4.54
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
From this point forward up to the aphorism
1.4.97, all that we shall say is to be --
14056-
1 4 56 1.4.56 14098 1.4.56 19 2526 understood to have the name of or Particles. 1.4.57 1.4.55
02.

The word 'and' etc. are called or Particles,
1 4 57 1.4.57 1.4.57 20 1405 66 when they do not signify susbtances. - -- , ,
1.4.58 1.4.56 , , , , ,
02.

The words etc. are called when not
1 4 58 1.4.58 1.4.58 21 2541 67 signifying susbtances. - 1.4.59 1.4.57
02.

The words etc. get the designation of or
1 4 59 1.4.59 1.4.59
22 780 47 prepositions, when in composition with a verb. - 1.4.60 1.4.58
The words etc. are called also when in
1 4 60 1.4.60 1.4.60
23 1263 composition with a verb. - 1.4.61 1.4.59
The words 'assent' etc. and those that end with
5.4.50 and those that end with 5.4.57
(when in composition with the verb , or )
1 4 61 1.4.61 1.4.61
762 844 are called - 1.4.62 1.4.60
A word imitative of sounds is also called when
1 4 62 1.4.62 1.4.62

763 186 it is not followed by the word - 1.4.63 1.4.61
The words and when in composition with
a verb ae called , when used in the sense of
1 4 63 1.4.63 1.4.63
764 517 'respect or love' and 'disrespect or indifference'. - 1.4.64 1.4.62
The word when in composition with a verb is
1 4 64 1.4.64 1.4.64 765 2695 called , when used in the sense of 'ornament'. - 1.4.65 1.4.63
The word is called , when used in the
sense of 'non-accepting', when in composition with
1 4 65 1.4.65 1.4.65 766 242 a verb. - 1.4.66 1.4.64
The words and are when in
composition with a verb and used in the sense of
1 4 66 1.4.66 1.4.66

767 963 'reaction by satiation'. - 1.4.67 1.4.65
The word 'in front of', when indeclinable and in --
1 4 67 1.4.67 1.4.67 768 2398 composition with a verb, is called 1.4.68 1.4.66
And the indeclinable word 'at home' is called
1 4 68 1.4.68 1.4.68
769 434 , when in composition with a verb. - 1.4.69 1.4.67
The indeclinable word 'before in the presence
of' is called , when used in the composition
with verbs denoting 'motion' or with the verb 'to
1 4 69 1.4.69 1.4.69

770 61 speak'. - 1.4.70 1.4.68
The word 'that' is called when in
composition with a verb and not implying a direction
1 4 70 1.4.70 1.4.70 771 137 to another. - 1.4.71 1.4.69
The word when used in the sense of
'disappearance' is called when in composition
1 4 71 1.4.71 1.4.71 772 1736 with a verb. - 1.4.72 1.4.70
The word 'disappearance' is optionally called
1 4 72 1.4.72 1.4.72

773 3188 when the verb follows. - 1.4.73 1.4.71
The words and both meaning
'supporting or assisting the weak', are optionally
1 4 73 1.4.73 1.4.73

774 798 called when used along with the verb - -
1.4.74 1.4.72
The words 'in the presence of' etc. are
optionally called when used along with the verb --
1 4 74 1.4.74 1.4.74
775 3711 - 1.4.75 1.4.73
The word 'in the breast' and 'in the mind'
ae optionally called when the verb follows,
provided that they are not used in the sense of
1 4 75 1.4.75 1.4.75

776 171 'placing'. - - 1.4.76 1.4.74
And the words 'in the middle', 'in the foot'
and 'speechless' are optionally called , - -
1 4 76 1.4.76 1.4.76

777 2731 when follows, the sense not being of placing. 1.4.77 1.4.75
The word 'in the hand', 'in the hand' are
always necessarily called when used with the
1 4 77 1.4.77 1.4.77
778 2184 verb in the sense of 'marriage'. - 1.4.78 1.4.76
The indeclinable word followed by the verb
, is always called when in used in the sense of
1 4 78 1.4.78 1.4.78 779 2544 'binding'. - 1.4.79 1.4.77
The words and followed by the verb
are called when used in the sense of
1 4 79 1.4.79 1.4.79
780 1521 'likeness and resemblance'. - 1.4.80 1.4.78
The particles called and are to be
-- - / - -
employed before the verbal roots (i.e. to say that
1 4 80 1.4.80
-- - 1.4.80 2230 1780 they are prefixes). 1.4.81 1.4.79
In the (Veda) these and are
-- - /
employed indifferently after the verbal root, as well
1 4 81 1.4.81
-- - 1.4.81
3391 1449 as before it. - 1.4.82 1.4.80
-- - /
In the (Veda) these and are also
1 4 82 1.4.82
-- - 1.4.82
3392 3326 seen separated from the verb by intervening words. 1.4.83 1.4.81
From this point as far as aphorism 1.4.97 treated
of, are to be understood as having the name of -
14083-
1 4 83 1.4.83 ;
14098
1.4.83 546 1025 1.4.84 1.4.82
The word , when it denotes a sign, is called -
1 4 84 1.4.84
1.4.84
547 219 - 1.4.85 1.4.83
-
The word , - when it has the force of
1 4 85 1.4.85
1.4.85

549 1772 the 3rd case. 1.4.86 1.4.84
-
The word , - when it is used in the
1 4 86 1.4.86
1.4.86
550 3943 sense of 'inferior or subordinate to'. 1.4.87 1.4.85
The word when it means 'superior' or 'inferior to' -
1 4 87 1.4.87
1.4.87

551 807 is - 1.4.88 1.4.86
-
The words and are - when
1 4 88 1.4.88
1.4.88
596 277 meaning 'exclusion'. 1.4.89 1.4.87
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The word 'as far as', is - when it
-
expresses limit (e.g. when it means 'as far as
1 4 89 1.4.89
1.4.89
597 483 inclusive of' or 'as far as exclusive of'). 1.4.90 1.4.88
The words , and are - when
used in the sense of 'sign' ('in the direction of') ,
'mere statement of circumstances' ('as regards'),
1 4 90 1.4.90
1.4.90

552 2966 'division', 'share of' and 'pervasion', severally. 1.4.91 1.4.89
The word is - when used in the
above senses of 'in the direction of', 'as regards',
and 'each severally', but not when it means
1 4 91 1.4.91
1.4.91

553 312 'division', 'share of'. 1.4.92 1.4.90
The word is - when used in the
sense of representative ('representative of') or
1 4 92 1.4.92
1.4.92

599 2461 exchange ('in exchange for'). 1.4.93 1.4.91
The words and are - when used
1 4 93 1.4.93
1.4.93
554 150 as mere expletives. 1.4.94 1.4.92
The word is - when used in the sense
1 4 94 1.4.94
1.4.94
555 3743 of respect, (when it means 'excellently'). 1.4.95 1.4.93
The word in the sense of super-abundance
1 4 95 1.4.95
1.4.95

556 105 ('excessively') and 'excellently' is - 1.4.96 1.4.94
The word is - when it implies, the
sense of word 'understood' ('somewhat') or
'possibility' (e.g. 'even' in the sense of such a great
person), or permission to do as one likes, ('if you
like'), or censure ('even' in the sense of what is
1 4 96 1.4.96
1.4.96

557 293 disgraceful); or collection ('and'). 1.4.97 1.4.95
The words is - when used in the
1 4 97 1.4.97
1.4.97
644 151 sense of 'lord' ('being as a lord' or 'having as a lord') 1.4.98 1.4.96
The words is optionally - when the
1 4 98 1.4.98
1.4.98
646 3189 verb follows. 1.4.99 1.4.97
1 4 99 1.4.99 1.4.99 2155 2963 The substitutes of are called 1.4.100 1.4.98
The nine affixes comprised under the -
and the two ending in ( and ), which
1 4 100 1.4.100 1.4.100 2156 1598 are susbtitutes of are called - 1.4.101 1.4.99
The three triads in both the sets and
, of conjugational affixes (comprised
under the general name , a formed of
the first and last of them, viz. and ) are
called, in order, Lowest - 3rd Person of European
Grammar, Middle -2nd Person, and Highest -1st
1 4 101 1.4.101 1.4.101 2160 1724 Person. 1.4.102 1.4.100
These three triads of conjugational affixes, which
have received the name of Lowest etc. are called
(as regard the three expressions in each triad)
severally 'the expression for one' (singular), 'the
expression for two' (dual) and 'the expression for
1 4 102 1.4.102 1.4.102

2161 1712 many' (plural). 1.4.103 1.4.101
05.
Of (which is a formed of the first of

the case affixes and the final of the last of them),

the expressions in each successive set of the three,
1 4 103 1.4.103 1.4.103
185 3758 141 are also severally called singular, dual and plural. 1.4.104 1.4.102
05.

The triads of conjugational affixes and case affixes
1 4 104 1.4.104 1.4.104
184 3180 149 are also called or Inflective affixes. 1.4.105 1.4.103
When the pronoun 'thou' understood, and
also when the same expressed, is the attendant
word in the agreement with the verb, then there is
the verbal termination called the middle (2nd
1 4 105 1.4.105 - 1.4.105

2162 2879 person). 1.4.106 1.4.104
When joke is implied with reference to an action,
the verb denoting it is used in the 2nd person;
provided that the word 'to think' is the
attendant word () of such verb and of the verb
itself, the affix must be of the 1st person and
1 4 106 1.4.106 - 1.4.106

2163 2517 singular number. 1.4.107 1.4.105
When the pronoun 'I', understood and also
when expressed, is the attendant word in
agreement with the verb, then there is the verbal
1 4 107 1.4.107 - 1.4.107 2164 441 termination called the Highest or 1st person. 1.4.108 1.4.106
In the other cases, viz. where 'thou' or 'I' are not the
attendant words in agreement with the verb, there
is the verbal termination called the Lowest (3rd
1 4 108 1.4.108 - 1.4.108 2165 3431 person). 1.4.109 1.4.107
01. The closest proximity of letters, there being the
intervention of half a or prosodial length
1 4 109 1.4.109 1.4.109 28 2296 18 between them, is called contact or 1.4.110 1.4.108
05.

The cessation or the absence of succeeding letters
1 4 110 1.4.110 1.4.110 27 3260 144 is called pause or - 2.1.1 1.4.109
A rule which relates to complete words (and not to
the roots out of which the words are constructed) is
to be understood to apply only to those words the
2 1 1 2.1.1 2.1.1 647 3625 senses of which are connected. - 2.1.2 1.4.110
A word ending in or a case-affix, when followed
by a word in the Vocative Case, is regarded as if it
was the or component part of such
subsequent vocative word, when a rule relating to
2 1 2 2.1.2 - 2.1.2 3656 3767 accent is to be applied. 2.1.3 2.1.1
From this point up to the aphorism
21003- 2.2.38, all the terms that we shall say, describe will
2 1 3 2.1.3 ;
22038 2.1.3 648 2518 get the designation of or compound 2.1.4 2.1.2
The words meaning 'with a word ending in a
case-affix', are to be understood in each of the
2 1 4 2.1.4 2.1.4 649 3698 succeeding aphorisms. 2.1.5 2.1.3
From this point forward whatever we shall describe

21005- will get the name or adverbial
2 1 5 2.1.5 ;
21021
2.1.5

651 404 compound. 2.1.6 2.1.4
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
An - indeclinable, used with the sense of an
inflective-affix ( ) or of near to, or prosperity,
or diversity, or absence of the thing, or departure,
or not now, or the production of some sound, or
after, or according to, or order of arrangement, or
totality, or termination, is invariably compounded
with a word ending in a case-affix which is
-- - -- - - - -- - - - - - connected with it in sense and the compound so
2 1 6 2.1.6
2.1.6
652

400 - formed is called 1. 2.
2.1.7 2.1.5 3. 4. 5
The indeclinable word when it does not signify
'likeness' is invariably compounded with a word
ending in a case-affix which is in construction with it
2 1 7 2.1.7
2.1.7
661 2827 and the compound is called 2.1.8 2.1.6
The indeclinable word when it signifies
limitation, is invariably compounded with a word
ending in a case-affix which is in construction with
it, and the compound so formed is called
2 1 8 2.1.8
2.1.8
662 2859 2.1.9 2.1.7
A word ending in a case-affix is compounded with
the indeclinable word , when meaning 'a little'
2 1 9 2.1.9
2.1.9

663 3764 and the compound so formed is called 2.1.10 2.1.8
The words 'a die for playing with', 'an
ivory piece used in gambling' and 'numerals'
are compounded with the word and the
2 1 10 2.1.10
2.1.10

664 18 compound so formed is called 2.1.11 2.1.9
The word or option governs all succeeding
2 1 11 2.1.11
2.1.11
665 3182 stras. 2.1.12 2.1.10
The words , , and indeclinables ending
in may optionally be compounded with a word
ending in the 5th case affix and the compound so -
2 1 12 2.1.12
2.1.12

666 276 formed will be 2.1.13 2.1.11
The word when signifying limit exclusive or limit
inclusive, may optionally be compounded with a
word ending in the 5th case and the compound so -
2 1 13 2.1.13
2.1.13

667 482 formed is called 2.1.14 2.1.12
The words and when implying direction
(towards), are optionally compounded with a word
ending in a case-affix denoting the limit, or the goal
which regulates or marks the direction and the -
2 1 14 2.1.14
2.1.14

668 2967 resulting compound is 2.1.15 2.1.13
The word 'near to' is optionally compounded
with that word, nearness to which is indicated by
the particle and the resulting compound is -
2 1 15 2.1.15
2.1.15

669 218 2.1.16 2.1.14
The word 'alongside of' is optionally
compounded with the word indicative of that whose
length the particle expresses and compound so -
2 1 16 2.1.16
2.1.16

670 2849 formed is called 2.1.17 2.1.15
And the words 'at the time when the cows -
2 1 17 2.1.17
2.1.17

671 1739 stand to be milked', etc. are compounds. , 2.1.18
,
2.1.16 , , ,
The words 'across' and 'middle' may
optionally be compounded with a word ending in
the 6th-Case-affix, when they take forms and -
2 1 18 2.1.18
2.1.18

672 2368 and the compound so formed is 2.1.19 2.1.17
A numeral ( ) may be compounded with a word
denoting 'one belonging toa family' and the -
2 1 19 2.1.19
2.1.19

673 3508 resulting compound is 2.1.20 2.1.18
A numeral ( ) may be compounded with the
names of 'rivers' and the resulting compound is -
2 1 20 2.1.20
2.1.20
674 2104 denoting an aggregate. 2.1.21 2.1.19
A word ending in a case-affix is compounded with
words denoting the names of rivers, when the
compound word denotes a thing other than that
expressed by the terms of the compound and is an
appelllative, the compound so formed being an -
2 1 21 2.1.21
2.1.21

675 260 2.1.22 2.1.20
From this stra as far as stra 2.2.23, the word -
- -
21022- is governing word, and is understood in all the
2 1 22 2.1.22 ;
22022

2.1.22
684 1601 following stras. 2.1.23 2.1.21
And the compound called (Numeral - -
2 1 23 2.1.23

2.1.23
685 1944 Determinative Compound) is all called - 2.1.24 2.1.22
A word ending in a 2nd case-affix is compounded
with the words 'who had recourse to',
'gone by', 'who has fallen upon', 'who has
gone to', 'who has passed', 'who has
obtained' and 'who has reached' and the - -
2 1 24 2.1.24

2.1.24

686 1954 resulting compound is called - 2.1.25 2.1.23
The indeclinable word 'oneself' is
compounded with a word ending in the affix and - -
2 1 25 2.1.25

2.1.25
678 3873 the resulting compound is - 2.1.26 2.1.24
The word in the Accusative -2nd case is
compounded with a word ending in the affix ,
when censure is implied and the compound so - -
2 1 26 2.1.26

2.1.26
688 1247 formed is - 2.1.27 2.1.25
The indeclinable word 'half' is compounded
with a word ending in the affix and the resulting - -
2 1 27 2.1.27

2.1.27
689 3720 compound is - 2.1.28 2.1.26
The words denoting time, being in the Accusative
-2nd case, are optionally compounded with a word
ending in the affix and the resulting compound - -
2 1 28 2.1.28

2.1.28
690 1062 is - 2.1.29 2.1.27
Words denoting time being in the Accusative -2nd
case, are optionally compounded with a word
ending in a case-affix, when used in the sense of
complete connection throughout with the time (i.e.
duration of time) and the resulting compound is - - -
2 1 29 2.1.29

2.1.29

691 120 2.1.30 2.1.28
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
A word ending with the Instrumental -3rd case-affix
is optionally compounded with what denotes
quality, the quality being that which is
instrumentally caused by the thing signified by what
ends with the 3rd case-affix and with the word - -
2 1 30 2.1.30

2.1.30

692 1770 'wealth' and the resulting compound is - 2.1.31 2.1.29
A word ending in Instrumental -3rd case-affix is
compounded with the words 'prior', 'like',
'similar', 'words having the sense of less',
'quarrel', 'proficient', 'mixed' and
'polished sleek', and the resulting compound - -
2 1 31 2.1.31

2.1.31

693 2424 is - 2.1.32 2.1.30
A word ending with the Instrumental -3rd case-affix,
when it denotes the agent or instrument -- 2.3.18, is
compounded diversely with what ends with a - -
2 1 32 2.1.32

2.1.32

694 1000 affix and the resulting compound is - 2.1.33 2.1.31
when it denotes the agent or the Instrument, is
compounded optionally with a word ending in a
affix, when exaggerated statement (wether of
praise or of censure) is implied and the resulting - -
2 1 33 2.1.33

2.1.33

695 1150 compound is - 2.1.34 2.1.32
and denoting a condiment, is optionally
compounded with a word ending in a case-affix,
signifying food and the resulting compound is - - -
2 1 34 2.1.34

2.1.34

696 257 2.1.35 2.1.33
and denoting a relish giving or refining ingredient, is
compounded with a word meaning, victuals and the - -
2 1 35 2.1.35

2.1.35

697 2643 resulting compound is - 2.1.36 2.1.34
A word ending with the Dative -4th case is
compounded with what denotes that which is for
the purpose of what ends with the Dative -4th case
and so too with the words 'on account of',
'a sacrifice', 'salutary', 'pleasure' and - -
2 1 36 2.1.36

2.1.36

698 1389 'kept' and the resulting compound is - 2.1.37 2.1.35
A word ending with the Ablative -5th case-affix is
optionally compounded with the word 'fear' and - -
2 1 37 2.1.37

2.1.37
A word ending with the Ablative -5th case-affix is
compounded with the words 'gone away',
'carried away', 'freed', 'fallen',
'afraid of', when the event takes place in a
gradual manner and the resulting compound is - - -
2 1 38 2.1.38

2.1.38

700 298 2.1.39 2.1.37
Words with a sense of 'aa little', 'near',
'far' and 'penance', ending in the Ablative
-5th case are compounded with what ends in - -
2 1 39 2.1.39

2.1.39

701 3813 and the resulting compound is - 2.1.40 2.1.38
A word ending in the Locative -7th-case-affix is
compounded with the words 'skilled' etc. and - -
2 1 40 2.1.40

2.1.40

A word ending with the Locative -7th-case-affix is
compounded with the words 'perfected',
'dried', 'cooked', and 'bound' and the - -
2 1 41 2.1.41

2.1.41

A word ending in the Locative -7th-case-affix is
compounded with the words 'a crow' and
synonyms of crow when contempt is implied and - -
2 1 42 2.1.42

2.1.42
compounded with words ending with -affix (a
Future Passive Participle) and the resulting - -
2 1 43 2.1.43

2.1.43
720 1151 compound is - 2.1.44 2.1.42
invariably compounded with a word ending in a
case-affix, when the compound thus formed is used
as an appellative and the resulting compound is - -
2 1 44 2.1.44

2.1.44

721 3546 - 2.1.45 2.1.43
The names of divisions of day or night ending with
Locative -7th-case-affix are compounded with
words ending with affix and the resulting - -
2 1 45 2.1.45

2.1.45

722 1185 compound is - 2.1.46 2.1.44
The word 'there' which is a word ending with
Locative -7th-case-affix 5.3.10, is
compounded with a word ending in and the - -
2 1 46 2.1.46

2.1.46
The word ending in Locative -7th-case-affix is
compounded with a word ending with the affix
when 'censure' is implied and the resulting - -
2 1 47 2.1.47

2.1.47
724 1240 compound is - 2.1.48 2.1.46
The words like - 'a dish-companion' (a
- -
parasite) etc. are - compounds when
2 1 48 2.1.48

2.1.48

725 2353 contempt is implied. 1.
2. ...............
2.1.49 2.1.47
A case-inflected word denoting an action which
naturally precedes in time () and the words
'one', 'all' 'old', 'ancient', 'new',
and 'only' are compounded with their co-
relative case-inflected words which are in the same
case with them and the resulting compound is - - -
2 1 49 2.1.49

2.1.49

726 2417 2.1.50 2.1.48
The words expressing a point of the compass or a
number ( ) enter into compostion with the
word correlated to them by being in the same case,
when the sense of the compound is that of an - -
2 1 50 2.1.50

2.1.50

727 1859 appellative and the resulting compound is - 2.1.51 2.1.49
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
In a case where the sense is that of a -affix
or when an additional member comes after the
compound or when an aggregate is to be
expressed, then a word signifying a point of the
compass or a number, enters into composition with
a case-inflected word which is in agreement with it
by being in the same case and the resulting - -
2 1 51 2.1.51

2.1.51

728 1651 compound is - 2.1.52 2.1.50
In a case where the sense is that of a -affix
or when an additional member comes after the
compound or when an aggregate is to be
expressed, the compound, the first member of
which is numeral, is called (Numeral
2 1 52 2.1.52

2.1.52

730 3510 Determinative Compound). - 2.1.53 2.1.51
Case-inflected words expressing vileness are
compounded with case-inflected words, expressing - -
2 1 53 2.1.53

2.1.53

731 1104 contempt and the resulting compound is - 2.1.54 2.1.52
The case-inflected words 'sin' and
'insignificant' are compounded with words
expressive of vileness and the resulting compound - -
2 1 54 2.1.54

2.1.54

732 2363 is - 2.1.55 2.1.53
Case-inflected words denoting objects of
comparison are compounded with words denoting
what is likened to them, by reason of the latter
possessing qualities in common with the former - -
2 1 55 2.1.55

2.1.55

A case-inflected word denoting subject of
comparison is compounded with the words
'tiger' etc., the latter being the standard of
comparison and in construction with the former and
the resulting compound is - ; provided that
any word expressing the common characteristic - -
2 1 56 2.1.56

2.1.56

734 771 ( ) as explained above, is not used. 2.1.57 2.1.55
A case-inflected word denoting the qualifier (the
Adjective), is compounded diversely with a case-
inflected word denoting the thing thereby qualified,
(the Substantive), the latter being in agreement
(same case) with the former and the resulting - -
2 1 57 2.1.57

2.1.57

735 3265 compound is - 2.1.58 2.1.56
A case-inflected words 'prior', 'other',
'first', 'last', 'hindmost', 'equal',
'middle', 'middle', and 'hero' are
compounded with words ending with a case-affix
and which are in agreement (same case) with them - -
2 1 58 2.1.58

2.1.58

The case-inflected words 'class' etc. are
compounded with words 'made' etc. which are
in agreement (same case), with them and the - -
2 1 59 2.1.59

2.1.59

737 3456 resulting compound is - 1. = done, performed,
2.1.60 made
2.1.58
A word ending with the affix and not having the
negative augment is compounded with the
same word ending with the affix but which is
distinguished from the former, by having the
augment and the resulting compound is - - -
2 1 60 2.1.60

2.1.60
738 1184 2.1.61 2.1.59
The words 'good, 'great', 'highest',
'best' and 'excellent' are compounded
with the words denoting the person deserving the - -
2 1 61 2.1.61

2.1.61

739 3597 respect and the resulting compound is - 2.1.62 2.1.60
A case-inflected word denoting object deserving of
respect is compounded with the words
'eminent', 'serpent or elephant', - -
2 1 62 2.1.62

2.1.62

740 3294 'elephant' and the resulting compound is - 2.1.63 2.1.61
The words 'which or who of two', and
'which or who of many', when used in asking
questions about the genus or class, are
compounded with the other case-inflected words
with which they are in construction and the resulting - -
2 1 63 2.1.63

2.1.63

741 968 compound is - 2.1.64 2.1.62
The word 'what', when implying 'contempt' is
compounded with a word ending in case-affix and - -
2 1 64 2.1.64

2.1.64
A case-inflected word denoting a genus ( ) is
compounded with the words 'a hermaphrodite',
'a young female', 'a little', 'a few',
'a cow which has had only one calf', 'milch
cow', 'a barren female', 'a cow that
miscarries', 'a cow that has a full-grown
calf', 'an expounder', 'a learned
', 'a teacher' and 'a cunning fellow' and - -
2 1 65 2.1.65

2.1.65

A case-inflected word denoting a genus ( ) is
compounded with a word denoting praise and the - -
2 1 66 2.1.66

2.1.66

The word 'young' is compounded with the
words 'bald headed', 'grey-haired',
'wrinkled', 'decayed', when they are in
agreement (same case) and the resulting - -
2 1 67 2.1.67

2.1.67

748 2869 compound is - 2.1.68 2.1.66
Words ending with -affix and the word
'equal' and its synonyms are compounded with
words which do not denote genus ( ) being in
the same case with them and the resulting - -
2 1 68 2.1.68

2.1.68

749 1144 compound is - 2.1.69 2.1.67
A case-inflected word denoting 'colour' is
compounded with another case-inflected word
which is in agreement with the former and also
denotes colour and the resulting compound is - - -
2 1 69 2.1.69

2.1.69
750 3075 2.1.70 2.1.68
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The word 'a boy' is compounded with co-
ordinate words 'an ascetic' etc. and the - -
2 1 70 2.1.70

2.1.70

751 1109 resulting compound is - .2.1.71 2.1.69
A case-inflected word denoting a quadraped is
compounded with the co-ordinate word and - -
2 1 71 2.1.71

2.1.71

And the words - 'cunning like a peacock' - -
2 1 72 2.1.72

2.1.72

754 2752 etc. are - compounds.
2.2.1 2.1.71
The words 'front', 'near', 'lower',
'upper', are compounded when in construction with
a word signifying a thing that has parts, provided
that the thing having parts is distinguished
2 2 1 2.2.1

2.2.1

712 2429 numerically by unity; and the compound is - 2.2.2 2.1.72
The word when it signifies exactly equal parts
i.e. halves, is always neuter and is compounded
with a word signifying a thing that has parts,
provided that the thing halved is numerically one; - -
2 2 2 2.2.2

2.2.2

713 354 and the compound is - 2.2.3 2.2.1
The words 'second', 'third',
'fourth', 'fourth', are optionally compounded with
that word which signifies a thing that has parts,
provided that the thing having parts is distinguished
numerically by unity. The compound so formed is - -
2 2 3 2.2.3

2.2.3

714 1952 called - 2.2.4 2.2.2
The words 'obtained', and 'obtained'
are optionally compounded with words ending in a - -
2 2 4 2.2.4

2.2.4
715 2545 Second Case-affix and form - compound. 2.2.5 2.2.3
Words denoting time are compounded when in
construction, with words denoting the object whose
duration is measured by the time, and the - -
2 2 5 2.2.5

2.2.5

716 1063 compound is - 2.2.6 2.2.4
The negative word is compounded with a case-
inflected word with which it is in construction, and - -
2 2 6 2.2.6

2.2.6
756 2095 the compound is - 2.2.7 2.2.5
The word 'a little' is compounded with a case-
inflected word which does not end with a affix - -
2 2 7 2.2.7

2.2.7
755 690 and the compound is - 2.2.8 2.2.6
A word ending with a sixth case-affix is
compounded with a case-inflected word with which - -
2 2 8 2.2.8

2.2.8
702 3483 it is in construction and the compound is - 2.2.9 2.2.7
A word ending with a sixth case-affix is
compounded with the word 'sacrificer' etc. - -
2 2 9 2.2.9

2.2.9

703 2853 and the compound is - -- 1. 2. 2.2.8
2.2.10 3. 4. 5.
A word in the genitive case is not compounded with
another, when the force of the sixth case-affix is - -
2 2 10 2.2.10

2.2.10
704 2037 that of specification ( ). 2.2.11 2.2.9
A word ending in a sixth case-affix is not
compounded with a word having the sense of an
ordinal, an attribute, or satisfaction, or with a
participle ending in the suffix 3.2127, or an
indeclinable, or ending with the affix , or with a
-
word denoting the same object (i.e. when they are
2 2 11 2.2.11

2.2.11

705 2412 in apposition). 2.2.12 2.2.10
A word ending with sixth case-affix is not
compounded with a word ending with the affix , -
2 2 12 2.2.12

2.2.12
706 1183 when the force of is to denote 'respect' etc. -6 2.2.13 2.2.11
A word ending with a sixth case-affix is not
compounded with a word ending with the affix ,
-
when the force of the latter is to denote 'locality' in
2 2 13 2.2.13

2.2.13

707 144 which something happened -6 2.2.14 2.2.12
A word ending with a sixth case-affix is not -
compounded with another, when the force of the
2 2 14 2.2.14

2.2.14
708 1030 genitive is that of the accusative. -6 2.2.15 2.2.13
compounded with a word ending with or ,
-
when the force of the genitive case is that of an
2 2 15 2.2.15

2.2.15

709 1764 agent. -6 2.2.16 2.2.14
compounded with a word ending with or
-
affix when the force of these latter affixes is that of
2 2 16 2.2.16

2.2.16
710 1005 an agent. -6 2.2.17 2.2.15
A word ending with a sixth case-affix is invariably
compounded with a word ending with , when
these affixes denote a sport or livelihood; and the -
2 2 17 2.2.17

2.2.17

711 2172 compound is - -6 2.2.18 2.2.16
The indeclinable word 'bad' , the particles called
and the prepositions etc. are invariably
compounded with other words with which they are -
in construction and the resulting compound is - -6-
2 2 18 2.2.18 -

2.2.18

761 1099 - 2.2.19 2.2.17
An of attendant word
3.1.92 which does not end with a tense-affix 3.4.78
is invariably compounded with that with which it is - -
in construction. The compound thus formed is - --
2 2 19 2.2.19

2.2.19
782 763 2.2.20 2.2.18
When an is compounded with an
indeclinable, then it is compounded only with those - -
2 2 20 2.2.20

2.2.20

783 332 s which end in the affix - 2.2.21 2.2.19
An ending in third case-affix 3.4.47 etc. is
compounded optionally with an indeclinable formed
2 2 21 2.2.21

2.2.21

784 1773 by the affix and the compound is - - 2.2.22 2.2.20
An ending in third case-affix or any other of
the remaining four cases, is optionally compounded - -
with a word ending with the affix and the
- -
2 2 22 2.2.22

2.2.22
785 1188 compound is - 3 2.2.23 2.2.21
- -
- -
2 2 23 2.2.23

2.2.23
829 3438 The remaining compound is called 3-7 2.2.24 2.2.22
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
Two or more words, ending in any case-affix, form
compound, denoting another new thing, not
connoted by those words individually and the
2 2 24 2.2.24 2.2.24

830 225 compound is called - 2.2.25 2.2.23
indeclinable words and the words 'near',
'near', 'more' and the words called
(Numerals) are compounded with another
-
word, when the sense is that of a numeral or
-
2 2 25 2.2.25 2.2.25

843 3506 The compound is definition 2.2.26 2.2.24
Words which are the names of the points of the
compass are compounded, when the compound
signifies the intermediate point and the compound -
2 2 26 2.2.26 2.2.26

845 1861 so formed is - 2.2.27 2.2.25
Two homonymous words (both being in the locative
case or both being in the instrumental case) are
compounded, the sense being 'this happens therein
2 2 27 2.2.27 2.2.27
846 1616 or with that'. The compound so formed is - 2.2.28 2.2.26
The word 'together' is compounded with a word
ending with the third case-affix and the compound -
is ; provided that, the companion and the
-
person accompanied are equally effected by any
2 2 28 2.2.28 2.2.28

848 1791 action or thing, in the same manner. 2.2.29 2.2.27
When a set of several words ending with case- -
affixes stands in a relation expressable by 'and' the
set is made into a compound and the compound so -
2 2 29 2.2.29
2.2.29

901 1410 formed is called -wo 2.2.30 2.2.28
-
The 1.2.43 is to be placed first in a -
2 2 30 2.2.30 /
2.2.30 654 795 compound. definition 2.2.31 2.2.29
-rule-
The is to be put last in the words
2 2 31 2.2.31 /
2.2.31

902 2915 etc. --2.2.32
1. 2.2.30
2. 3. 4.
-rule-
In a compound, let a word called 1.4.7,
2 2 32 2.2.32 /
2.2.32 903 1938 stand first. 2.2.33 2.2.31
In a compound, let a what begins with a -
2 2 33 2.2.33 /
2.2.33

904 66 vowel and ends with a short be placed first. - 2.2.34 2.2.32
-
In a compound, that word-form which has
2 2 34 2.2.34 /
2.2.34 905 372 fewer vowels, is to be placed first. - 2.2.35 2.2.33
A word with the seventh case-affix and an epithet -
2 2 35 2.2.35 /
2.2.35

898 3609 are to be placed first in the compound. - 2.2.36 2.2.34
What ends with a 1.1.26 shall stand first in a
2 2 36 2.2.36 /
2.2.36 899 2205 compound. - 2.2.37 2.2.35
-
In the compounds and the like, the -
2 2 37 2.2.37 /
2.2.37

900 3128 formed word may optionally be placed first. - 2.2.38 2.2.36
The words and the like, are optionally placed -
2 2 38 2.2.38 /
2.2.38
751 962 first in the - 2.3.1 2.2.37
-
23001- The word meaning 'not being specified' is
2 3 1 2.3.1 23073 2.3.1 536 177 to be understood as the governing word. 2.3.2 2.2.38
When the object is not denoted by the termination
of the verb i.e. when the verb does not agree with
2 3 2 2.3.2 2.3.2 537 1013 it, the 2nd case-affix is attached to the word. -2 2.3.3 2.3.1
In the (Veda), the object of the verb 'to
sacrifice' takes the affix of the 3rd case and of the
2 3 3 2.3.3 2.3.3 3394 1769 2nd case as well. 2.3.4 2.3.2
A word joined with (or governed by) the word -
2 3 4 2.3.4 2.3.4 545 243 or takes the second case-affix. 2.3.5 2.3.3
After a word denoting time, or length, the affix of
2 3 5 2.3.5 2.3.5 558 1069 the 2nd case is used, when denoting a full duration. -2 2.3.6 2.3.4
The 3rd case-affix is used after the words denoting
the duration of time or place, when the
accomplishment of the desired object is meant to
2 3 6 2.3.6 2.3.6 563 283 be expressed. -3 2.3.7 2.3.5
A noun denoting time or place gets the affix of the
7th or the 5th case when the sense applied is that
the time or space is the interval between one action
and another (or implies an interval of time and
2 3 7 2.3.7 2.3.7
643 3608 space between -s. -5, 7 2.3.8 2.3.6
The 2nd case-affix is employed after a word which
2 3 8 2.3.8 2.3.8 548 1024 is joined with a 1.4.83. -2 2.3.9 2.3.7
Where a word is governed by a 1.4.83
in the sense of 'more than' 1.4.87 or
'lord of' 1.4.97 there the 7th case-affix
2 3 9 2.3.9 2.3.9

645 2847 (locative) is used. -7 2.3.10 2.3.8
The 5th case-affix (Ablative) is used when a word is
governed by the following 1.4.83 i.e.
2 3 10 2.3.10 2.3.10
598 2259 , and -5 2.3.11 2.3.9
The 5th case-affix (Ablative) is used after
whatsoever is governed by a 1.4.83 in
the sense of 'susbtitute' or 'exchange' --
2 3 11 2.3.11 2.3.11

600 2464 1.4.92. -5 2.3.12 2.3.10
In the case of roots implying motion, the place
which the motion is directed takes the affix of the
2nd (Accusative) or the 4th (Dative) case in
denoting the 'object', when physical motion is
meant and the object is not a word expressing
2 3 12 2.3.12 2.3.12

585 1264 'road'. -2, 4 2.3.13 2.3.11
In denoting the - --
1.4.32, the 4th case-affix of the Dative is
2 3 13 2.3.13 2.3.13 570 1391 used after the noun. -4 2.3.14 2.3.12
The 4th case-affix is employed in denoting the
object () of that verb, which is suppressed
( ) in a sentence and which has in construction
() there-with another verb, denoting an action,
performed for the sake of the future action --
3.3.10. In other words,
when the sense of an infinitive of purpose formed
by and -- 3.3.10, is suppressed in a
sentence, the object of this infinitive is put in the
2 3 14 2.3.14 2.3.14

581 1207 Dative -- 4th case. -4 2.3.15 2.3.13
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The 4th case-affix is used after a crude-form which
ends in an affix denoting 'condition' (abstract noun
-- 3.3.11) and having the force of the
2 3 15 2.3.15 2.3.15
582 1753 affix (or Infinitive or purpose). -4 2.3.16 2.3.14
The 4th case-affix is used in conjuction with the
words 'salutation', 'peace', ,
(terms used in offering oblations to Gods and -
s, respectively), , 'a match for', 'sufficient for'
2 3 16 2.3.16 2.3.16

583 2120 and , a term for oblation. -4 2.3.17 2.3.15
In denoting the indirect object, which is not an
animal, of the verb 'to think', the Dative -- 4th
case is optionally used, when contempt is to be
2 3 17 2.3.17 2.3.17 584 2746 shown. -4 2.3.18 2.3.16
In denoting the agent -- 1.4.54, or the
instrument -- 1.4.42, the 3rd case
2 3 18 2.3.18 2.3.18 561 999 is used. -3 2.3.19 2.3.17
When the word 'with', is joined to a word the
latter takes the 3rd case, when the sense is that the
word in the 3rd case is not the principal but the
2 3 19 2.3.19 2.3.19 564 3700 accompaniment of the principal thing. -3 2.3.20 2.3.18
By whatsoever limb, being defective, is pointed out
the defect of the person after that the 3rd case-affix
2 3 20 2.3.20 2.3.20 565 2891 is used. -3 2.3.21 2.3.19
Any mark or attribute, by which is indicated the
existence of a particular state or condition, is put in
2 3 21 2.3.21 2.3.21
566 636 the 3rd case to express this relation. -3 2.3.22 2.3.20
After the verb - , the 3rd case-affix is
2 3 22 2.3.22 2.3.22 567 3553 optionally used in denoting the object. -3 2.3.23 2.3.21
When the word denotes 'cause' it takes the 3rd
2 3 23 2.3.23 2.3.23 568 3957 case-affix. -3 2.3.24 2.3.22
A word implying 'debt', considered as a 'cause' but
2 3 24 2.3.24 2.3.24 601 9 not as or agent, takes the 5th case-affix. -5 2.3.25 2.3.23
The 5th case-affix is used optionally when the noun
expresses an attribute, being the cause of an action
2 3 25 2.3.25 2.3.25 602 3192 and not being of the feminine gender. -5 2.3.26 2.3.24
The 6th-Case-affix is used after a noun implying the
cause of an action, when the word is used along
2 3 26 2.3.26 2.3.26 607 3488 with such a word. -6 2.3.27 2.3.25
After a -- 1.1.27,
when it signifies the cause of an action and the
word is used with it, the 3rd case-affix is used,
2 3 27 2.3.27 2.3.27 608 3684 as well as the 6th. -3, 6 2.3.28 2.3.26
When the -- 1.4.24,
2 3 28 2.3.28 2.3.28 587 290 is denoted, the 5th case-affix is used. -5 2.3.29 2.3.27
When a noun is joined with words meaning 'other
than' or with 'near or remote', or 'different
from' or 'without', or words indicative of
'directions' (used also with reference to the time
corresponding to them) or with words having
'to bend' as the last member of the compound and
expressive of direction, or with words ending with
the affix -- 5.3.36 or --
2 3 29 2.3.29 2.3.29
595 261 5.3.37, the 5th case-affix is used. -5 2.3.30 2.3.28
The 6th-Case-affix is used when used in
connection with words ending with affixes having
the sense of the affix --
2 3 30 2.3.30 2.3.30 609 3490 5.3.28. -6 2.3.31 2.3.29
With a word ending with the affix --
5.3.35, the 2nd case-
2 3 31 2.3.31 2.3.31 610 918 affix is used, as well as the 6th. -2, 6 2.3.32 2.3.30
When joined with the words 'without',
'without' and 'without', the 3rd case-affix is -2, 3,
2 3 32 2.3.32 2.3.32 603 2435 used, optionally (as well as the 5th and the 2nd). 5 2.3.33 2.3.31
When expressing an instrument-, optionally
after the words 'little', 'little',
'difficulty' and 'some', the 5th case-affix is
2 3 33 2.3.33 2.3.33

604 984 used, when they do not denote material objects. -5 2.3.34 2.3.32
When in conjunction with words having the sense
of 'distant' and 'near', the 6th-Case-affix
2 3 34 2.3.34 2.3.34 611 1898 is optionally used. -6 2.3.35 2.3.33
After the words 'distant' and 'near', the
2nd case-affix is used as well as the 5th and the -2, 3,
2 3 35 2.3.35 2.3.35 605 1897 3rd. 5 2.3.36 2.3.34
The 7th case-affix is used when the sense is that of
location -- 1.4.45, as well as after
2 3 36 2.3.36 2.3.36 633 3611 the words meaning 'distant' and 'near'. -7 2.3.37 2.3.35
By the action () of whatsoever, the time of
another action is indicated, that takes the 7th case-
2 3 37 2.3.37 2.3.37 634 2848 affix. -7 2.3.38 2.3.36
The 6th-Case-affix is used (as well as the 7th),
when disregard is to be shown after that by whose
2 3 38 2.3.38 2.3.38 635 3484 action the time of another action is indicated. -6, 7 2.3.39 2.3.37
The 6th and the 7th case-affixes are used after
words when they are joined with 'master',
'lord', 'ruler', 'an heir',
2 3 39 2.3.39 2.3.39
636 3893 'witness', 'a surety' and 'begotten'. -6, 7 2.3.40 2.3.38
In conjunction with the words 'engaged', and
'skilful', when meaning entire absorption in an
engagement, the 6th and the 7th case-affixes are
2 3 40 2.3.40 2.3.40 637 560 used after a word. -6, 7 2.3.41 2.3.39
The 6th and the 7th case-affixes are used after
those words from which specification is made, (as
2 3 41 2.3.41 2.3.41 638 2825 of an individual from the whole class). -6, 7 2.3.42 2.3.40
The 5th case-affix is used when the thing specified
is different or divided from (and not included in) that
2 3 42 2.3.42 2.3.42 639 2261 from which specification is intended. -5 2.3.43 2.3.41
In conjunction with the words 'good' and
'skilfull' when they denote respect, the 7th case-
affix is used, provided that the word is not
2 3 43 2.3.43 2.3.43 640 3716 used. -7 2.3.44 2.3.42
In conjunction with the words and
'greatly desirous of', the 3rd case-affix is used after
2 3 44 2.3.44 2.3.44 641 2510 the word, as well as the 7th. -3, 7 2.3.45 2.3.43
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
When an affix declaring the time of an Asterism is
elided by -- 4.2.4, the 7th and the 3rd
case-affixes are used after the word, whose affix is
2 3 45 2.3.45 2.3.45 642 2085 also elided. -3, 7 2.3.46 2.3.44
Where the sense is that of the Nominal-stem --
1.2.45, or of gender
only, or measure only or number only, the 1st case-
2 3 46 2.3.46 2.3.46 532 2540 affix is used. -1 2.3.47 2.3.45
And when the sense is that of addressing, the 1st
2 3 47 2.3.47 2.3.47 533 3666 case-affix is used. -1 2.3.48 2.3.46
The word ending with the 1st case-affix, in the
2 3 48 2.3.48 2.3.48 411 3708 sense of addressing, is called or Vocative. -8 2.3.49 2.3.47
05.

In the case of Vocative, the singular number of the
2 3 49 2.3.49 2.3.49 192 881 151 1st case-affix is called -8 2.3.50 2.3.48
The 6th-Case-affix is used in the remaining cases,
that is to say, where there is a sense, such as the
relation between property and its owner etc.
different from that of a word related to a verb and
2 3 50 2.3.50 2.3.50 606 3486 from that of a Nominal-stem. -6 2.3.51 2.3.49
Of the verb , when not used in the sense 'to
2 3 51 2.3.51 2.3.51 612 1531 know', the instrument takes the 6th-Case-affix. -6 2.3.52 2.3.50
Of the verbs having the sense of 'remembering',
( ), and of 'to give', 'to pity', 'to protect', 'to
move' and of 'to rule or be master of', the object
2 3 52 2.3.52 2.3.52 613 153 takes the 6th-Case-affix. -6 2.3.53 2.3.51
The object of the verb takes the 6th-Case-affix,
when it means 'to impart a new quality or virtue' --

2 3 53 2.3.53 2.3.53 614 1135 1.3.32. -6 2.3.54 2.3.52
The object of verbs having the sense of 'to
afflict', with the exception of the Causative verb
'to be feverish', takes the 6th-Case-affix,
when the verb expresses a condition (i.e. when the
2 3 54 2.3.54 2.3.54
615 2943 subject is an Abstract noun). -6 2.3.55 2.3.53
Of the verb when meaning 'to bless', the object
2 3 55 2.3.55 2.3.55 616 581 takes the 6th-Case-affix. -6 2.3.56 2.3.54
The object of the verbs 'to strike', 'to hurt',
'to strike' preceded by and , 'to injure',
and when they mean 'to injure', takes the 6th-
2 3 56 2.3.56 2.3.56

617 1514 Case-affix. -6 2.3.57 2.3.55
The object of the verbs and when they ae
synonymous, that is when they mean 'dealing in
sale and purchase transactions' or 'staking in
2 3 57 2.3.57 2.3.57 618 3327 gambling' takes the 6th-Case-affix. -6 2.3.58 2.3.56
The object of the verb when having the above-
mentioned sense of 'dealing' or 'stalking', takes the
2 3 58 2.3.58 2.3.58 619 1867 6th-Case. -6 2.3.59 2.3.57
mentioned sense of 'dealing' or 'stalking', optionally
takes the 6th-Case, when preceded by an
2 3 59 2.3.59 2.3.59
620 3255 (preposition). -6 2.3.60 2.3.58
mentioned sense of 'dealing' or 'stalking', takes the
2 3 60 2.3.60 2.3.60
3395 1953 2nd case, in the literature. -2 2.3.61 2.3.59
The object of the verb and (imperative
singular of verb, meaning 'send' and 'utter')
denoting sacrificial food, takes the 6th-Case-affix,
when making offerings to deity is meant or when
2 3 61 2.3.61 2.3.61
621 2560 deity is the recepient. -6 2.3.62 2.3.60
In the the 6th-Case-affix is used diversely
2 3 62 2.3.62 2.3.62 3396 1392 with the force of the 4th case-affix. 2.3.63 2.3.61
The 6th-Case-affix is diversely used in the in
2 3 63 2.3.63 2.3.63 3397 2818 denoting the instrument of the verb 'to sacrifice'. -6 2.3.64 2.3.62
The 6th-Case-affix is used in denoting location
( ) after a word denoting time () when
used along with a word ending with an affix having
the sense of --
2 3 64 2.3.64 2.3.64 622 1153 5.4.17 'so many times'. -6 2.3.65 2.3.63
The 6th-Case-affix is used after a word, in denoting
the agent and the object, when used along with a
2 3 65 2.3.65 2.3.65 623 1001 word ending with a -affix -- 3.1.93. -6 2.3.66 2.3.64
When the agent and the object of the action
denoted by the words formed by -affixes, are
both used in a sentence, in the object only, the 6th-
Case-affix is employed and not in the agent (the
object is put in the Genitive 6th-Case and not the
2 3 66 2.3.66 2.3.66 624 811 Agent). -6 2.3.67 2.3.65
The past participle ending in when used in the
sense of the present tense, -- 3.2.187 and
-- 3.2.188 , is used with the
2 3 67 2.3.67 2.3.67 625 1178 Genitive 6th-Case. -6 2.3.68 2.3.66
The past participle ending in is used with the
Genitive 6th-Case, when the former expresses
location --
2 3 68 2.3.68 2.3.68 626 143 3.4.76. -6 2.3.69 2.3.67
The 6th-Case-affix is not used the express the
agent or the object, when the word is governed by
an Active Participle ending in the affix , or , or
or an indeclinable, or by a Past Participle in the
and or by a word ending in an affix having
the sense of or by a Noun of agency formed by
2 3 69 2.3.69 2.3.69 627 2064 -6 2.3.70 2.3.68
The 6th-Case-affix is not used when the word is
governed by a verbal nounin denoting futurity,
2 3 70 2.3.70 2.3.70 628 17 or in a denoting 'futurity and indebtness'. -6 2.3.71 2.3.69
The 6th-Case-affix is optionally used in denoting
the agent, (but not the object), when the word is
2 3 71 2.3.71 2.3.71 629 1147 governed by a Future Passive Participle ( ). -6 2.3.72 2.3.70
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The 3rd or the 6th-Case-affix may optionally be
employed, when the word is joined with another
word meaning 'like to or resemblance', excepting
2 3 72 2.3.72 2.3.72

630 1758 and -6 2.3.73 2.3.71
The 4th as well as the 6th-Case-affix may be used,
when blessing is intended in connection with the
words 'long life', 'joy', 'good fortune',
'welfare', 'happiness', 'prosperity' and
2 3 73 2.3.73 2.3.73
631 1388 'good'. -4, 6 2.4.1 2.3.72
All affixes after the verb 'to study' and the verb
'to be crooked' and the rest, are as if they had
an indicatory ( ), except those affixes which
2 4 1 2.4.1
2.4.1 731 1943 have an indicatory ( ) or ( ). 2.4.2 2.3.73
An affix which begins with the augment --
7.2.35, is after the root
2 4 2 2.4.2
2.4.2 906 1934 'to fear, to move'. 2.4.3 2.4.1
A compound or words signifying persons
belonging to the different Vedic-schools, when the
2 4 3 2.4.3
2.4.3 907 220 sense is that of repition is singular. - 2.4.4 2.4.2
A compound of words denoting
(sacrifices) ordained by ( ) Veda, is
singular, provided they are never used in the neuter
2 4 4 2.4.4
2.4.4 . 908 166 gender - 2.4.5 2.4.3
A compound of words denoting (persons who
have studied) subjects, which in their order of study
2 4 5 2.4.5
2.4.5
909 158 are not remote from each other, is singular. - 2.4.6 2.4.4
A compound of words signifying (genus)
which are not the names of living beings, is
2 4 6 2.4.6
2.4.6 910 1503 singular. - 2.4.7 2.4.5
A compound of words of different genders,
denoting names of rivers and countries, but not of
2 4 7 2.4.7
2.4.7
911 3264 towns, is singular. - 2.4.8 2.4.6
A compound of words signifying small
2 4 8 2.4.8
2.4.8 912 1233 animals, is singular. - 2.4.9 2.4.7
A compound of words signifying those
animals only among whom there is permanent
enimity i.e. natural and eternal antipathy or quarrel,
2 4 9 2.4.9
2.4.9 913 2892 is singular. - 2.4.10 2.4.8
A compound of words denoting those classes
of -s who have not been expelled from the
2 4 10 2.4.10
2.4.10 914 3415 communion of higher classes, is singular. - 2.4.11 2.4.9
The word and others are also
2 4 11 2.4.11
2.4.11 915 1281 compounds which take the singular number. -
2.4.12 2.4.10
A compound of words being the names of
trees, wild animals, grass, corn, condiment,
domestic beasts and birds and the compounds
- , - and , are optionally
2 4 12 2.4.12
2.4.12

916 3225 singular. - 2.4.13 2.4.11
A compound of words of contrary
significations, but not being the names of concrete
2 4 13 2.4.13
2.4.13
917 3177 substances. - 2.4.14 2.4.12
The compounds like etc. are not
2 4 14 2.4.14
2.4.14 918 2030 singular. - .....................................
2.4.15 2.4.13
A compound denoting a fixed number ( )
2 4 15 2.4.15
2.4.15 919 148 of concrete things ( ) is not singular. - 2.4.16 2.4.14
A compound denoting an approximate
number of concrete substances, is optionally
2 4 16 2.4.16
2.4.16 920 3231 singular. - 2.4.17 2.4.15
-
-

It, namely the or compound, with regard

to which singular number has been ordained by the
2 4 17 2.4.17 2.4.17 821 3504 above rules, is always neuter gender. - 2.4.18 2.4.16
-
-
An --

-
2 4 18 2.4.18 2.4.18 659 406 2.1.6, compound is also neuter gender. 2.4.19 2.4.17
A - compound, with the exception of that
which is formed by the particle , and or the
- -
24019- compound, becomes neuter gender, in the
2 4 19 2.4.19 24025 2.4.19 822 1607 cases explained in the following stras. 2.4.20 2.4.18
When denoting an appellative, a -
compound ending with the word 'town', is
neuter in gender, provided that it is the name of a - -
2 4 20 2.4.20 2.4.20
823 3531 town situtated in a country of the -s. 2.4.21 2.4.19
A - compound ending with the words
'invention' and 'commencement' is neuter in
gender, when it is intended to express the starting - -
point of a work which is first invented or
2 4 21 2.4.21 2.4.21
824 757 commenced. 2.4.22 2.4.20
A - compound ending with the word
'shadow' in neuter in gender when the sense is that - -
of profusenss of the thing indicated by the first
2 4 22 2.4.22 2.4.22 825 1473 term. -gender 2.4.23 2.4.21
'court' is neuter, provided that it is preceded by (a
- -
word synonymous with) the word or by a word
2 4 23 2.4.23 2.4.23
826 3616 denoting a non-human-being. -gender 2.4.24 2.4.22
- -
'court', when it does not mean a house but means
2 4 24 2.4.24 2.4.24 827 414 concourse, is neuter. -gender 2.4.25 2.4.23
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
A - compound ending with the words
'army', 'wine', 'shadow', 'house' and
'night', is optionally neuter, with the exception
of that which is formed by the particle -- - -
2 4 25 2.4.25 2.4.25

828 3236 2.2.6, and the compound. - 2.4.26 2.4.24
The gender of compound or - - -
2 4 26 2.4.26 - 2.4.26 812 2297 compound is like that of the last word in it. gender 2.4.27 2.4.25
The gender of the compound of the word
'horse' and 'a mare', is like that of the first word -
2 4 27 2.4.27 - 2.4.27 813 2423 in it. gender 2.4.28 2.4.26
Of the compounds - and , the
-
2 4 28 2.4.28 - 2.4.28 3399 3958 gender is like that of the first word, in the gender 2.4.29 2.4.27
The and - compound ending with the
-
2 4 29 2.4.29 - 2.4.29 814 2927 words and are spoken of in masculine. gender 2.4.30 2.4.28
-
2 4 30 2.4.30 - 2.4.30 815 273 The - word 'a bad road', is neuter. gender 2.4.31 2.4.29
The words etc. are spoken of in masculine -
2 4 31 2.4.31 - 2.4.31 816 355 and neuter. gender ..
2.4.32 2.4.30
In the room of 'this', in the case of its re-
employment in a subsequent member of the same
sentence and referring to the same thing ( )
there is the substitution of which is
(gravely accented), when the Instrumental -3rd
2 4 32 2.4.32 2.4.32 350 645 case-affix and the rest follow. 2.4.33 2.4.31
In the room of in the case of re-employment
there is the substitution of the gravely accented
when the affixes -- 5.3.10 and --
5.3.7 follow, and the affixes and
2 4 33 2.4.33 2.4.33
1962 911 are (gravely accented) also. 2.4.34 2.4.32
When an affix of the Accusative -2nd case or -
Instrumental -3rd case singular or Locative -7
th-case dual follows, which is is the
2 4 34 2.4.34 2.4.34 351 1955 substitute of and its re-employment. 2.4.35 2.4.33
The clause 'when the affix is is
24035- understood in the following stras up to stra -
2 4 35 2.4.35 24057 2.4.35 2632 566 2.4.58. substitutes 2.4.36 2.4.34
The word is the substitute of 'to eat', when
the affix -- 7.1.37 or an
-
2 4 36 2.4.36 2.4.36 3080 135 affix beginning with a follows. substitutes 2.4.37 2.4.35
When (Aorist) or (Desiderative) follows
-
2 4 37 2.4.37 2.4.37 2427 3009 is the substitute of 'to eat'. substitutes 2.4.38 2.4.36
And when the affix and follow is
the
-
2 4 38 2.4.38 2.4.38 3236 1357 substitute of substitutes 2.4.39 2.4.37
In the (Vedas), is
diversely substituted for
2 4 39 2.4.39 2.4.39 3398 2586 2.4.40 2.4.38
When (Perfect Tense) follows is
optionally
-
2 4 40 2.4.40 2.4.40 2424 2995 the substitute of substitutes 2.4.41 2.4.39
When (Perfect Tense) follows, is optionally
-
2 4 41 2.4.41 2.4.41 2411 3304 the substitute follows of 'to weave'. substitutes 2.4.42 2.4.40
is the substitute of 'to kill' when the
-
2 4 42 2.4.42 2.4.42 2433 3901 (Benedictive) follows. substitutes 2.4.43 2.4.41
And when (Aorist) follows is the substitute of
-
2 4 43 2.4.43 2.4.43 2434 3006 substitutes 2.4.44 2.4.42
When affixes follow, is optionally the
-
2 4 44 2.4.44 2.4.44 2696 511 substitute of in the (Aorist). substitutes 2.4.45 2.4.43
is the substitute of the root when (Aorist) -
2 4 45 2.4.45 2.4.45 2458 624 follows. substitutes 2.4.46 2.4.44
When the affix (causal follows, is the
substitute of when the sense is not that of -
2 4 46 2.4.46 2.4.46 2607 1589 'informing' but that of 'going'. substitutes 2.4.47 2.4.45
And when (Desiderative) follows, is the
substitute of when the sense is not that of -
2 4 47 2.4.47 2.4.47 2615 3592 'informing'. substitutes 2.4.48 2.4.46
And of 'to study', is the substitute when -
2 4 48 2.4.48 2.4.48 2616 605 follows. substitutes 2.4.49 2.4.47
is the substitute of when (Perfect -
2 4 49 2.4.49 2.4.49 2459 1285 Tense) follows. substitutes 2.4.50 2.4.48
is optionally the substitute of when
-
2 4 50 2.4.50 2.4.50 2460 3221 (Aorist) and (Conditional Future) follow. substitutes 2.4.51 2.4.49
is optionally the substitute of is the
causative , when that causative takes the affix
-
2 4 51 2.4.51 2.4.51 2571 1590 (Desiderative) and (Aorist). substitutes 2.4.52 2.4.50
is the substitute of the verb 'to be' when an
-
2 4 52 2.4.52 2.4.52 2470 438 affix is to be applied. substitutes 2.4.53 2.4.51
is the substitute of 'to speak' when any
-
2 4 53 2.4.53 2.4.53
2453 2637 affix is to be supplied. substitutes 2.4.54 2.4.52
is the substitute of 'to perceive, to tell',
-
2 4 54 2.4.54 2.4.54 2436 1381 when any affix is to be applied. substitutes 2.4.55 2.4.53
is optionally the substitute of when -
2 4 55 2.4.55 2.4.55 2437 3118 (Perfect Tense) follows. substitutes 2.4.56 2.4.54
is the substitute of the verb 'to drive', 'to
lead', when an affix follows, with the
exception of the affixes -- 3.3.18 and --
-
2 4 56 2.4.56 2.4.56 2292 70 3.3.69. substitutes 2.4.57 2.4.55
is optionally the substitute of when the affix
2 4 57 2.4.57 2.4.57 3292 3117 -- 3.3.15 etc. follows. -elision 2.4.58 2.4.56
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
After a word ending with the affix --
4.1.151 and after a word denoting
the descendant of a or a 'seer' and after
a word ending with a affix having an indicatory
, the afffix , the afffix and employed in
the forming -- 4.1.163,
2 4 58 2.4.58 2.4.58 1276 1594 descendants, are elided by the substitution of -elision 2.4.59 2.4.57
And after the words etc. there is the elision
2 4 59 2.4.59 2.4.59 1084 2439 of the affix. -elision 2.4.60 2.4.58
.........................................
After a word ending in the affix -- 4.1.95, there
is elision of of the affix, when the of
2 4 60 2.4.60 2.4.60 1085 615 the people called 'Eastern' is denoted. -elision 2.4.61 2.4.59
After the words and the rest, there is no
2 4 61 2.4.61 2.4.61 1086 2028 elision of the affix. -elision ..
2.4.62 2.4.60
There is elision of -- 4.1.174,
affix, when the word is used in the plural number,
provided that the plural number is taken by the
base itself and not by its standing as a compound
epithet dependent upon another word and provided
2 4 62 2.4.62 2.4.62
1193 1654 that the base is not used in the feminine. -elision 2.4.63 2.4.61
After the word etc. there is the elision of
the affix when the word of itself and not as part
of a compound epithet dependent on another word,
2 4 63 2.4.63 2.4.63 1146 2845 takes the plural; but not in the feminine. -elision .
2.4.64 2.4.62
And there is elision of the affix --
4.1.105 and --
4.1.104, when the word of itself and
not as part of a compound epithet dependent on
2 4 64 2.4.64 2.4.64 1108 2822 another, takes the plural, but not in the feminine. -elision 2.4.65 2.4.63
After the words , , , , ,
, there is elision of the affix, when the
2 4 65 2.4.65 2.4.65

1147 123 word takes the plural, but not in the feminine. -elision 2.4.66 2.4.64
And there is elision of the affix --
4.1.95 after a word containing
many vowels (a poly-syllabic word) which denotes
the of the people called and when
2 4 66 2.4.66 2.4.66
1148 2611 the word takes the plural. -elision 2.4.67 2.4.65
After the words etc. there is not elision
2 4 67 2.4.67 2.4.67 1149 2022 of the affix, when the word takes the plural. -elision 2.4.68 2.4.66
After the words , etc. when used as
compound, there is the elision of the affixes
2 4 68 2.4.68 2.4.68
1150 1721 when the compound word takes the plural. -elision 2.4.69 2.4.67
After the words etc. there is optionally
elision of the affix when the words take the
plural wether they enter into compound or are
2 4 69 2.4.69 2.4.69
1151 753 used separately. -elision ..
2.4.70 2.4.68
There is elision of the affixes and of
the words , and , when they take
the plural and the words and are
the substitutes of the bases so remaining after the
2 4 70 2.4.70 2.4.70
1152 471 elision. -elision 2.4.71 2.4.69
There is elision of the case-affix of a word when
-
2 4 71 2.4.71 2.4.71 650 3762 it gets the name of 'root' or is of a crude form. elision 2.4.72 2.4.70
After the verb 'to eat' and the rest there is
-
2 4 72 2.4.72 2.4.72 2423 132 elision of the -- 3.1.68. elision 2.4.73 2.4.71
In the (Vedas) there is diversely the -elision-
2 4 73 2.4.73 2.4.73 3400 2587 elision of the -- 3.1.68. 2.4.74 2.4.72
And there is diversely the elision of --
3.1.22, when the
affix -- 3.1.134,
2 4 74 2.4.74 2.4.74 2650 2809 follows. -elision 2.4.75 2.4.73
After the verbs 'to sacrifice' and others there is
2 4 75 2.4.75 2.4.75 2489 1525 elision of the -- 3.1.68. -elision 2.4.76 2.4.74
In the (Vedas) there is elision of the
2 4 76 2.4.76 2.4.76 3401 2588 diversely. -elision 2.4.77 2.4.75
There is elision of the affix --
3.1.44 in the prSmEpd after the verbs 'to go',
'to stand', the verbs called 1.2.20,
2 4 77 2.4.77 2.4.77 2223 1288 'to drink' and 'to be'. -elision 2.4.78 2.4.76
After the verbs 'to smell', 'to drink', () 'to
pare' () 'to cut' and () 'to destroy' there is
optionally the elision of when the
2 4 78 2.4.78 2.4.78 2376 3194 terminations are used. -elision 2.4.79 2.4.77
After the verbs 'to expand' and others there is
optionally the elision of when the
2 4 79 2.4.79 2.4.79 2547 1658 affixes and of the 2nd Person follow. -elision 2.4.80 2.4.78
In the portion of the Vedas there is elision
of the sign of the Aorist (& -Perfect Tense) after
the verbs 'to eat', 'to be crooked', 'to
destroy', 'to choose, to cover', 'to burn', verbs
ending in long , 'to avoid', 'to make',
2 4 80 2.4.80 2.4.80 3402 2740 'to go' and 'to be produced'. -elision 2.4.81 2.4.79
There is elision in the room of that tense-affix
( ) which comes after of the (Perfect
2 4 81 2.4.81 2.4.81 2238 550 Tense). -elision 2.4.82 2.4.80
There is elision of (the feminine
termination) and (the case-affixes) after an
-
2 4 82 2.4.82 2.4.82 452 403 or indeclinable. elision 2.4.83 2.4.81
There is not elision of the case-affix after an
compound that ends in ; is the
substitute of its case-affix es, but not when it is the -
2 4 83 2.4.83 2.4.83 657 2162 5th case-affix. elision 2.4.84 2.4.82
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The change to of the Instrumental -3rd case
and Locative -7th-case-affixes coming after an
compound that ends in , occurs -
2 4 84 2.4.84 2.4.84
658 1774 diversely. elision 2.4.85 2.4.83
, and are substituted respectively in the
( room of the three-affixes of the 3rd Person of
-
2 4 85 2.4.85 ) 2.4.85 2188 3010 (First Future), both in the prSmEpd and elision 3.1.1 2.4.84
05.

31001-
3 1 1 3.1.1 ;
54160 3.1.1 180 2477 139 An affix. 3.1.2 2.4.85
05.

31002-
3 1 2 3.1.2 54160 3.1.2 181 2298 140 And subsequent. 3.1.3 3.1.1
That which is called an affix has an acute accent on
3 1 3 3.1.3 3.1.3 3708 535 its first syllable. 3.1.4 3.1.2
The case-affix es ( ) and the affixes having an
3 1 4 3.1.4 3.1.4 3709 191 indicatory ( ) are 3.1.5 3.1.3
After the verbs , and comes the affix
3 1 5 3.1.5 3.1.5 2393 1300 Desiderative 3.1.6 3.1.4
The affix comes after the verbs 'to honour',
'to bind', 'to cut', and 'to whet', and long
is the substitute of -- 7.4.79 of the re-
3 1 6 3.1.6 3.1.6

2394 2773 duplicate -- 6.1.4 syllable. Desiderative 3.1.7 3.1.5
The affix is optionally attached, in the sense of
'wishing' after a root expressing the object wished
and having the same agent of the action as the
3 1 7 3.1.7 3.1.7

2608 1998 wisher thereof. Desiderative 3.1.8 3.1.6
The affix is optionally employed, in the sense
of wishing after a word ending in a case-affix
expressing the object wished as connected with the
3 1 8 3.1.8 3.1.8 2657 3757 wisher itself. 3.1.9 3.1.7
And the affix is also used in the sense of
'wishing' after a word ending in a case-affix,
expressing the object wished as connected with the
3 1 9 3.1.9 3.1.9
2663 1051 wisher's self. 3.1.10 3.1.8
The affix is optionally employed, in the sense
of treatment after a word ending in a case-affix
3 1 10 3.1.10 3.1.10
2664 768 denoting the object of comparison. 3.1.11 3.1.9
The affix is optionally used in the sense of
'behaving' after a word ending in a case-affix
denoting the object of comparison of the agent and
there is (elision) of the final of the noun if it
3 1 11 3.1.11 3.1.11

2665 997 ends in a 3.1.12 3.1.10
The affix in the sense of becoming what the
thing previously was not, is used after the crude
forms etc. which do not end with the affix --
5.4.50,
and there is (elision) of the final consonant of
3 1 12 3.1.12 3.1.12

2667 2699 these words, if they end in a consonant. 3.1.13 3.1.11
The affix in the sense of becoming what the
thing previously was not, is used after the words
etc. and after those that end with the affix
-- 5.4.57,
when these words do not take the affix --
3 1 13 3.1.13 3.1.13

2668 3035 5.4.57. 3.1.14 3.1.12
The affix in the sense of exerting in the
dishonesty, is employed after the word
'mischief' when the latter has the 4th case-affix in
3 1 14 3.1.14 3.1.14
2670 1041 construction. 3.1.15 3.1.13
The affix is used after the words
'ruminating' and 'austerity', when they are
used as the objects of the action of repeating and
3 1 15 3.1.15 3.1.15

2671 1008 performing respectively. 3.1.16 3.1.14
The affix is used in the sense of ejecting after
the words 'vapour' and 'heat' as the object
3 1 16 3.1.16 3.1.16

2672 2619 of the action. 3.1.17 3.1.15
The affix , in the sense of 'making', comes
after these words, as the object of the action, viz.
'sound', 'hostility', 'strife', 'cloud',
3 1 17 3.1.17 3.1.17

2673 3360 'sin' and 'cloud'. 3.1.18 3.1.16
The affix in the sense of 'feeling', comes after
the words 'pleasure' etc. when the pleasure etc.
3 1 18 3.1.18 3.1.18

2674 3747 belong to the agent as feels thereof. 3.1.19 3.1.17
The affix in the sense of 'making', comes after
these words, as the object of the action, viz.
3 1 19 3.1.19 3.1.19

2675 2123 'adoration', 'honour', 'wonder'. 3.1.20 3.1.18
The affix , in the sense of making, comes after
these words as the object of the action, viz.
3 1 20 3.1.20 3.1.20

2676 2383 'tail', 'pot' and 'rag'. 3.1.21 3.1.19
The affix , in the sense of 'making' comes after
these words as the object of action viz.
'shaving', 'mixture', 'soft', 'salt',
'vow', 'dress', 'plough', 'strife', 'done'
3 1 21 3.1.21 3.1.21

2677 2789 and 'matter hair'. 3.1.22 3.1.20
The affix , in the sense of repitition of the act,
31022- comes after a root, having a single vowel and
3 1 22 3.1.22 31090
3.1.22

2629 1999 beginning with a consonant. 3.1.23 3.1.21
The affix invariably comes in the sense of
'crookedness' after a simple verb expressing
3 1 23 3.1.23
3.1.23
2634 2171 motion. 3.1.24 3.1.22
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix when it is intended to convey the
sense of contempt () in respect of the sense of
the root () comes always after the following
roots - 'to cut off', 'to sit', 'to walk', 'to
mutter silently any sacred formula', 'to gape or
3 1 24 3.1.24
3.1.24

2635 3012 yawn', 'to burn', 'to bite' and 'to swallow'. 3.1.25 3.1.23
The affix is used after these words - 'truth'
(which then takes the form of as exhibited in
the stra), 'a fetter', 'form', 'a lute',
'cotton', 'celebration', 'army', 'the hair
of the body', 'skin', 'mail', 'celebration',
3 1 25 3.1.25
3.1.25

2563 3581 'powder' and the verb of the class. 3.1.26 3.1.24
The affix is used after a root, when the
3 1 26 3.1.26
3.1.26
2576 3954 operation of a causer is to be expressed. 3.1.27 3.1.25
3 1 27 3.1.27
3.1.27
2678 965 The affix is used after the roots 'to itch' etc. 3.1.28 3.1.26
The affix comes after 'to protect', 'to
heat', 'to approach', 'to contract or praise'
3 1 28 3.1.28
3.1.28

2303 1298 and 'to praise'. 3.1.29 3.1.27
The affix comes after the stra root 'to
3 1 29 3.1.29
3.1.29 2422 857 reproach'. 3.1.30 3.1.28
3 1 30 3.1.30
3.1.30 2310 980 The affix comes after the root 'to desire'. 3.1.31 3.1.29
The affixes and those that follow it i.e. ,
and are optionally added, when it is - -
3 1 31 3.1.31
3.1.31
2305 559 desired to express one's self with an affix. 3.1.32 3.1.30
All the roots ending with the affixes and others
3 1 32 3.1.32
3.1.32
2304 3589 are called 3.1.33 3.1.31
When and follow, then and are
3 1 33 3.1.33 - -

3.1.33
2186 3856 respectively the affixes of a verbal root - 3.1.34 3.1.32
is diversely the affix of a verbal root when
3 1 34 3.1.34 -

3.1.34
3425 3741 follows. 3.1.35 3.1.33
is the affix of the verb 'to cough' and of
those roots that are formed by affixes i.e. the
derivative verbs, when (Perfect Tense) follows,
3 1 35 3.1.35 -

3.1.35

2306 1076 in the 3.1.36 3.1.34
The affix is used when (Perfect Tense)
follows after a root beginning with a letter of
and having a heavy vowel, excepting the
3 1 36 3.1.36 -

3.1.36

2237 614 root 'to go'. 3.1.37 3.1.35
After the words 'to give', 'to go' and 'to protect',
'to go'and 'to sit', there is the affix
3 1 37 3.1.37 -

3.1.37
2324 1837 when (Perfect Tense) follows. 3.1.38 3.1.36
The affix is optionally used after these - 'to
burn', 'to know' and 'to wake', when
3 1 38 3.1.38 -

3.1.38

2341 824 (Perfect Tense) follows. 3.1.39 3.1.37
is optionally affixed when (Perfect Tense)
follows after these verbs - 'to fear', 'to be
ashamed', 'to nourish', 'to sacrifice' and when
is affixed, the effect is as if there were
3 1 39 3.1.39 -

3.1.39

2491 2680 elision and the roots belonged to class. 3.1.40 3.1.38
After a verb which ends with , the verb 'to
3 1 40 3.1.40 -

3.1.40

2239 1139 do', is annexed when (Perfect Tense) follows. 3.1.41 3.1.39
The form is optionally employed as an
3 1 41 3.1.41 -

3.1.41

2465 3162 irregular form. 3.1.42 3.1.40
The forms
are irregularly
3 1 42 3.1.42 -

3.1.42

3403 324 formed in the (Vedas). 3.1.43 3.1.41
When (Aorist) follows, the affix is added to
3 1 43 3.1.43 -

3.1.43 2221 1434 the verbal root. 3.1.44 3.1.42
3 1 44 3.1.44 -

3.1.44 2222 1435 Of , is the substitute. 3.1.45 3.1.43
After a verb that ends in a consonant and has
an vowel for its penultimate letter and does not
take -- 7.2.10, is the
3 1 45 3.1.45 -

3.1.45

2336 3376 substitute of 3.1.46 3.1.44
is the substitute of after the verb ,
3 1 46 3.1.46 -

3.1.46
2514 3460 when used in the sense of 'embracing'. 3.1.47 3.1.45
is not the substitute of after the verb 'to
3 1 47 3.1.47 -

3.1.47 2407 2032 see'. 3.1.48 3.1.46
After a root which ends in the --
3.1.20, --

3.1.21, -- 3.1.44 etc. and after the verb
'to serve', 'to run', and 'to drop', is the
substitute of , when (Aorist) follows
3 1 48 3.1.48 -

3.1.48
2312 1582 signifying an agent. 3.1.49 3.1.47
After the roots 'to suck' and 'to grow', is
optionally the substitute of , when (Aorist)
3 1 49 3.1.49 -

3.1.49

2375 3209 follows signifying an agent. 3.1.50 3.1.48
After the verb 'to protect', is optionally the
3 1 50 3.1.50 -

3.1.50 3404 1299 substitute of in the (Vedas). 3.1.51 3.1.49
After the causatives of the verbs 'to decrease',
'to sound', 'to send' and 'to go or to beg'
3 1 51 3.1.51 -

3.1.51

3405 2242 is not the substitute of in the (Vedas). 3.1.52 3.1.50
After the verbs 'to throw', 'to speak' and
'to speak', is the substitute of , when
3 1 52 3.1.52 -

3.1.52

2438 445 (Aorist) follows signifying an agent. 3.1.53 3.1.51
After the verbs 'to paint', 'to sprinkle' and
'to call', is the substitute of when
3 1 53 3.1.53 -

3.1.53

2418 2999 (Aorist) follows signifying the agent. 3.1.54 3.1.52
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
After the verbs , and is optionally
the substitute of when the affixes of the
3 1 54 3.1.54 -

3.1.54

2419 512 follow. 3.1.55 3.1.53
is the substitute of after the verbs 'to
nourish' and the rest; 'to shine' and the rest;
and the verbs having an indicatory , when the
3 1 55 3.1.55 -

3.1.55

2343 2400 affixes of the follow. 3.1.56 3.1.54
After the words 'to go', 'to order' and 'to
go', is the substitute of in the as
3 1 56 3.1.56 -

3.1.56

2382 3672 well as the 3.1.57 3.1.55
is optionally the substitute of after that root
which has an indicatory , when the
3 1 57 3.1.57 -

3.1.57

2269 662 terminations are used. 3.1.58 3.1.56
And, optionally is the substitute of after the
verbs 'to stiffen',
& 'to go', & 'to
steal', 'to go' and 'to grow' when the
3 1 58 3.1.58 -

3.1.58

2291 1526 terminations of the are used. 3.1.59 3.1.57
After the words 'to do', 'to die', (9P) 'to tear'
and 'to rise', is the substitute of when
3 1 59 3.1.59 -

3.1.59

3406 1157 used in (Vedas). 3.1.60 3.1.58
is the substitute of after the verb 'to go'
3 1 60 3.1.60 -

3.1.60

2513 1413 when the affix follows. 3.1.61 3.1.59
is optionally the substitute of , when -
3rd Person Singular of follows after the
verbs 'to shine', 'to be produced', 'to
teach or know', 'to be full', 'to extend or
3 1 61 3.1.61 -

3.1.61

2328 1877 protect' and 'to smell'. 3.1.62 3.1.60
is optionally the substitute of , when -
3rd Person Singular of follows after a root
which ends with a vowel and when the object itself
3 1 62 3.1.62 -

3.1.62

2768 43 is spoken of as the agent. 3.1.63 3.1.61
is optionally the substitute of after the verb
'to milk', when it is used reflexively and when
3 1 63 3.1.63 -

3.1.63
2769 1894 follows. 3.1.64 3.1.62
obstruct' when used in the reflexive sense in the
3 1 64 3.1.64 -

3.1.64
2770 2060 3rd Person Singular of 3.1.65 3.1.63
suffer' when used reflexively and when the sense of
3 1 65 3.1.65 -

3.1.65

2760 1667 experiencing remorse. 3.1.66 3.1.64
is the substitute of when -3rd Person
Singular follows, denoting the action ()
3 1 66 3.1.66 -

3.1.66

2758 1414 or the object 3.1.67 3.1.65
The affix comes after a root when a --
3.4.113, follows, denoting the
3 1 67 3.1.67 -

3.1.67

2756 3724 action or the object. 3.1.68 3.1.66
The affix comes after a root when a
3 1 68 3.1.68 -

3.1.68

2167 995 follows, signifies the agent. 3.1.69 3.1.67
The affix comes after a root of the class
3 1 69 3.1.69 -

3.1.69

2505 1868 when a affix denoting the agent follows. 3.1.70 3.1.68
The affix optionally used in the active voice
after the verbs - 'to shine', 'to shine',
'to whirl', 'to walk', 'to be sad', 'to fear',
3 1 70 3.1.70 -

3.1.70

2321 3116 'to cut' and 'to desire'. 3.1.71 3.1.69
The affix is optionally used after the verb
'to strive' when it is used without a preposition and
3 1 71 3.1.71 -

3.1.71

2521 2844 when a affix denoting an agent, follows. 3.1.72 3.1.70
'to strive' when it is preceded by the preposition
and when a affix denoting an agent,
3 1 72 3.1.72 -

3.1.72

2522 3558 follows. 3.1.73 3.1.71
The affix comes after the roots of class
3 1 73 3.1.73 -

3.1.73

2523 3888 when a affix denoting an agent follows. 3.1.74 3.1.72
And is the substitute of and there is the affix
after it, when a affix denoting an agent
3 1 74 3.1.74
-
3.1.74

2386 3454 follows. 3.1.75 3.1.73
The affix is optionally used after the root
'to pervade' when it is preceded by the preposition
and when a affix denoting an agent,
3 1 75 3.1.75 -

3.1.75

2338 20 follows. 3.1.76 3.1.74
The affix is optionally used after the root
'to bore or hew' when it is preceded by the
preposition and when a affix denoting
3 1 76 3.1.76 -

3.1.76

2339 1660 an agent, follows. 3.1.77 3.1.75
The affix is used after the roots of class, in
3 1 77 3.1.77 -

3.1.77
2534 1747 denoting the agent when a affix follows. 3.1.78 3.1.76
The affix comes after the roots of the
(7th Conjugation), in denoting an agent
3 1 78 3.1.78 -

3.1.78

2543 2947 when a affix follows. 3.1.79 3.1.77
(8th Conjugation) and after the verb 'to make',
3 1 79 3.1.79 -

3.1.79
2466 1657 when a affix follows, signifying the agent. 3.1.80 3.1.78
The affix comes after the roots 'to please'
and 'to hurt', when a affix denoting
the agent follows and in these verbs is the final
3 1 80 3.1.80 -

3.1.80
2332 2005 substitute of the final 3.1.81 3.1.79
(9th Conjugation) when a affix follows
3 1 81 3.1.81 -

3.1.81
2554 1217 denoting the agent. 3.1.82 3.1.80
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
And there is the affix after , ,
or 'to hinder', to be dull or insensible' 'to
support' and 'to go by leaps', as well as the affix
, when a affix follows, in denoting the
agent. (Note: The first 4 are not found in the
and are found in the stras, and hence
3 1 82 3.1.82 -

3.1.82

2555 3807 called ) 3.1.83 3.1.81
The affix is the substitute of after a root
3 1 83 3.1.83 -

3.1.83

2557 3911 ending with a consonant, when follows. 3.1.84 3.1.82
In the (Vedas), is also the substitute of
after the roots ending in consonants, when
3 1 84 3.1.84 -

3.1.84

3432 1455 follows. -
3.1.85 3.1.83
In the (Vedas) there is diversely an
interchange of the various -as etc. which
have been previously ordained under special
3 1 85 3.1.85 -

3.1.85
3433 3322 circumstances. 3.1.86 3.1.84
The affix is used in the (Vedas) when the
3 1 86 3.1.86 -

3.1.86
3434 2987 affixes of the (Benedictive) follow. 3.1.87 3.1.85
The denoting the agent, when the action affecting
the agent is similar to the action which affects the
object, is treated as if it were a denoting the
3 1 87 3.1.87 -

3.1.87
2766 1026 object. -Reflexive 3.1.88 3.1.86
The agent of the verb 'to heat', becomes similar
to the object, only when the object is the word
3 1 88 3.1.88 -

3.1.88

2771 1666 itself. 3.1.89 3.1.87
The affix -- 3.1.67,and --
3.1.62 are not used in the reflexive voice
of the verbs 'to milk', 'to fall in drops' and
3 1 89 3.1.89 -

3.1.89

2767 2031 'to bow. 3.1.90 3.1.88
The affix comes after the roots 'to pull' and
'to colour' in the reflexive voice, according to
the opinion of Eastern Grammarians and these
3 1 90 3.1.90 -

3.1.90

2772 1126 verbs take the affixes of 3.1.91 3.1.89
As far as the end of the Third Chapter reckoning
from the present stra, the affixes treated of are to
be understood as coming after some verbal root.
(Note: This is an All these verbal
31091- affixes are broadly classified as and
3 1 91 3.1.91 34117 3.1.91 2829 1996 affixes) 3.1.92 3.1.90
In the Third Chapter of Grammar, referring to verbal
roots, the word implied in a term exhibited in the
Locative -7th-case, is called or dependant
3 1 92 3.1.92 3.1.92
781 1622 word. - 3.1.93 3.1.91
In this portion of the stras in which there is a
reference to verbal roots, any affix except -
3 1 93 3.1.93 3.1.93 374 1154 tense affixes, is called - 3.1.94 3.1.92
In this portion of the stras, in which there is
reference to verbal roots, an affix which is
calculated to debar a general one, not being of the
same form, optionally debars it; but not so in the
3 1 94 3.1.94 3.1.94

2830 3133 case of feminine affixes -- 3.3.94. 3.1.95 3.1.93
From this stra up to 3.1.133 all the affixes
3 1 95 3.1.95 3.1.95
2831 1146 treated will get the name 3.1.96 3.1.94
-
-
The affixes , and come after the
3 1 96 3.1.96 3.1.96

2834 1678 verbal roots. 3.1.97 3.1.95
The affix comes after a root that ends in a
3 1 97 3.1.97 3.1.97
2842 55 vowel. 3.1.98 3.1.96
The affix comes after a root which ends in a
3 1 98 3.1.98 3.1.98

2844 2441 labial letter preceded by a short 3.1.99 3.1.97
The affix comes after roots 'to be able' and
3 1 99 3.1.99 3.1.99
2847 3347 'to bear'. 3.1.100 3.1.98
The affix comes after roots 'to eat', 'to be
mad', 'to go, to eat' and 'to restrain', when
3 1 100 3.1.100 3.1.100

2848 1268 these roots do not take any preposition. 3.1.101 3.1.99
The words , , are irregularly formed,
having the sense of 'condemnable', saleable' and
3 1 101 3.1.101 3.1.101

2849 379 unobstructable', respectively. Irregular 3.1.102 3.1.100
The word is irregularly formed when the
3 1 102 3.1.102 3.1.102

2850 3099 meaning of the word is an instrument of carrying. Irregular 3.1.103 3.1.101
The word is irregularly formed when meaning
3 1 103 3.1.103 3.1.103

2851 360 'lord' and a Irregular 3.1.104 3.1.102
The word is irregularly formed when
meaning what has reached the time favourable to
3 1 104 3.1.104 3.1.104

2852 796 conception or ripe for fruition. Irregular 3.1.105 3.1.103
The word 'imperishable' is irregularly formed
when qualifying the word 'friendship'
3 1 105 3.1.105 3.1.105

2853 62 expressed or understood. Irregular 3.1.106 3.1.104
After the root 'to speak', governing a case-
inflected word as its and not having a
preposition annexed to it, there comes the affix
3 1 106 3.1.106 3.1.106

2854 3053 also. Irregular 3.1.107 3.1.105
After the root 'to be', in construction with a case-
inflected word as its and when used without a
preposition, the affix is used to denote
3 1 107 3.1.107 3.1.107

2855 2688 condition - Irregular 3.1.108 3.1.106
After the root 'to kill' when in construction with a
case-inflected word as its and when used
without a preposition comes the affix in
denoting condition and the letter is the substitute
3 1 108 3.1.108 3.1.108
2856 3899 of its final. Irregular 3.1.109 3.1.107
After the verbs 'to go', 'to praise', 'to
govern', 'to respect' and 'to please' comes the
3 1 109 3.1.109 3.1.109

2857 913 affix 3.1.110 3.1.108
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
After the verbs having the penultimate short , the
affix is used, with the exception of the verbs
3 1 110 3.1.110 3.1.110

2859 866 'to be able' and 'to hurt'. 3.1.111 3.1.109
The affix is used after the root 'to dig' and
3 1 111 3.1.111 3.1.111
2860 673 long is substituted for the final of the root. 3.1.112 3.1.110
The affix is used after the root 'to bear'
3 1 112 3.1.112 3.1.112

2861 2698 when not used as a name. 3.1.113 3.1.111
3 1 113 3.1.113 3.1.113
2862 2793 'to cleanse'. 3.1.114 3.1.112
The words , , , , , ,
and irregularly formed by the addition
3 1 114 3.1.114 3.1.114

2865 2921 of the affix 3.1.115 3.1.113
The words and are irregularly formed
3 1 115 3.1.115 3.1.115

2866 2671 by the affix , when meaning 'river'. 3.1.116 3.1.114
The words and are irregularly formed by
3 1 116 3.1.116 3.1.116

2867 2402 the affix , when used as names of asterisms. 3.1.117 3.1.115
When the words , and are
irregularly formed they mean 'the grass', 'the
3 1 117 3.1.117 3.1.117

2868 3176 sediment' and 'the plough', respectively. Irregular 3.1.118 3.1.116
The word 'to seize', preceded by the
prepositions and , takes the affix in
3 1 118 3.1.118 3.1.118

2869 2475 the (Vedas). - 3.1.119 3.1.117
The root 'to seize' takes the affix when it
means a 'word', a 'dependent', 'outside' or a
3 1 119 3.1.119 3.1.119

2870 2290 'partisan'. 3.1.120 3.1.118
After the verbs 'to do' and 'to rain', the affix
3 1 120 3.1.120 3.1.120

2871 3190 is optionally used. 3.1.121 3.1.119
The word is irregularly formed meaning 'a
3 1 121 3.1.121 3.1.121
2873 2866 vehicle'. Irregular 3.1.122 3.1.120
3 1 122 3.1.122 3.1.122

2874 327 Optionally the word is irregular. Irregular 3.1.123 3.1.121
In the (Vedas) the following words are found,
which are formed irregularly - , ,
, , , , , , ,
, , , , ,
3 1 123 3.1.123 3.1.123

3407 1447 , , and 3.1.124 3.1.122
The affix comes after a verb that ends in
3 1 124 3.1.124 3.1.124
2872 874 (long or short) or in a consonant. 3.1.125 3.1.123
The affix comes after a verb that ends in the
letter - long or short, when the sense is that of
3 1 125 3.1.125 3.1.125
2886 942 'necessity'. 3.1.126 3.1.124
The affix comes after the verbs 'to distill',
'to join', 'to sow', 'to speak distinctly', 'to
3 1 126 3.1.126 3.1.126

2887 587 prate', 'to be ashamed' and 'to drink'. 3.1.127 3.1.125
3 1 127 3.1.127 3.1.127
2888 538 meaning 'impermanent'. Irregular 3.1.128 3.1.126
3 1 128 3.1.128 3.1.128

2889 2459 meaning 'disapproved'. Irregular 3.1.129 3.1.127
The words , , and are
irregularly formed meaning 'a measure', 'an oblation
to fire', 'a dwelling' and 'a sacrificial prayer',
3 1 129 3.1.129 3.1.129

2890 2364 respectively. Irregular 3.1.130 3.1.128
The words and are irregularly
3 1 130 3.1.130 3.1.130

2891 1200 formed meaning 'a sacrifice'. Irregular 3.1.131 3.1.129
The words , and are
3 1 131 3.1.131 3.1.131

2892 28 irregularly formed when they are names of fire. Irregular 3.1.132 3.1.130
The words and are also irregularly
3 1 132 3.1.132 3.1.132
2893 1419 formed. Irregular 3.1.133 3.1.131
The affixes ( ) and () are placed after
3 1 133 3.1.133 -
3.1.133
2895 1597 all verbal roots, expressing the agent. and 3.1.134 3.1.132
After the verbs classed as 'to be happy', 'to
take' and 'to cook' there are the affixes (), ,
3 1 134 3.1.134 - - 3.1.134

2896 2110 ( ) and () respectively. and 3.1.135 3.1.133
After a vern ending in a consonant but preceded by
, or -long or short, and after the verbs 'to
know', 'to please' and 'to scatter', comes the
3 1 135 3.1.135 3.1.135
2897 603 affix () 3.1.136 3.1.134
Also after a verb ening in long when there is a
3 1 136 3.1.136 3.1.136
2898 499 preposition along with it, the affix is placed. 3.1.137 3.1.135
The affix () is used after the roots 'to drink',
'to smell', 'to blow' and 'to suck' and
'to see' when there is a preposition along with these
3 1 137 3.1.137 3.1.137
2899 2346 roots. 3.1.138 3.1.136
The affix is used after the verbs - , ,
, , , and , when used without a
3 1 138 3.1.138 3.1.138

2900 213 preposition. 3.1.139 3.1.137
The affix is optionally used after the root 'to
give' and 'to hold', when used without a
3 1 139 3.1.139 3.1.139

2901 1828 preposition. 3.1.140 3.1.138
After the verbs beginning with 'to shine' and
ending with 'to go', when used without
3 1 140 3.1.140 3.1.140

2902 1539 apreposition, the affix is optionally used. 3.1.141 3.1.139
The affix is also used after the verbs - 'to go',
verbs ending in a long , 'to pierce', 'to
pain', 'to flow', 'to pass on', 'to
complete', 'to take away', 'to lick', 'to
3 1 141 3.1.141 3.1.141

2903 3444 embrace' and 'to breathe'. 3.1.142 3.1.140
The affix is used after the verbs 'to burn' and
3 1 142 3.1.142 3.1.142

2904 1890 'to lead', when used without a preposition. 3.1.143 3.1.141
The affix is optionally used after the verb 'to
3 1 143 3.1.143 3.1.143 2905 3193 seize'. 3.1.144 3.1.142
The affix is used after the verb 'to seize' when
3 1 144 3.1.144 3.1.144 2906 1306 the agent so expressed denotes a house. 3.1.145 3.1.143
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix ( ) comes after a verb when the
3 1 145 3.1.145 3.1.145 2907 3399 agent so expressed denotes an artist. 3.1.146 3.1.144
The affix () comes after the verb 'to sing'
3 1 146 3.1.146 3.1.146
2908 1283 when the agent so expressed, denotes an artist. 3.1.147 3.1.145
The affix is also used after the verb 'to sing'
3 1 147 3.1.147 3.1.147
2909 1596 when the agent so expressed denotes an artist. 3.1.148 3.1.146
After the verb , also the affix is used when
3 1 148 3.1.148 3.1.148
2910 3931 the agent so expressed denotes 'rice' and 'time'. 3.1.149 3.1.147
After the verbs 'to go', 'to move', 'to flow' and
'to cut', the affix is used, when repitition is
3 1 149 3.1.149 3.1.149

2911 2553 meant. 3.1.150 3.1.148
The affix is applied after all verbs when
3 1 150 3.1.150 3.1.150
2912 580 Benediction is intended. 3.2.1 3.1.149
The affix comes after a verbal root when the
object (or whatever sort it may be), is in
3 2 1 3.2.1 3.2.1 2913 1018 composition with it (an an ). 3.2.2 3.1.150
The affix comes after a root 'to call' 'to
weave', 'to measure', when the object is in
3 2 2 3.2.2 3.2.2

2914 3983 composition with it. 3.2.3 3.2.1
The affix comes after a verbal root that ends in
long when there is no preceding it and
3 2 3 3.2.3 3.2.3

2915 508 when the object is in composition with it. 3.2.4 3.2.2
The affix comes after the root when in
composition with a word ending in a case-affix, as
3 2 4 3.2.4 3.2.4

2916 3761 an 3.2.5 3.2.3
The affix comes after the verbs 'to wash
out' and 'to drive away' when in composition
with the words 'navel' and 'grief', as
3 2 5 3.2.5 3.2.5

2919 1748 objects respectively. 3.2.6 3.2.4
The affix comes after the root 'to give' and
'to know', when taking the preposition in
composition with a word in the Accusative -2nd
3 2 6 3.2.6 3.2.6
2920 2554 case. 3.2.7 3.2.5
The affix comes after root 'to tell', when
preceded by the preposition and when the
3 2 7 3.2.7 3.2.7
2921 3646 object is in compsition with it. 3.2.8 3.2.6
The affix comes after the verbs 'to sing' and
'to drink' when used without a preposition and
3 2 8 3.2.8 3.2.8

The affix comes after the verb when it does
not mean 'to raise up', when the object is in
3 2 9 3.2.9
3.2.9

The affix comes after the verb when the
object is in composition with it and when the
meaning of the word to be formed is descriptive of
3 2 10 3.2.10
3.2.10
2924 3061 age. 3.2.11 3.2.9
The affix comes after the verb (when the
object is in composition with it) the root taking the
preposition and the sense of the word to be
3 2 11 3.2.11
3.2.11

2925 475 formed in inclination or accustomed occupation. 3.2.12 3.2.10
The affix comes after the verb 'to respect',
3 2 12 3.2.12
3.2.12
The affix comes after the verb 'to sport' and
'to whisper' when the case-inflected words
'a clump of grass' and 'ear' are in
3 2 13 3.2.13
3.2.13

2927 3803 composition with them respectively. 3.2.14 3.2.12
The affix is used after the verbal roots when
'well' is in composition and the word to be formed
3 2 14 3.2.14
3.2.14

2928 3362 denotes a name. 3.2.15 3.2.13
The affix comes after the verb 'to lie down'
when in composition with a case-inflected word
3 2 15 3.2.15
3.2.15

2929 147 indicating location i.e. in the Locative -7th-case. 3.2.16 3.2.14
The affix comes after the verb 'to go' when a
case-inflected word in composition with it denotes a
3 2 16 3.2.16 3.2.16

2930 1400 location. 3.2.17 3.2.15
The affix is used after the verb 'to go' when
the words in composition with it 'alms',
3 2 17 3.2.17 3.2.17

2931 2669 'army' and 'having taken'. 3.2.18 3.2.16
The affix comes after the verb 'to move' when
the words in composition with it are , and
3 2 18 3.2.18 3.2.18

2932 2397 , all meaning 'in front or before'. 3.2.19 3.2.17
The affix comes after the verb 'to go' when
3 2 19 3.2.19 3.2.19

2933 2431 in composition with it, denoting the agent. 3.2.20 3.2.18
The affix comes after the verb 'to make' when
the object is in composition with it denoting cause,
3 2 20 3.2.20 3.2.20

2934 1138 habit and going with the grain (concession). 3.2.21 3.2.19
the following words are in composition with it - 1.
'by day' 2. 'light' 3. 'night' 4.
'splendour' 5. 'light' 6. 'work' 7. 'end' 8.
'endless' 9. 'beginning' 10. 'many'
11. 'benediction' 12. 'what' 13.
'writing' 14. 'writing' 15. 'oblation' 16.
'devotion' 17. 'agent' 18. 'painting' 19.
'field' 20. - words denoting numerals 21.
'thigh' 22. 'hand' 23. 'day' 24. 'what' 25.
3 2 21 3.2.21 3.2.21

2935
1869
'that' 26. 'bow' 27. 'wound'. 3.2.22 3.2.20
the word is in composition with it and the sense
3 2 22 3.2.22 3.2.22

2936 1014 of the word to be formed is that of wages. 3.2.23 3.2.21
The affix does not come after the verb 'to
make' when the following words are in composition
with it - 1. 'sound' 2. 'verse' 3.
'quarrel' 4. 'praise' 5. 'enimity' 6.
3 2 23 3.2.23 3.2.23

2937 2071 'flattery' 7. 'thread' 8. 'hymns' 9. 'word'. 3.2.24 3.2.22
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
objects in composition with it are the words 'a
3 2 24 3.2.24
3.2.24

2938 3804 sheaf' and 'ordure'. 3.2.25 3.2.23
When the agent indicated is an animal, the affix
comes after the verb 'to take', the object in
composition with it being the words 'a leather
3 2 25 3.2.25
3.2.25

2939 3906 bag' and 'a master'. 3.2.26 3.2.24
And the words and are irregularly
3 2 26 3.2.26
3.2.26

In the (Vedas) the affix comes after the
verbs 'to honour', 'to worship', 'to protect'
and 'to agitate', when the object is in
3 2 27 3.2.27
3.2.27

3408 1453 composition. 3.2.28 3.2.26
The affix comes after the verb 'to tremble'
when ending in and when the object is in
3 2 28 3.2.28
3.2.28

The affix comes after the verbs 'to blow'
and 'to suck' when 'nose' and 'breast'
3 2 29 3.2.29
3.2.29

2944 2163 are in composition with them as object. 3.2.30 3.2.28
And when the words 'a tube' and 'a fist'
are objects in composition with the verbs 'to
3 2 30 3.2.30
3.2.30

2945 2144 blow' and 'to suck', ghe affix is used. 3.2.31 3.2.29
The affix comes after the verbs 'to break
into pieces' and 'to carry', when preceded by the
and the word 'bank' is in composition
3 2 31 3.2.31
3.2.31

2946 737 with them as the object. 3.2.32 3.2.30
The affix comes after the verb 'to lick' when
the object in composition with it, is the word 'the
3 2 32 3.2.32
3.2.32

2947 3098 shoulder of an ox' or 'a cloud'. 3.2.33 3.2.31
The affix comes after the verb 'to cook'
when the object in composition with it denotes a
3 2 33 3.2.33
3.2.33

2948 2317 measure. 3.2.34 3.2.32
The affix is used after the verb 'to cook'
when 'a measured partition' or 'a nail' is the
3 2 34 3.2.34
3.2.34
2949 2777 word in composition with it as an object. 3.2.35 3.2.33
The affix comes after the verb 'to strike'
when 'the moon' or 'a wound' is the word
3 2 35 3.2.35
3.2.35

2950 3170 in composition with it as object. 3.2.36 3.2.34
The affix comes after the verb 'to see' and
'to heat' when and are the words in
3 2 36 3.2.36
3.2.36

2951 433 composition with it as object. 3.2.37 3.2.35
The words , , are
3 2 37 3.2.37
3.2.37

2952 699 irregularly formed. Irregular 3.2.38 3.2.36
The affix comes after the verb 'to speak'
when or is the word in composition with it
3 2 38 3.2.38
3.2.38

2953 2550 as an object. 3.2.39 3.2.37
The affix comes after the verb 'to heat'
when or is the word in composition with it
3 2 39 3.2.39
3.2.39

2954 1970 as an object. 3.2.40 3.2.38
The affix comes after the verb 'to curb'when
the word 'speech' is in composition with it as an
3 2 40 3.2.40
3.2.40

2956 3138 object and the sense indicated is that of a vow. 3.2.41 3.2.39
The affix comes after the verb 'to split' and
'to bear' when respectively in composition with
3 2 41 3.2.41
3.2.41

2958 2403 the words 'a city' and 'all', as objects. 3.2.42 3.2.40
The affix comes after the verb 'to rub' when
the words 'all', 'bank', 'cloud' and
'a dry cow-dung' are in composition with it as
3 2 42 3.2.42
3.2.42

2959 3674 objects. 3.2.43 3.2.41
The affix comes after the verb 'to make'
when the words 'cloud' 'misfortune' and
3 2 43 3.2.43
3.2.43

2960 2798 'fear' are in composition as objects. 3.2.44 3.2.42
And the affix as well as come after the verb
'to make' when the words 'happiness',
'pleasant' and 'joy' are in composition as
3 2 44 3.2.44
3.2.44

2961 1242 objects. 3.2.45 3.2.43
The affix comes after the verb 'to be' when in
composition with the case-inflected word
'satisfied by eating' and the sense is that of
3 2 45 3.2.45
3.2.45

2962 579 instrument or condition. 3.2.46 3.2.44
The affix comes after the verbs - 1. 'to bear'
2. 'to cross over' 3. 'to choose' 4. 'to
conquer' 5. 'to hold' 6. 'to bear' 7. 'to
3 2 46 3.2.46
3.2.46

2963 3537 heat' 8. 'to subdue' 3.2.47 3.2.45
And the affix comes after the verb 'to go'
when in composition with a word ending in a case-
affix and when the word to be formed denotes a
3 2 47 3.2.47
3.2.47

2964 1273 name. 3.2.48 3.2.46
And the affix comes after the verb 'to go'
when in composition with the verbs - 1. 'end' 2.
'extreme' 3. 'road' 4. 'far' 5.
3 2 48 3.2.48 3.2.48

2965 250 'across' 6. 'all' 7. 'endless'. 3.2.49 3.2.47
The affix comes after the verb 'to kill' when the
object is in composition with it and when
3 2 49 3.2.49 3.2.49

2966 583 benediction is intended. 3.2.50 3.2.48
The affix comes after the verb 'to kill' when it
is compounded with the preposition and when
the object in composition with it, is the word
3 2 50 3.2.50 3.2.50

2967 296 'pain' or 'darkness'. 3.2.51 3.2.49
The affix comes after the verb 'to kill' when
the word in composition with it is 'a child' or
3 2 51 3.2.51
3.2.51

2968 1110 'head'. 3.2.52 3.2.50
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix comes after the verb 'to kill' when it
is in composition with the word 'wife' or
'huband' as object and when the word so formed
denotes the agent possessed of that attribute (or
3 2 52 3.2.52
3.2.52

2969 2965 when the word so formed denotes a mark). 3.2.53 3.2.51
the object is in composition with it and when the
word to be formed denotes an agent other than a
3 2 53 3.2.53
3.2.53

2970 325 human being. 3.2.54 3.2.52
the object is in composition with it as its object is
'elephant' or 'gate' and when the sense
3 2 54 3.2.54
3.2.54

2971 3349 indicated is that of power. 3.2.55 3.2.53
The word and are irregularly formed
3 2 55 3.2.55
3.2.55

2972 2348 when denoting an artificier. Irregular 3.2.56 3.2.54
The affix , when in the sense of the word to be
formed is that of an instrumental agent, comes after
the verb 'to make', when the following words are
in composition with it - 1. 'rich' 2.
'fortunate' 3. 'big' 4. 'grey' 5. 'naked'
6. 'blind' 7. 'pleasant', provided these
words formed by the affix though not actually
3 2 56 3.2.56 3.2.56

2973 494 ending in the affix 3.2.57 3.2.55
The affixes and , when the word to be
formed denotes an agent comes after the verb 'to
become', when it is in composition with the words
formed by the affix though not actually ending and
3 2 57 3.2.57 - 3.2.57

2974 994 in the affix 3.2.58 3.2.56
The affix comes after the verb 'to touch'
when it is in composition with a case-inflected word
3 2 58 3.2.58 3.2.58

432 3845 other than 'water'. 3.2.59 3.2.57
The words - 1. 'a domestic priest' 2.
'impudent' 3. 'a garland' 4. 'direction' and 5.
'a quatrain', are irregularly formed by adding
the affix and also after the verbs 6. 'to
worship' 7. 'to join' 8. 'to approach', the
3 2 59 3.2.59 3.2.59

373 864 affix is used. 3.2.60 3.2.58
And the affix comes after the verb 'to see'
when it is in composition with etc. and does not
3 2 60 3.2.60 3.2.60

429 1797 signify perception. 3.2.61 3.2.59
The affix comes after the following verbs
affix, though it may be an viz. 1. 'to sit' 2.
'to bring forth' 3. 'to hate' 4. 'to bear
malice' 5. 'to milk' 6. 'to join' , 'to concentrate
the mind' 7. 'to know', 'to consider' 8. 'to
divide' 9. 'to cut' 10. 'to conquer' 11. 'to
3 2 61 3.2.61 3.2.61

2975 3582 lead 12. 'to shine'. 3.2.62 3.2.60
The affix comes after the verb 'to share'
3 2 62 3.2.62 3.2.62
2976 2644 affix whether it be an or not. 3.2.63 3.2.61
verb 'to bear' when in composition with a word
3 2 63 3.2.63 3.2.63
3409 1456 ending in a case-affix. 3.2.64 3.2.62
The affix after the verb 'to carry' in the
(Vedas), when the word ending in case-affix
3 2 64 3.2.64 3.2.64
3410 3097 is in composition with it. 3.2.65 3.2.63
verb 'to carry' when it is in composition with the
words 'oblation of food to deceased
3 2 65 3.2.65 3.2.65

3411 1039 ancesters', 'faeces' and 'water'. 3.2.66 3.2.64
The affix comes in the (Vedas) after the
verb 'to carry' when it is in composition with the
word 'an oblation to gods', provided that the
word so formed does not occur in the middle of a
3 2 66 3.2.66 3.2.66

3412 3928 (4th part of a stanza). 3.2.67 3.2.65
The affix (the whole of which is elided) comes
in the (Vedas) after the verbs 1. 'to be
born' 2. 'to bestow' 3. 'to dig' 4. 'to pace'
5. 'to go' when a word ending in case-affix is in
composition and the final nasals are changed into
3 2 67 3.2.67 3.2.67

3413 1482 long 3.2.68 3.2.66
The affix comes after the verb 'to eat' when
in composition with a case-inflected word other
3 2 68 3.2.68 3.2.68
2977 136 than 'food'. 3.2.69 3.2.67
3 2 69 3.2.69 3.2.69
2978 1206 the word is in composition with it. 3.2.70 3.2.68
The affix comes after the verb 'to milk' when
in composition with a word ending in a case-affix
3 2 70 3.2.70 3.2.70

2979 1893 and the letter replaces the final. 3.2.71 3.2.69
In the literature,the affix comes after the
3 2 71 3.2.71 3.2.71

3414 2742 words 1. 2. 3. 3.2.72 3.2.70
In the literature,the affix comes after the
verb 'to sacrifice' when in composition the word
3 2 72 3.2.72 3.2.72
3415 394 3.2.73 3.2.71
The affix comes after the verb 'to sacrifice'
3 2 73 3.2.73 3.2.73

3417 3159 when precedes it, in the (Vedas). 3.2.74 3.2.72
The affixes ( ), ( ), ( ) and
come in the (Vedas) after the verbs
which end in long , when used in a case-
3 2 74 3.2.74 - - - 3.2.74

3418 503 inflected word or in in composition. 3.2.75 3.2.73
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
These affixes i.e. - ( ), ( ), ,
( ) and are seen after other verbs also , and
3 2 75 3.2.75 - - - 3.2.75

3980 264 besides those ending in long 3.2.76 3.2.74
And the affix is also seen after all verbs,
whether having an or not in the Vedic as well
3 2 76 3.2.76 3.2.76
2983 1223 as in the modern Sanskt. 3.2.77 3.2.75
The affixes and come after the verb
3 2 77 3.2.77 3.2.77
2987 3827 affix or an and 3.2.78 3.2.76
When habit is to be expressed, the affix
comes after a verb, provided the word with a case-
3 2 78 3.2.78 3.2.78

2988 3765 affix in composition with it does not mean a genus. 3.2.79 3.2.77
The affix comes after a verb when in
composition with a word denoting an object of
comparison, expressing the agent, the sense of the
affix being 'doing something like that', that is to say,
when the agent is the standard of comparison
of the agent denoted by the word to which the
3 2 79 3.2.79 3.2.79
2989 996 sense of the affix refers. 3.2.80 3.2.78
The affix comes after a verb, in composition
3 2 80 3.2.80 3.2.80 2990 3336 with a word ending in a case-affix. 3.2.81 3.2.79
The affix comes after a verb diversely when
3 2 81 3.2.81 3.2.81

2991 2598 continued repitition of an action is to be expressed. 3.2.82 3.2.80
The affix comes after the verb 'to think'
when there is a word with a case-affix in
3 2 82 3.2.82 3.2.82
And the affix comes after the verb 'to think'
when the word in composition with it is a word with
a case-affix and when it is used to signify thought,
whereof the object is self (the sense of the affix
3 2 83 3.2.83 3.2.83

2993 514 being 'thinking himself as such'). 3.2.84 3.2.82
32084- All the affixes to be treated of hereafter should be
3 2 84 3.2.84 32122 3.2.84 2995 2691 understood to come in the sense of past time. 3.2.85 3.2.83
The affix comes after the verb 'to sacrifice'
with the sense of past time, when the word in
3 2 85 3.2.85 3.2.85
2996 985 composition is the Instrumental -3rd case. 3.2.86 3.2.84
The affix comes after the verb 'to kill' with
the sense of past time, when the word in
3 2 86 3.2.86 3.2.86

2997 1015 composition is in the Accusative -2nd case. 3.2.87 3.2.85
The affix comes after the verb 'to kill' with
the sense of past time when the following words in
the Accusative -2nd case ae in composition - 1.
3 2 87 3.2.87 3.2.87

2998 2630 'a foetus' 2. 3.2.88 3.2.86
In the (Vedas) the affix diversely comes
after the verb 'to kill' with the sense of past time,
ending with the word even when the word in
composition with it is other than those mentioned in
3 2 88 3.2.88 3.2.88

2419 2589 the last stra. 3.2.89 3.2.87
The affix comes after the verb 'to make'
with the sense of past time, when the following
words in the Accusative -2nd case are in
composition - 1. 'action' 2. 'action' 3. 'sin'
3 2 89 3.2.89 3.2.89

2999 3744 4. 'hymn' 5. 'virtue'. 3.2.90 3.2.88
The affix comes after the verb 'to press out
juice' with the sense of past time, when the word
, in the Accusative -2nd case, is in
3 2 90 3.2.90 3.2.90

3000 3797 composition. 3.2.91 3.2.89
The affix comes after the verb 'to collect'
with the sense of past time, when the word ,
3 2 91 3.2.91 3.2.91

3001 27 in the Accusative -2nd case, is in composition. 3.2.92 3.2.90
In expressing an object the affix comes after
the verb 'to collect' with the sense of past time
when in composition with a word in the Accusative
-2nd case, provided the word so formed is the
3 2 92 3.2.92 3.2.92

3002 1017 name of fire. 3.2.93 3.2.91
The affix comes after the compound verb
'to sell' in the sense of past time, when in
composition with a word in the Accusative -2nd
3 2 93 3.2.93 3.2.93

3003 1016 case. 3.2.94 3.2.92
The affix comes after the verb 'to see' in
the sense of past time, when in composition with a
3 2 94 3.2.94 3.2.94 3004 1904 word in the Accusative -2nd case. 3.2.95 3.2.93
The affix comes after the verbs 'to fight'
and 'to make' with a past signification when the
word 'king' is in composition, in the Accusative
3 2 95 3.2.95 3.2.95

3005 2916 -2nd case. 3.2.96 3.2.94
The affix comes after the verbs 'to fight'
and 'to make' with a past signification when the
3 2 96 3.2.96 3.2.96
3006 3705 word 'with', is in composition. 3.2.97 3.2.95
The affix comes after the verb 'to be
produced', with a past signification, when the word,
3 2 97 3.2.97 3.2.97
3007 3613 in composition with it is in the Locative -7th-case. 3.2.98 3.2.96
produced', with a past signification, when the word,
in composition with it is in the Ablative -5th case,
3 2 98 3.2.98 3.2.98

3008 2265 which does not denote a genus. 3.2.99 3.2.97
produced', with a past signification, when an
is in composition and when the sense is simply
3 2 99 3.2.99 3.2.99

3009 792 appellative. 3.2.100 3.2.98
produced', with a past signification, when the root
takes the preposition and is compounded with a
3 2 100 3.2.100 3.2.100

3010 233 word in the Accusative -2nd case. 3.2.101 3.2.99
The affix is seen to come after the verb 'to be
produced', with a past signification,though it be in
composition with other nouns, having cases other
3 2 101 3.2.101 3.2.101

3011 266 than those mentioned in the previous stras. 3.2.102 3.2.100
The affixes called come after a verbal root
3 2 102 3.2.102 - 3.2.102 3013 2206 used in the sense of past time. 3.2.103 3.2.101
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix comes after the verbs 'to press
out or extract juice' and 'to sacrifice', with a past
3 2 103 3.2.103 3.2.103

3091 3768 signification. 3.2.104 3.2.102
The affix comes after the verb 'to grow old'
3 2 104 3.2.104 3.2.104
3092 1518 with the sense of past time. 3.2.105 3.2.103
In the (Vedas), the affix (Perfect Tense)
3 2 105 3.2.105 3.2.105
3093 1451 comes after a verb with a past signification. 3.2.106 3.2.104
In the (Vedas), the affix (Perfect Tense)
3 2 106 3.2.106 3.2.106

3094 2990 is optionally replaced by the affix 3.2.107 3.2.105
In the (Vedas) the affix is optionally the
3 2 107 3.2.107 3.2.107
3095 1220 substitute for 3.2.108 3.2.106
In modern Sanskt the affix optionally replaces
(Perfect Tense) aafter the verbs , and
3 2 108 3.2.108 3.2.108

3097 2666 with a past signification. 3.2.109 3.2.107
The forms , , are irregularly
3 2 109 3.2.109 3.2.109

The affix (Aorist) comes after the verb in the
3 2 110 3.2.110 3.2.110 2218 3007 sense of past time. 3.2.111 3.2.109
The affix (Aorist) comes after a verbal root used
in the sense of past before the commencement of
3 2 111 3.2.111 3.2.111
2205 173 the current day. 3.2.112 3.2.110
When a word implying 'recollection' is in connection
with it, a verb takes the affix (2nd Future) in the
sense of the past before the commencement of the
3 2 112 3.2.112 3.2.112

2773 307 present day. 3.2.113 3.2.111
The affix (2nd Future) is not applied in the
sense of the past when the denoting
recollection has in connection with it the particle
3 2 113 3.2.113 3.2.113

2774 2055 3.2.114 3.2.112
The affix (2nd Future) is optionally applied in
the sense of the past, when a word implying
'recollection' is in connection with it and whether
such a word has the particle or is used simply;
provided that the two verbs, occuring in the same
complex sentence, are also connected together,
that each is necessary to the other , to complete
3 2 114 3.2.114 3.2.114
2775 3232 the sense of the speaker. 3.2.115 3.2.113
The affix (Perfect Tense) comes after the verb
in the sense of the past before the commencement
3 2 115 3.2.115 3.2.115

2171 2329 of the current dayand unperceived by the narrator. 3.2.116 3.2.114
And the affix (Imperfect Tense) comes after the
verb when the particles and are in
connection with it and when the verb denotes past
action unperceived by the speaker and before the
3 2 116 3.2.116 3.2.116

2776 3929 commencement of the current day. 3.2.117 3.2.115
The affixes (Imperfect Tense) and (Perfect
Tense) come after a verb (in expressing a past time
not belonging to the current day and unperceived
by the speaker) when the past referred to is recent
3 2 117 3.2.117 3.2.117
2777 2506 and the sentence is interrogative. and 3.2.118 3.2.116
The affix (Present Tense) comes after a verb
when the particle is in connection with it (and
denotes a past time not belonging to the current
day and unperceived by the speaker). Note : This
3 2 118 3.2.118 3.2.118
2778 2970 debars (Perfect Tense) . 3.2.119 3.2.117
The affix (Present Tense) comes after a verb
when the particle is in connection with it and
denotes a past action not belonging to the current
3 2 119 3.2.119 3.2.119
2779 282 day and when the action is perceived by the agent. 3.2.120 3.2.118
The affix (Present Tense) is used after a verb in
denoting a past action when the word is in
connection with it and an answer is givento the
3 2 120 3.2.120 3.2.120
2780 2109 question. 3.2.121 3.2.119
The affix (Present Tense) comes optionally after
a verb in denoting past time, in reply to an
interrogation, when the words 'not' and 'what of
3 2 121 3.2.121 3.2.121

2781 2112 that' are in connection with it. 3.2.122 3.2.120
Optionally the affixes (Aorist) and (Present
Tense) come after a verb in denoting past time not
belonging to the current day, when the word is
used in the sentence, provided that the word is
3 2 122 3.2.122 3.2.122
2782 2392 not used. and 3.2.123 3.2.121
32123- The affix (Present Tense) comes after a verb
3 2 123 3.2.123 32331 3.2.123 2151 3078 when denoting a present action. 3.2.124 3.2.122
The affixes and are substitutes of
(Present Tense) when agreeing with what does not
3 2 124 3.2.124 - 3.2.124

3100 2969 end with the 1st (Nominative Case) case-affix. 3.2.125 3.2.123
(Present Tense) even when agreeing with what
ends with a 1st (Nominative Case) case-affix,
3 2 125 3.2.125 - 3.2.125
3102 3667 provided that it is in the Vocative Case. 3.2.126 3.2.124
(Present Tense) and come after a verb in
expressing an attendent circumstance or
3 2 126 3.2.126 - 3.2.126

3103 2964 characteristic and the cause of an action. 3.2.127 3.2.125
and
3 2 127 3.2.127 3.2.127 3106 1796 These two - and are called 3.2.128 3.2.126
The affix comes after the verbs 'to purify'
3 2 128 3.2.128 3.2.128
3108 2408 and 'to sacrifice'. 3.2.129 3.2.127
The affix comes after a verb in expressing
3 2 129 3.2.129 3.2.129

3109 1710 'habit', standard of age' and 'inability'. 3.2.130 3.2.128
The affix comes after the verb 'to go' and
'to hold' in denoting that the agent does the
3 2 130 3.2.130 3.2.130

3110 607 action without trouble. 3.2.131 3.2.129
3 2 131 3.2.131 3.2.131
3111 1972 agent indicated means 'an enemy'. 3.2.132 3.2.130
The affix comes after the verb 'to press out or
extract juice' when the sense is that of association
3 2 132 3.2.132 3.2.132

3112 3750 with sacrifice. 3.2.133 3.2.131
The affix comes after the verb in expressing
3 2 133 3.2.133 3.2.133

3113 364 praise. 3.2.134 3.2.132
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
From this stra as far as in stra 3.4.177
(inclusive), the affixes that we shall treat of, are to
be understood in the sense of agents having such a
32134- habit or nature or having skill in such and such
3 2 134 3.2.134 32177
--
3.2.134

3114 468 action. 3.2.135 3.2.133
The affix comes after all verbs in the sense of
3 2 135 3.2.135
--
3.2.135
3115 1776 'agents having such a habit etc.'. 3.2.136 3.2.134
The affix comes after following verbs in the
sense of 'agents having such a habit etc.' - 1.
'to adorn' 2. 'to expell' 3. 'to be born' 4.
'to be ripe' 5. 'to fly' 6. 'to be mad'
7. 'to shine' 8. 'to be ashamed' 9. 'to
move' 10. 'to grow 12. 'to bear' 13. 'to
3 2 136 3.2.136
--
3.2.136

3116 366 walk'. 3.2.137 3.2.135
The affix in the sense of 'the agent having
such a habit etc.' comes in the (Vedas) after
3 2 137 3.2.137
--
3.2.137
3117 1587 the verb that ends in the causative 3.2.138 3.2.136
The affix in the sense of 'the agent having
such a habit etc.' comes in the (Vedas) after
3 2 138 3.2.138
--
3.2.138
3118 2685 the verb 'to be' etc. 3.2.139 3.2.137
The affix comes after the following verbs in the
sense of 'the agent having such a habit etc.' viz. - 1.
'to be weary' 2. 'to conquer' 3. 'to stand',
3 2 139 3.2.139
--
3.2.139
3119 1353 as well as after 'to be'. 3.2.140 3.2.138
The affix comes after the verbs - 1. 'to
tremble' 2. 'to be greedy' 3. 'to be bold' 4.
'to throw' in the sense of 'agent having such a
3 2 140 3.2.140
--
3.2.140

3120 1803 habit etc.'. 3.2.141 3.2.139
The affix comes after the 8 verbs beginning
with 'to be calm' in the sense of 'the agent
3 2 141 3.2.141
--
3.2.141

3121 3364 having such a habit etc.'. 3.2.142 3.2.140
The affix comes after the following verbs in
the sense of 'the agent having such a habit etc.'. -
1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22.
3 2 142 3.2.142
--
3.2.142

3122
3556

23. 24 25. 26. 27. 3.2.143 3.2.141
The affix comes after the verbs 'to injure',
'to embrace and sport', 'to praise' and
'to believe', when these are in composition with the
3 2 143 3.2.143
--
3.2.143

3123 3318 preposition 3.2.144 3.2.142
The affix comes after the verb 'to wish'
3 2 144 3.2.144
--
3.2.144
3124 297 when compounded with the preposition and 3.2.145 3.2.143
The affix comes after the verbs 1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6. when compounded with the
3 2 145 3.2.145
--
3.2.145

3125 2556 preposition 3.2.146 3.2.144
The affix is added to the following verbs in the
sense of 'the agent having such a habit etc.' - 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
3 2 146 3.2.146
--
3.2.146

3126 2189 8. and 3.2.147 3.2.145
The affix comes after the verbs 'to lament'
and 'to cry' when an is in composition
3 2 147 3.2.147
--
3.2.147

3127 1918 with them. 3.2.148 3.2.146
The affix comes, in the sense of 'the agent
having such a habit etc.' after intransitive verbs
3 2 148 3.2.148
--
3.2.148

3128 1403 denoting 'motion' or 'sound'. 3.2.149 3.2.147
The affix comes, in the sense of 'the agent
having such a habit etc.' after intransitive verbs as
are and begin with a consonant and are
i.e. have a gravely accented vowel as as
3 2 149 3.2.149
--
3.2.149

3129 203 indicatory. 3.2.150 3.2.148
The affix comes after the following verbs in the
sense of 'the agent having such a habit etc.' - 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
3 2 150 3.2.150
--
3.2.150

3130 1522 9. 10. 3.2.151 3.2.149
And after the verbs having the sense of 'to be
3 2 151 3.2.151
--
3.2.151

3131 1215 angry' and 'to adorn', the affix is used. 3.2.152 3.2.150
The affix is not used after the verbs which end
3 2 152 3.2.152
--
3.2.152 3132 2054 in the letter 3.2.153 3.2.151
The affix does not come after the verbs 'to
3 2 153 3.2.153
--
3.2.153

3133 3776 strike', 'to shine' and 'to initiate'. 3.2.154 3.2.152
The affix comes after the following verbs, in
the sense of 'agent having such habit etc.' - 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
3 2 154 3.2.154
--
3.2.154

3134 2975 3.2.155 3.2.153
The affix comes, in the sense of 'agent having
such habit etc.' after the following verbs - 1. 2.
3 2 155 3.2.155
--
3.2.155

3135 1492 3. 4. 5. 3.2.156 3.2.154
The affix comes in the sense of 'agent having
such habit etc.' after the verb 'to hasten
3 2 156 3.2.156
--
3.2.156
3136 2455 forward'. 3.2.157 3.2.155
such habit etc.' after the verbs 1. 'to conquer' 2.
'to respect' 3. 'to waste, to dwell, to go' 4.
'to shelter' 5. 'to go' 6. 'to vomit' 7. 'not
to give pain' 8. 'to injure' 9. 'to
3 2 157 3.2.157
--
3.2.157

3137 1516 humiliate' 10. 'to beget'. 3.2.158 3.2.156
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
such habit etc.' after the words - 1. 'to desire' 2.
'to seize' 3. 'to go' 4. 'to give, to go , to
protect' 5. 'to sleep' 6. 'to be tired' 7.
3 2 158 3.2.158
--
3.2.158

3138 3846 'to venerate'. 3.2.159 3.2.157
The affix comes after the verbs 1. 'to give' 2.
3 2 159 3.2.159
--
3.2.159
3139 1846 'to suck' 3. 'to bind' 4. 'to fall' 5. 'to sit'. 3.2.160 3.2.158
such a habit etc.' comes after the verbs 1. 'to
3 2 160 3.2.160
--
3.2.160

3140 3780 flow' 2. 'to eat' 3. 'to eat'. 3.2.161 3.2.159
such a habit etc.' after the verbs 1. 'to break'
3 2 161 3.2.161
--
3.2.161

3141 2645 2. 'to shine' 3. 'to be fat'. 3.2.162 3.2.160
such a habit etc.' after the verbs 1. 'to know' 2.
3 2 162 3.2.162
--
3.2.162

3142 3163 'to divide' 3. 'to pierce'. 3.2.163 3.2.161
such a habit etc.' after the verbs 1. 'to go' 2.
3 2 163 3.2.163
--
3.2.163

3143 627 'to destroy' 3. 'to conquer' 4. 'to flow'. 3.2.164 3.2.162
3 2 164 3.2.164
--
3.2.164

3144 1267 And the word is irregularly formed. Irregular 3.2.165 3.2.163
3 2 165 3.2.165
--
3.2.165
3145 1498 awake' in the sense of 'agent having such a habit'. 3.2.166 3.2.164
such a habit etc.' after the verbs 1. 2. 3.
3 2 166 3.2.166
--
3.2.166

3146 2812 when they end in the affix 3.2.167 3.2.165
such a habit etc.' after the verbs 1. 'to bow' 2.
'to shake' 3. 'to smile' 4. 'not to
cease' 5. 'to desire' 6. 'to injure' 7. 'to
3 2 167 3.2.167
--
3.2.167

3147 2122 shine'. 3.2.168 3.2.166
The affix comes after the roots that have taken
the affix and after all the verbs 'to wish'
and 'to beg' in the sense of 'agent having such
3 2 168 3.2.168
--
3.2.168
3148 3590 a habit etc.'. 3.2.169 3.2.167
The words and are irregularly formed by
the addition of the affix , in the sense of 'agent
3 2 169 3.2.169
--
3.2.169
3149 3173 having such a habit etc.'. Irregular 3.2.170 3.2.168
roots that have taken the Denominative affix in
3 2 170 3.2.170
--
3.2.170
3150 1197 the sense of 'agent having such a habit etc.'. 3.2.171 3.2.169
In the (Vedas), the affixes and in the
sense of 'agent having such a habit etc.' come after
the verbs that end in long or long or short and
after the verbs 1. 'to go' 2. 'to kill' 3. 'to
be produced' and these affixes operate likek
3 2 171 3.2.171
--
3.2.171

3151 527 (Perfect Tense) causing reduplication of the root. 3.2.172 3.2.170
The affix comes, in the sense of 'agent
having such a habit etc.' after the verbs 'to
3 2 172 3.2.172
--
3.2.172

3152 3868 sleep' and 'to be thirsty'. 3.2.173 3.2.171
such a habit etc.' after the verbs 'to to injure' and
3 2 173 3.2.173
--
3.2.173

3153 3423 'to praise, to salute'. 3.2.174 3.2.172
The affixes and come in the sense of
'agent having such a habit etc.' after the verb 'to
3 2 174 3.2.174
--
3.2.174

3154 2672 fear'. and 3.2.175 3.2.173
such a habit etc.' after the verbs 1. 'to stand' 2.
'to rule' 3. 'to shine' 4. 'to go' 5. 'to
3 2 175 3.2.175
--
3.2.175

3155 3840 go'. 3.2.176 3.2.174
The affix in the sense of 'agent having such a
habit etc.' comes after the verb when it ends with
3 2 176 3.2.176
--
3.2.176
3156 2843 the affix 3.2.177 3.2.175
such a habit etc.' after the verbs 1. 'to shine' 2.
'to shine' 3. 'to injure' 4. 'to shine' 5.
'to be strong' 6. 'to fill' 7. 'to move rapdily' 8.
'to praise', when preceded by the word 'a
3 2 177 3.2.177
--
3.2.177

3157 2705 stone'. 3.2.178 3.2.176
such a habit etc.' after the verbs other than those
3 2 178 3.2.178 3.2.178

3158 262 seen above. 3.2.179 3.2.177
The affix comes after the verb 'to be' when
3 2 179 3.2.179 3.2.179

3159 2684 the word so formed denotes a name or surety. 3.2.180 3.2.178
The affix comes after the verb 'to be' when it is
preceded by the , and provided that
the word to be formed does not mean an
3 2 180 3.2.180 3.2.180

3160 3179 appellative. 3.2.181 3.2.179
The affix comes, in denoting the object after
3 2 181 3.2.181 3.2.181
3161 1986 the verb 'to feed'. 3.2.182 3.2.180
The affix with in the sense of instrument,
comes after the verbs 1. 'to cut' 2. 'to lead' 3.
'to hurt' 4. 'to join' 5. 'to join' 6. 'to
praise' 7. 'to inflict pain' 8. 'to bind' 9. 'to
sprinkle' 10. 'to urine' 11. 'to fall' 12. 'to
3 2 182 3.2.182 3.2.182

3162 1850 bite' 13. 'to bind' 3.2.183 3.2.181
The affix is used after the verb 'to purify' with
the sense of instrument when denoting a member
3 2 183 3.2.183 3.2.183
3164 3919 of the body of a plough or of a hog. 3.2.184 3.2.182
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix comes after the verbs 1. 'to go' 2.
'to cut' 3. 'to shake' 4. 'to bring forth' 5. 'to
dig' 6. 'to bear' 7. 'to go' , with the sense of
3 2 184 3.2.184 3.2.184

3165 348 instrument. 3.2.185 3.2.183
The affix comes after the verb 'to purify' with
the sense of the agent so expressed being the
instrument when the sense of the complete word is
3 2 185 3.2.185 3.2.185
3166 2399 simply appellative and not descriptive. 3.2.186 3.2.184
The affix comes after the verb 'to purify' with
the sense of the agent or instrument when it is
respectively used in connection with a sage or a
3 2 186 3.2.186 3.2.186

3167 993 deity. 3.2.187 3.2.185
The verbal roots marked with an indicatory , take
3 2 187 3.2.187 3.2.187
3088 1553 the affix , in denoting the present time. 3.2.188 3.2.186
And after the roots denoting inclination,
understanding, or respect, the affix is used with
3 2 188 3.2.188 3.2.188

3089 2714 the force of the present 3.3.1 3.2.187
The affixes and the rest with the force of the
present and with a sense simply appellative are
3 3 1 3.3.1 3.3.1
3169 706 attached diversely. 3.3.2 3.2.188

The affixes are seen also attached with the
3 3 2 3.3.2 3.3.2
3170 2693 force of the past time. 3.3.3 3.3.1
33003- The words etc. are valid forms having the
3 3 3 3.3.3 33015 3.3.3
3171 2651 sense of the future time. 3.3.4 3.3.2
The affix (Present Tense) comes after a root
with the force of futurity when it has in construction
3 3 4 3.3.4 3.3.4

2783 2858 with it the particles and 3.3.5 3.3.3
The affix (Present Tense) is optionally used
after a root with the force of the futurity when it has
3 3 5 3.3.5 3.3.5

2784 3185 in construction with it the adverbs and 3.3.6 3.3.4
When the word or its derivatives are in
construction with a verb, the affix (Present
Tense) is used optionally after a root, in denoting
future time, provided that the sentences expresses
3 3 6 3.3.6 3.3.6
2785 1082 a desire of gaining on the part of the speaker. 3.3.7 3.3.5
And when the success, that would accrue to
another by fulfilling the desire of the speaker, is
indicated in a sentence, the present tense may
3 3 7 3.3.7 3.3.7

2786 3000 optionally be used with the force of the futurity. 3.3.8 3.3.6
The affix (Present Tense) is optionally used with
the force of futurity after that root, which is in a
conditional sentence, is the condition precedent for
the action indicated by another verb having the
3 3 8 3.3.8 3.3.8

2787 3026 sense of the imperative mood. 3.3.9 3.3.7
The (Present Tense) or the (Potential) is
used under similar conditions in denoting futurity,
when the future time is future by a (= 48
3 3 9 3.3.9 3.3.9

2788 2983 minutes). 3.3.10 3.3.8
The affixes and are placed after a verbal
root with the force of the future when the word in
and
construction therewith is another verb, denoting an
3 3 10 3.3.10 3.3.10

3175 1755 action performed for the sake of the (future) action. 3.3.11 3.3.9
And the affixes that are ordained to come after a
root with the force of denoting the mere action of
the verb, such as etc. --
3.1.3, have also the force of the future, when the
word in construction therewith is another verb
denoting an action performed for the sake of the
3 3 11 3.3.11 3.3.11
3180 2662 future action. 3.3.12 3.3.10
The affix comes after a root with the force of
the future when the word in construction with it is in
the Accusative -2nd case and when the action is
3 3 12 3.3.12 3.3.12

3181 91 performed for the sake of another action. 3.3.13 3.3.11
The affix (2nd Future) is used after a verb in the
remaining cases where futurity pure and simple is
indicated and also where there is construction with
it another verb denoting an action performed for the
3 3 13 3.3.13 3.3.13
2193 3020 sake of the future action. 3.3.14 3.3.12
The affixes called i.e. and are
3 3 14 3.3.14 3.3.14

3107 3019 optionally the substitutes of (2nd Future). 3.3.15 3.3.13
The affix (1st Future) comes after a verbal root
in the sense of what will happen but not in the
3 3 15 3.3.15 3.3.15

2185 174 course of the current day. 3.3.16 3.3.14
The affix comes after the roots 1. 'to pace' 2.
3 3 16 3.3.16 3.3.16

3182 2283 'to pain 3. 'to enter' 4. 'to touch'. 3.3.17 3.3.15
The affix comes after the verb 'to move' when
3 3 17 3.3.17 3.3.17
3183 3779 the agent is permanently fixed. 3.3.18 3.3.16
33018- The affix comes after a root when mere action
3 3 18 3.3.18 33112 3.3.18
3184 2663 is denoted. 3.3.19 3.3.17
The affix comes after a root when the sense is
that of an appellative, the word being related to the
33019- verb from which its name is deduced, but not as
3 3 19 3.3.19 33112 3.3.19

3186 8 agent. 3.3.20 3.3.18
The affix comes after all roots when the word so
3 3 20 3.3.20 3.3.20

3190 2315 formed is the name of a measure. 3.3.21 3.3.19
3 3 21 3.3.21 3.3.21
3191 606 The affix comes after the root 'to study'. 3.3.22 3.3.20
The affix comes after the verb 'to roar' when it
3 3 22 3.3.22 3.3.22
3192 793 has an in composition with it. 3.3.23 3.3.21
The affix comes after the roots 1. 'to join' 2.
'to run' 3. 'to burn' when in composition with the
3 3 23 3.3.23 3.3.23

3194 3648 preposition 3.3.24 3.3.22
The affix comes after the roots 1. 'to go to' 2.
'to lead' 3. 'to be' when not in composition with
3 3 24 3.3.24 3.3.24

3195 3452 an 3.3.25 3.3.23
The affix comes after the roots 1. 'to sneeze'
2. 'to move and hear' when the preposition is
3 3 25 3.3.25 3.3.25

3196 3319 in composition. 3.3.26 3.3.24
The affix comes after the verb 'to lead' when
3 3 26 3.3.26 3.3.26

3197 397 the prepositions and are in composition. 3.3.27 3.3.25
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix comes after the roots 1. 'to run' 2.
'to praise' 3. 'to move and hear' when the
3 3 27 3.3.27 3.3.27

3198 2555 word in composition is 3.3.28 3.3.26
The affix comes after the roots 1. 'to purify' 2.
'to cut' when and are respectively in
3 3 28 3.3.28 3.3.28
3199 2196 composition. 3.3.29 3.3.27
The affix comes after the root when the
3 3 29 3.3.29 3.3.29
3200 752 -s and are in composition. 3.3.30 3.3.28
prepositions and are in composition and
3 3 30 3.3.30 3.3.30
3201 1160 when the sense of the verb relates to grain. 3.3.31 3.3.29
The affix comes after the verb 'to praise'
when it is preceded by the and the word
3 3 31 3.3.31 3.3.31

3202 2821 refers to sacrificial subjects. 3.3.32 3.3.30
The affix comes after the verb 'to cover'
when preceded by the preposition ; provided that
3 3 32 3.3.32 3.3.32

3203 2559 the word so formed does not refer to sacrifice. 3.3.33 3.3.31
The affix comes after the verb 'to cover'
when the preposition is in composition with it
when the sense is that of extension and when such
3 3 33 3.3.33 3.3.33
3204 2483 spreading does not refer to words. 3.3.34 3.3.32
The affix comes after the verb 'to cover' with
the when the word so formed is the name
3 3 34 3.3.34 3.3.34

3205 1468 of a metre. 3.3.35 3.3.33
The affix comes after the verb 'to seize'
3 3 35 3.3.35 3.3.35
3207 738 when the preposition is in composition. 3.3.36 3.3.34
The affix comes after the verb 'to seize'
when in composition with preposition when the
3 3 36 3.3.36 3.3.36
3208 3647 sense of the root refers to fist. 3.3.37 3.3.35
The affix comes after the roots 1. 'to lead' 2.
'to go' when the prepositions and
respectively in composition with them and when the
words so formed respectively mean 'a game' and
3 3 37 3.3.37 3.3.37

3209 2312 'propriety or arrangement or law'. 3.3.38 3.3.36
The affix comes after the root 'to go' in
composition with the word when the sense is
3 3 38 3.3.38 3.3.38

3210 2305 that of following in regular succession. 3.3.39 3.3.37
The affix comes after the root 'to lie down'
when the prepositions and are in composition
with it and when the sense of the word so formed is
3 3 39 3.3.39 3.3.39

3211 3332 that of 'regular succession'. 3.3.40 3.3.38
The affix comes after the root 'to collect'
when the sense expressed is that of taking by hand
3 3 40 3.3.40 3.3.40

3212 3933 provided it does not refer to stealing. 3.3.41 3.3.39
The affix comes after the roots 'to collect'
and is the substitute of the initial in these
senses viz. - 1. 'a dwelling' 2. 'a fire on the funeral
3 3 41 3.3.41 3.3.41

3213 2201 pile' 3. 'the body' 4. 'collection'. 3.3.42 3.3.40
The affix comes after the roots 'to collect'
and is the substitute of the initial in the sense
of 'a multitude or assembly' (of living beings
possessing some common characteristics) but not
3 3 42 3.3.42 3.3.42

3214 3525 merely a confused crowd of men. 3.3.43 3.3.41
The affix comes after a root in denoting
reciprocity of action and the word so formed is in
3 3 43 3.3.43 3.3.43

3215 1028 the feminine gender. 3.3.44 3.3.42
The affix comes after a root in denoting
3 3 44 3.3.44 3.3.44

3218 313 condition when co-extensiveness is meant. 3.3.45 3.3.43
The affix comes after the root 'to seize' in
composition with and when maledicition is
3 3 45 3.3.45 3.3.45

3220 467 meant. 3.3.46 3.3.44
The affix comes after the root 'to seize'
when the word is in composition and the sense
3 3 46 3.3.46 3.3.46

3221 2557 denoted is the desire of acquisition. 3.3.47 3.3.45
The affix comes after the root 'to seize' in
composition with when it relates to sacrificial
3 3 47 3.3.47 3.3.47
3222 2333 subjects. 3.3.48 3.3.46
The affix comes after the verb preceded by
3 3 48 3.3.48 3.3.48
3223 2247 when the sense is that of grain. 3.3.49 3.3.47
The affix comes after the verbs 1. 2. 'to
join' 3. 'to purify' 4. 'to run' when the preposition
3 3 49 3.3.49 3.3.49

3224 739 is in composition. 3.3.50 3.3.48
The affix is optionally used after the verbs 1.
'to roar' 2. 'to float' when the preposition is in
3 3 50 3.3.50 3.3.50

3225 3240 composition. 3.3.51 3.3.49
seize' when the word is in composition, the
3 3 51 3.3.51 3.3.51

3226 392 sense being 'witholding the rain'. 3.3.52 3.3.50
seize' in composition with when the word so
3 3 52 3.3.52 3.3.52

3227 2558 formed relates to commerce. 3.3.53 3.3.51
seize' in composition with when the word so
3 3 53 3.3.53 3.3.53
3228 2912 formed means 'a rein'. 3.3.54 3.3.52
choose' when is in composition and the word so
3 3 54 3.3.54 3.3.54

3229 3279 formed means 'a sort of covering'. 3.3.55 3.3.53
be', the word being in construction and the
3 3 55 3.3.55 3.3.55

3230 2332 sense of the word so formed being 'disregard'. 3.3.56 3.3.54
The affix comes after a root ending in or
(when mere action is denoted or when the sense is
that of an appellative, the word being related to the
verb from which its name is deduced, but not as an
3 3 56 3.3.56 3.3.56
3231 920 agent). 3.3.57 3.3.55
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
After a root ending in long , short or long ,
3 3 57 3.3.57 3.3.57
3232 869 there is the affix 3.3.58 3.3.56
The affix comes after the verbs 1. 'to seize'
3 3 58 3.3.58 3.3.58

3234 1338 2. 'to choose' 3. 4. 5. 'to go'. 3.3.59 3.3.57
3 3 59 3.3.59 3.3.59

3235 794 an is in composition. 3.3.60 3.3.58
And The affix as well as come after the verb
3 3 60 3.3.60 3.3.60
3237 2246 'to eat' when the is in composition. 3.3.61 3.3.59
The affix comes after the verbs 1. 'to hurt
or to pierce' 2. 'to mutter' when no is in
3 3 61 3.3.61 3.3.61

3238 3324 composition with them. 3.3.62 3.3.60
The affix comes optionally after the verbs 1.
2. when no is in composition with
3 3 62 3.3.62 3.3.62
3239 3866 them. 3.3.63 3.3.61
And The affix comes optionally after the verb
'to surround' when the -s , ,
and are in composition ; or even when it is
3 3 63 3.3.63 3.3.63

3240 2837 without -less. 3.3.64 3.3.62
The affix comes optionally after the verbs 1.
'to speak' 2. 'to sound' 3. 'to read' 4. 'to
sound' when the is in composition with
3 3 64 3.3.64 3.3.64

3241 2245 them. 3.3.65 3.3.63
The affix comes optionally after the verb 'to
jingle' when is in composition with it, as well as
when it is without any or when 'flute' is
3 3 65 3.3.65 3.3.65
3242 1219 meant. 3.3.66 3.3.64
The affix comes Invariably after the verb 'to
3 3 66 3.3.66 3.3.66

3243 2176 barter' when the sense is that of 'measure'. 3.3.67 3.3.65
The affix comes after the verb when not in
3 3 67 3.3.67 3.3.67

3244 2722 composition with an 3.3.68 3.3.66
The words and are irregularly formed,
3 3 68 3.3.68 3.3.68

3245 2493 meaning 'joy'. Irregular 3.3.69 3.3.67
The affix comes after the verb 'to go' when
the preposition and are in composition and
3 3 69 3.3.69 3.3.69

3246 3652 the word so formed refers to beasts. 3.3.70 3.3.68
The word is irregularly formed when the sense
3 3 70 3.3.70 3.3.70

3247 19 of the root refers to gambling. Irregular 3.3.71 3.3.69
The affix comes after the verb 'to flow' in the
3 3 71 3.3.71 3.3.71
3248 2454 sense of impregnating (the covering of cows etc.). 3.3.72 3.3.70
The affix comes after the verb 'to call' when
the preposition , , and are in
composition with it and its semi-vowel is changed
3 3 72 3.3.72 3.3.72

3249 3981 into the corresponding vowel. 3.3.73 3.3.71
The affix comes after the verb 'to call' when
the word in composition is the and the
semi-vowel of the root is changed into its
corresponding vowel, when the word so formed
3 3 73 3.3.73 3.3.73
3250 476 means 'battle'. 3.3.74 3.3.72
The word is irregularly formed when meaning
3 3 74 3.3.74 3.3.74
3251 2193 'a trough'. Irregular 3.3.75 3.3.73
The affix comes after the verb 'to call' and
there is the change of the semi-vowel to its
corresponding vowel, when the root is without an
3 3 75 3.3.75 3.3.75

3252 2665 and mere action is denoted. 3.3.76 3.3.74
without an , in the sense of mere action and
3 3 76 3.3.76 3.3.76

3253 3898 is the substitute of 'to kill' before this affix. 3.3.77 3.3.75
the word so formed means 'solidity' and is the
3 3 77 3.3.77 3.3.77
3254 2791 substitute. 3.3.78 3.3.76
The verb preceded by the word takes the
affix and is the substitute of the word
3 3 78 3.3.78 3.3.78
3255 244 when the word so formed means 'a country'. 3.3.79 3.3.77
3 3 79 3.3.79 3.3.79

3256 23 meaning 'a portion of a dwelling house'. Irregular 3.3.80 3.3.78
The word is irregularly formed in the sense of
3 3 80 3.3.80 3.3.80

3257 749 'bench'. Irregular 3.3.81 3.3.79
The word is irregularly formed meaning 'a
3 3 81 3.3.81 3.3.81

3258 270 member of the body'. Irregular 3.3.82 3.3.80
the words , or are in composition with it,
when the word so formed is related to the verb as
3 3 82 3.3.82 3.3.82

3259 987 an instrument and is the substitute. 3.3.83 3.3.81
The affix also comes after a root 'to kill' when
'a clump' is the word in composition and the
relation of the word so formed to the verb is that of
3 3 83 3.3.83 3.3.83
3260 3805 the intrument. 3.3.84 3.3.82
The affix also comes after a root 'to kill' when
the is in composition and the relation
between the word so formed and the verb is that of
3 3 84 3.3.84 3.3.84
3261 2331 an instrument and replaces 3.3.85 3.3.83
The word is irregularly formed meaning 'an
3 3 85 3.3.85 3.3.85
3263 754 inclined place for leaning or support'. Irregular 3.3.86 3.3.84
The words and are irregularly formed in the
3 3 86 3.3.86 3.3.86

3264 3526 sense of 'a collection' and 'a praise' respectively. Irregular 3.3.87 3.3.85
The word is irregularly formed in the sense of
3 3 87 3.3.87 3.3.87

3265 2168 'as high as broad'. Irregular 3.3.88 3.3.86
The affix comes after the verb which has an
3 3 88 3.3.88 3.3.88
3266 1571 indicatory when denoting mere action etc. 3.3.89 3.3.87
After that verb that has an indicatory , the affix
comes with the force of denoting mere action
3 3 89 3.3.89 3.3.89

3267 1562 etc. 3.3.90 3.3.88
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
After the verbs 1. 'to worship' 2. 'to ask for'
3. 'to strive' 4. 'to shine' 5. 'to ask' 6.
'to preserve', comes the affix with the force
3 3 90 3.3.90 3.3.90

3268 2814 of denoting mere action etc. 3.3.91 3.3.89
The affix comes under similar circumstances
3 3 91 3.3.91 3.3.91

3269 3870 after the verb 'to sleep'. 3.3.92 3.3.90
The affix comes under similar circumstances
after a verb -- 1.1.20 when an is
3 3 92 3.3.92 3.3.92
3270 791 in composition with it. 3.3.93 3.3.91
The affix comes after a verb --
1.1.20 when a word in the Accusative -2nd case is
in composition with it and when the relation of the
3 3 93 3.3.93 3.3.93

3271 1019 word so formed to its verb, is that of 'location. 3.3.94 3.3.92
33094- To express an action etc. by a word in the feminine
3 3 94 3.3.94 33112
3.3.94

3272 3816 gender, the affix is added to the root. 3.3.95 3.3.93
After the roots 1. 'to stand' 2. 'to sing' 3.
'to drink' 4. 'to cook', the affix is used
when a word in the feminine gender denoting a
3 3 95 3.3.95
3.3.95

3273 3831 'mere action' is to be expressed. 3.3.96 3.3.94
In the literature, acutely accented comes
after the following roots, forming words in feminine
gender, denoting a 'mere action' 1. 'to rain' 2.
'to wish 3. 'to cook' 4. 'to think' 5. 'to
know' 6. 'to be' 7. 'to go, to consume' 8. 'to
3 3 96 3.3.96
3.3.96

3420 2741 give'. 3.3.97 3.3.95
And these words viz. 1. 'preserving sport' 2.
'joining' 3. 'velocity' 4. 'destruction' 5.
'a weapon' 6. 'fame', are anomalous
3 3 97 3.3.97
3.3.97

3274 833 forms, acutely accented ( ). 3.3.98 3.3.96
The affix comes after a roots 1. 'to go' 2.
'to worship' acutely accented ( ) in forming
3 3 98 3.3.98
3.3.98

3275 3335 a word in the feminine denoting action. 3.3.99 3.3.97
The affix comes after the following verbs in
forming a word in the feminine denoting an
'appellative 'and is acutely accented ( ) viz. 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
3 3 99 3.3.99
3.3.99

3276 3543 9. 3.3.100 3.3.98
And after the root comes the affix in forming a
3 3 100 3.3.100
3.3.100
3277 1136 feminine as well as the affix 3.3.101 3.3.99
3 3 101 3.3.101
3.3.101
3278 610 The form 'desire' is irregular. Irregular 3.3.102 3.3.100
After the verbs that end in an affix, there is the affix
3 3 102 3.3.102
3.3.102
3279 3 , the word being feminine. 3.3.103 3.3.101
The affix comes after a verb which has a
prosodially heavy vowel and ends in a consonant
3 3 103 3.3.103
3.3.103

3280 1302 when the word to be formed is feminine. 3.3.104 3.3.102
The affix comes after those verbs that have an
indicatory and after when the word to be
3 3 104 3.3.104
3.3.104

3281 3497 formed is feminine. 3.3.105 3.3.103
The affix as well as the affix come after the
following verbs, forming feminine words - 1.
'to think' 2. 'to worship' 3. 'to narrate' 4.
3 3 105 3.3.105
3.3.105

3282 1422 'to cover' 5. 'to learn' 3.3.106 3.3.104
The affix comes after those verbs which end in
long when an is in composition and when
3 3 106 3.3.106
3.3.106

3283 500 the word to be formed is feminine. 3.3.107 3.3.105
After verbs ending in and after 'to sit' and
'to loose', there is the affix when the word
3 3 107 3.3.107
3.3.107

3284 1595 to be formed is feminine. 3.3.108 3.3.106
The affix comes diversely after verbs when the
word to be formed is feminine noun, being the
3 3 108 3.3.108
3.3.108

3285 2957 name of 'diseases'. 3.3.109 3.3.107
The affix comes after the verbal roots, when
3 3 109 3.3.109
3.3.109
3286 3547 the word to be formed is an appellative. 3.3.110 3.3.108
And the affix comes optionally after a root when
a question and answer is expressed (as well as
3 3 110 3.3.110
3.3.110

3287 3239 and other affixes ordained by other rules). 3.3.111 3.3.109
The affix comes optionally after a root in the
3 3 111 3.3.111
3.3.111

3288 2337 sense of succession, merit, debt or production. 3.3.112 3.3.110
The affix comes after a verb when the particle
is in composition with it and the sense implied is
3 3 112 3.3.112
3.3.112

3289 466 that of 'cursing'. 3.3.113 3.3.111
The affixes called -- 3.1.95,
and the affix , are diversely applicable and
3 3 113 3.3.113 3.3.113

2841 1145 have other senses than those taught before. 3.3.114 3.3.112
The affix is added to the root when action is
3 3 114 3.3.114 3.3.114

3090 2118 expressed, the word being in the neuter gender. 3.3.115 3.3.113
The affix is added to the root when the name
3 3 115 3.3.115 3.3.115
3290 3039 of an action is expressed, in the neuter gender. 3.3.116 3.3.114
The affix is added to a root when the name of
an action is expressed, in the neuter gender
provided that the verb has in construction with it,
such a word in the Accusative -2nd case, as
indicates the thing, from the contact with which,
there arises a pleaasant sensation corporally to the
3 3 116 3.3.116 3.3.116

3291 1011 agent. 3.3.117 3.3.115
The affix is added to a root when the relation
33117- of the word so formed to the verb is that of an
3 3 117 3.3.117 33125
3.3.117

3293 983 instrument or location. 3.3.118 3.3.116
The affix generally comes in the sense of an
instrument or location after a root, when the word to
be formed is a name and is in the masculine
3 3 118 3.3.118
3.3.118

3296 2380 gender. 3.3.119 3.3.117
And the words 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
3 3 119 3.3.119
3.3.119

3298 1308 7. are anomalous. Irregular 3.3.120 3.3.118
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix comes after the roots 1. 'to cross' 2.
'to spread, to cover', when the is in
composition with them and when the word so
formed is an appellative related to the verb either
3 3 120 3.3.120
3.3.120

3299 393 as an instrument or as a location. 3.3.121 3.3.119
And after a verb ending in a consonant, comes the
affix (when the word to be formed is masculine
and related to the verb as an instrument or a
location and thereby the palatal is changed into
3 3 121 3.3.121
3.3.121
3300 3915 guttural). 3.3.122 3.3.120
And the words 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
3 3 122 3.3.122
3.3.122

3301 160 6. are anomalous. Irregular 3.3.123 3.3.121
The word is anomalous when the sense of
3 3 123 3.3.123
3.3.123

3302 727 the root refers to subjects other than 'water'. Irregular 3.3.124 3.3.122
The word is irregularly formed when the
3 3 124 3.3.124
3.3.124
3303 1513 meaning is 'a net'. Irregular 3.3.125 3.3.123
The affix as well as come after the verb
'to dig' when the word to be formed is an
appellative related to the verb as an instrument or
3 3 125 3.3.125
3.3.125
3304 1249 location. and 3.3.126 3.3.124
In the sense of 'hard and difficult' or 'light and easy'
the affix is added to a verb when and
3 3 126 3.3.126 3.3.126

3305 694 and are combined with it as -s. 3.3.127 3.3.125
The affix comes after the verbs 'to be' and
when the -s in composition with them are
'agent' and 'object' respectively, preceded by the
words etc. in combination with them, meaning
3 3 127 3.3.127 3.3.127

3308 1002 'hard or light'. 3.3.128 3.3.126
The affix comes after the roots ending in long
(when and and are combined as -
3 3 128 3.3.128 3.3.128
3309 505 stras, in the sense of easily or with difficulty). 3.3.129 3.3.127
roots having the sense of 'to go' when the word
etc. meaning 'lightly' or 'with difficulty' are in
3 3 129 3.3.129 3.3.129

3421 1441 composition with such verbs. 3.3.130 3.3.128
The affix is seen to come number the
(Vedas) after other verbs also, than those meaning
3 3 130 3.3.130 3.3.130

3422 263 'to go' 3.3.131 3.3.129
The affixes which are used when the sense is that
of present time, may, optionally in like manner, be
used when the sense is that of past or future time
3 3 131 3.3.131 3.3.131

2789 3077 not remote from the present. 3.3.132 3.3.130
The affixes which are used when the sense is that
of past time or of the present time, may, optionally,
in like manner, be used after a root in denoting
3 3 132 3.3.132 3.3.132

2790 575 future time when hope is expressed. 3.3.133 3.3.131
When the word 'quickly' or its synonym is in
construction with the verb, the future affix (2nd
Future) is used after the root when 'hope' is
3 3 133 3.3.133 3.3.133
2791 1228 expressed in a conditional form. 3.3.134 3.3.132
The affix of the Potential is used in denoting
Futurity after a root, when the in composition
3 3 134 3.3.134 3.3.134

2792 576 with it is a word expressing 'hope'. 3.3.135 3.3.133
When constant continuance of action or a near
Past or Future is meant, the Past and Future are
not denoted as taught in 3.2.111 and
3.3.15, through the Imperfect and the
II Future, but through the Aorist and the First
3 3 135 3.3.135 3.3.135

2793 2150 Future. 3.3.136 3.3.134
The Futurity is not expressed, as taught in
3.3.15 throught the II Future, but
through the I Future, when a statement is made of
3 3 136 3.3.136 3.3.136

2794 2652 a limit on this () side of another place. II Future 3.3.137 3.3.135
The II Future is used instead of the I Future in
denoting Future time not belonging to the current
day when the word is used together with a
word expressing division of time, but not when it is
3 3 137 3.3.137 3.3.137

2795 1060 a word giving the sense of 'day' or 'night'. II Future 3.3.138 3.3.136
Optionally so, when a declaration is made with
3 3 138 3.3.138 3.3.138

2796 2300 regard to that side of a limit of time. II Future 3.3.139 3.3.137
Where there is a reason for affixing
(Benedictive) the affix (Conditional Future) is
used in the Future tense when the non-completion
3 3 139 3.3.139 3.3.139

2229 2986 of the action is to be understood. 3.3.140 3.3.138
And (where there is a reason for affixing
(Benedictive) , the affix (Conditional Future) is
to be used, when the non-completion of the action
3 3 140 3.3.140 3.3.140

2797 2692 is to be understood) if the sense is that of past time. 3.3.141 3.3.139
From this point up to stra
3.3.152 (the whole of the following sentence is to
be taken as exerting a governing the influence on
the stras that follow; where there is a reason for
affix (Benedictive) , the (Conditional Future)
may be) optionally (used in denoting the past time,
when the non-completion of the action is to be
3 3 141 3.3.141 3.3.141
2798 3315 understood). and 3.3.142 3.3.140
The affix (Present Tense) is used after a root
when it has in composition with it the words or
, the sense implied by the sentence being that
3 3 142 3.3.142 3.3.142

2799 1280 of 'censure'. 3.3.143 3.3.141
The affix (Benedictive) as well as (Present
Tense) is optionally used after a root when the
word is in construction with it and censure is
3 3 143 3.3.143 3.3.143

2800 3184 implied. and 3.3.144 3.3.142
The affixes (Benedictive) and (I Future)
come after a verb when the interrogative words like
etc. aer in composition with it and censure is
3 3 144 3.3.144 3.3.144
2801 1081 implied. and 3.3.145 3.3.143
When it is to be expressed that somebody hold that
something is not likely to take place or is not to be
tolerated, the Potential and the I Future are used,
3 3 145 3.3.145 3.3.145
2802 178 even without the Interrogative Pronoun. and 3.3.146 3.3.144
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix (I Future) is used after a root when the
words or those having the sense of 'he
is' are in construction with it (when the action is not
3 3 146 3.3.146 3.3.146

2803 1079 likely to occur, or is not to be tolerated). 3.3.147 3.3.145
The affix (Benedictive) comes after a root, the
words and being in construction with it,
when the sense is that the action is not believed to
3 3 147 3.3.147 3.3.147

2804 1504 be likely or is not to be tolerated. 3.3.148 3.3.146
The affix (Benedictive) comes after a root in all
tenses when the words and are in
composition with it, provided that censure is
3 3 148 3.3.148 3.3.148
2805 2811 implied. 3.3.149 3.3.147
The affix (Benedictive) comes in all tenses
when the words and are in composition
3 3 149 3.3.149 3.3.149
2806 1279 with it, provided that censure is implied. 3.3.150 3.3.148
The affix (Benedictive) comes in all tenses
when used with the words and and the
3 3 150 3.3.150 3.3.150

2807 1420 sense implied is that of 'wonder'. 3.3.151 3.3.149
In all the cases when 'wonder' is implied by word
other than and , the affix (I Future) is
used after a root, except when the word is
3 3 151 3.3.151 3.3.151

2808 3432 used. 3.3.152 3.3.150
The affix (Benedictive) comes after a verb in all
tenses when the words and , both having
3 3 152 3.3.152 3.3.152
2809 708 the same meaning, are in composition. 3.3.153 3.3.151
The affix (Benedictive) comes after a root, in
expressing or making known of a wish, except
3 3 153 3.3.153 3.3.153

2810 1050 when the word is in composition with it. 3.3.154 3.3.152
The affix (Benedictive) is used after a root,
when the expectation (of a person or thing being
able or competent to do or suffer the action
denoted by the verb is implied (or expressed by any
3 3 154 3.3.154 3.3.154

2811 3669 other word used along with them) than 'alarm'. 3.3.155 3.3.153
The affix (Benedictive) is optionally used after a
verb when it has another verb which expresses
'expectation' in construction with it, but not so when
3 3 155 3.3.155 3.3.155

2812 3208 the word is used. 3.3.156 3.3.154
The affix (Benedictive) is optionally used after
those verbs which express the condition and its
3 3 156 3.3.156 3.3.156 2813 3956 consequence. 3.3.157 3.3.155
The affixes (Benedictive) and (Imperative)
are used after a root when another verb having the
3 3 157 3.3.157 3.3.157

2814 612 same sense of 'wishing' is in construction with it. and 3.3.158 3.3.156
The affix
comes after a verb when another
verb meaning 'to wish' is in construction, provided
3 3 158 3.3.158 3.3.158

3176 3633 that the agent of both the verbs is the same.
3.3.159 3.3.157
The affix (Benedictive) is used after a verb
when the verbs meaning 'to wish' are in
construction with it and the agent of both the verbs
3 3 159 3.3.159 3.3.159
2815 2982 is the same. 3.3.160 3.3.158
After roots meaning 'to wish' the (Benedictive)
3 3 160 3.3.160 3.3.160

2816 611 is optionally used denoting the present time. 3.3.161 3.3.159
The affix (Benedictive) comes after a verb
when the agent either 1. commands 2. invites 3.
permits 4. politely expresses a wish 6. asks
3 3 161 3.3.161 3.3.161

2208 3168 questions or 7. prays. 3.3.162 3.3.160
The affix (Imperative) is used after a root in the
3 3 162 3.3.162 3.3.162
2194 3024 sense of commanding etc. 3.3.163 3.3.161
The affixes called and the affix
(Imperative) come also after verbs, in the sense of
direction, granting permission and proper
3 3 163 3.3.163 3.3.163

2817 2561 (particular) time. and 3.3.164 3.3.162
The affix (Benedictive) (as well as and
(Imperative) ) is used (under similar circumstances
in the sense of 1. direction 2. permission etc.) when
the time is future by a (48 minutes or an Indian
hour); (or the Potential may be used as well when it
3 3 164 3.3.164 3.3.164

2818 2984 signifies 'at this very moment'). 3.3.165 3.3.163
The affix (Imperative) comes after a verb when
the word is in composition (when the sense is
that of 'direction', permission etc.) and referring to
3 3 165 3.3.165 3.3.165
2819 3854 time by a (48 minutes or an Indian hour). 3.3.166 3.3.164
And when 'wish' is meant ( the (Imperative)
may be used when the word is in composition
3 3 166 3.3.166 3.3.166
2820 154 with the verb. 3.3.167 3.3.165
The affix
comes after a root wehnt he words 1.
2. 3. (all meaning time) are in
3 3 167 3.3.167 3.3.167

3179 1061 composition.
3.3.168 3.3.166
The affix (Benedictive) comes after a root when
the word is in composition and the words 1.
3 3 168 3.3.168 3.3.168
2821 2985 2. 3. occur in construction. 3.3.169 3.3.167
The affixes and the affix are added to a
root when fitness as regards the agent is implied
3 3 169 3.3.169 - - -

- 3.3.169

2822 365 (as well as in the affix (Benedictive) ). and 3.3.170 3.3.168
The affix is added to the root in denoting
agent, showing that there is some 'necessity' or
'indebtedness' or 'obligation' on the part of the
agent in connection with the action denoted by the
3 3 170 3.3.170 - - -

- 3.3.170
3311 573 verb. 3.3.171 3.3.169
The affixes called also come after a root when
the sense to be indicated is that of 'necessity' or
3 3 171 3.3.171 - - -

- 3.3.171
3312 1149 'obligation'. 3.3.172 3.3.170
And the affix (Benedictive) as well as the
affixes come after a verb when the sense is that of
3 3 172 3.3.172 - - -

- 3.3.172
2823 3346 'capability'. 3.3.173 3.3.171
The affixes (Benedictive) and (Imperative)
come after a verb by which 'benediction' is
3 3 173 3.3.173 - - -

- 3.3.173
2195 582 intended. and 3.3.174 3.3.172
The affixes and are used after a root
when benediction is intende, provided that the
3 3 174 3.3.174 - 3.3.174
3313 1180 whole word so formed is an appellative. and 3.3.175 3.3.173
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affixes (Aorist) comes after a verb when the
3 3 175 3.3.175 3.3.175 2219 2761 word is used in connection with it. 3.3.176 3.3.174
When the word is followed by the affix
(Imperfect Tense) as well as (Aorist) may be
3 3 176 3.3.176 3.3.176
2220 3855 used after a verbal root. 3.4.1 3.3.175
When there is a syntactical relation between the
senses of the verbs, the affixes are valid, even in
denoting time other than that for which they have
3 4 1 3.4.1 3.4.1

2824 1995 been specifically enjoined. 3.4.2 3.3.176
When the (frequency of) repetition of an action is
indicated, the affix (Imperative) is added to the
root and the verb is repeated. And the affixes
and or the affixes and are the substitutes
3 4 2 3.4.2 3.4.2

;
;
2825 1208 of (Imperative). 3.4.3 3.4.1
The affix (Imperative) is similarly added to the
root optionally when several themes follow one
3 4 3 3.4.3 3.4.3

2826 3650 after another. 3.4.4 3.4.2
In the first case -- , ,
3.4.2 the same verb must be used in the
subsequent clause, as the verb which was put in
3 4 4 3.4.4 3.4.4

2827 2831 the (Imperative Mood) . 3.4.5 3.4.3
In the second case -- 3.4.3,
where many actions are spoken of together, the
verb that is made to follow, should be such as has
3 4 5 3.4.5 3.4.5

2828 3649 the sense common to all those verbs. 3.4.6 3.4.4
In the (Vedas), the (Aorist), (Imperfect
-
,
Tense) and (Perfect Tense) are optionally used
3 4 6 3.4.6 3.4.6

3423 1452 in all tenses, in relation to verbs. and 3.4.7 3.4.5
The affix (Vedic Subjunctive) is optionally used
the (Vedas) wherever the (Benedictive)
3 4 7 3.4.7 3.4.7
3424 2979 can be used. 3.4.8 3.4.6
Where a contingent promise (a reciprocal
agreement) or apprehension is implied, the affix
(Vedic Subjunctive) is used after a root in the
3 4 8 3.4.8 3.4.8

3431 775 (Vedas) Literature. 3.4.9 3.4.7
In the (Vedas) the following affixes come
after the roots with the force of the affix
, viz.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
3 4 9 3.4.9 3.4.9

3436 1754 14. 15. 3.4.10 3.4.8
The words 1. 2. 3. are
3 4 10 3.4.10 3.4.10

3437 2498 irregularly formed Vedic Infinitives. Irregular 3.4.11 3.4.9
The words 1. 2. are anomalous Vedic
3 4 11 3.4.11 3.4.11

3438 1903 Infinitives. Irregular 3.4.12 3.4.10
The affixes and are added to roots in
the (Vedas) to form Infinitives, when they are and
3 4 12 3.4.12 -
3.4.12

3439 3345 governed by the verb 'to be able'. 3.4.13 3.4.11
The affixes and are added to roots in
the (Vedas) to form Infinitives, when the and
3 4 13 3.4.13 - 3.4.13

3440 689 word is in composition. 3.4.14 3.4.12
The affixes 1. 2. 3. 4. are added to
- - -
roots in the (Vedas), in the sense of -
3 4 14 3.4.14 - - 3.4.14

3441 1148 affixes. 3.4.15 3.4.13
The word of is an anomalous passive
3 4 15 3.4.15 3.4.15

3442 378 participle in the (Vedas). -
3.4.16 3.4.14
The affix comes in the (Vedas) after
the following verbs, when mere name of the action
is indicated viz. 1. 'to stand' 2. 'to go' 3.
'to make' 4. 'to speak' 5. 'to go, to walk' 6.
'to sacrifice' 7. 'to grow tired' 8. 'to produce'
3 4 16 3.4.16 3.4.16

3443 2661 -
3.4.17 3.4.15
In the (Vedas), the affix comes after the
verbs 1. 'to creep' 2. 'to injure' , in the sense
3 4 17 3.4.17 3.4.17

3444 3782 of Infinitives indicating name of action. -
3.4.18 3.4.16
According to the opinion of the Eastern
Grammarians, the affix comes after the verb,
when there are in combination with it, the words
3 4 18 3.4.18 3.4.18

3316 367 and expressing the sense of prohibition. 3.4.19 3.4.17
According to the opinion of the Eastern
Grammarians, the affix is added to the root
'to exchange' when the sense is that of
interchange, (though the action denoted by the
former word is not prior to the action denoted by the
3 4 19 3.4.19 3.4.19
3317 741 latter word). 3.4.20 3.4.18
The affix is added to a root, to denote what is
situated on the side - or on this side of
3 4 20 3.4.20 3.4.20
3319 2306 something - 3.4.21 3.4.19
When two actions have the same agent, the affix
comes after that verb which takes place in
time anterior to that of the other (i.e. Absolutive in
3 4 21 3.4.21 3.4.21

3320 3632 refers to that action which precedes in time). 3.4.22 3.4.20
and
The affixes and come after a root when
3 4 22 3.4.22 3.4.22

3343 548 reiteration is to be expressed. 3.4.23 3.4.21
The affixes and are not added to a root
when the word is used in a simple sentence
and
which does not depend upon another to complete
3 4 23 3.4.23 - 3.4.23

3344 2056 the sense. 3.4.24 3.4.22
The affixes and come optionally after
that verb which denotes the prior action, when both
verbs have the same agent, provided that the
following words are in composition - 1. 2. and
3 4 24 3.4.24 - 3.4.24

3345 3243 3. 3.4.25 3.4.23
The affix is added to the verb 'to make',
when a word in the Accusative -2nd case is in
construction with it, if the sense intended implies
3 4 25 3.4.25 3.4.25

3346 1020 'abuse'. 3.4.26 3.4.24
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
(When the actions signified by the verbs 'to
make' and another have the same agent), the affix
is added to the verb 'to make' which is
concerned about a time anterior to that of the
other), provided that a word signifying 'sweet' is in
3 4 26 3.4.26 3.4.26

3347 3890 composition. 3.4.27 3.4.25
When the words 1. 'otherwise' 2. 'so' 3.
'how' 4. 'thus' are compounded with the
verb, the comes after 'to make', if it be such
3 4 27 3.4.27 3.4.27

3348 259 that its omission would be unobjectionable. 3.4.28 3.4.26
The affix is added to the root 'to make', the
words 1. 2. being compounded with it
when an angry reply is made (if the omission of
3 4 28 3.4.28 3.4.28

3349 2829 is unobjectionable). 3.4.29 3.4.27
When the object is compounded with it, the verb
'to see' or 'to know' takes the affix to
3 4 29 3.4.29 3.4.29

3350 1012 denote the total number of such objects. 3.4.30 3.4.28
The affix comes after the verb 'to know'
and 'to live' when the word is combined
3 4 30 3.4.30 3.4.30

3351 2857 with them. 3.4.31 3.4.29
The affix comes after the verb 'to fill' when
3 4 31 3.4.31 3.4.31

3352 1401 the word and are compounded with it. 3.4.32 3.4.30
The affix comes after the verb 'to fill' when
the word so formed expresses a measure of rainfall
3 4 32 3.4.32 3.4.32

3353 3079 and optionally the long of this is elided. 3.4.33 3.4.31
The affix comes after the causative of the root
'to wet', when there is compounded with a
noun denoting 'clothing', in the Accusative -2nd
case, as an , if the whole word so formed
3 4 33 3.4.33 3.4.33

3354 1429 expresses a measure of the rainfall. 3.4.34 3.4.32
The affix comes after the verb 'to rub'
when the words and are compounded
3 4 34 3.4.34 3.4.34

3355 2194 with it in the Accusative -2nd case. 3.4.35 3.4.33
The affix comes after the verb 'to grind',
when the words 1. 'dry' 2. 'powder' 3.
'dry', in the Accusative -2nd case are compounded
3 4 35 3.4.35 3.4.35

3356 3413 with it. 3.4.36 3.4.34
The affix comes after the verbs 1. 'to kill'
2. 'to make' 3. 'to seize', when the words 1.
2. 3. in the Accusative -2nd case
3 4 36 3.4.36 3.4.36

3357 3654 are respectively compounded with them. 3.4.37 3.4.35
a word in the Instrumental -3rd case is in
3 4 37 3.4.37 3.4.37
The affix comes after the verb 'to grind'
when a word in the Instrumental -3rd case denoting
3 4 38 3.4.38 3.4.38 3359 3843 'liquid' is in composition. 3.4.39 3.4.37
The affix comes after the verbs (the
causative of ) and 'to seize' when a word
denoting 'hand' in the Instrumental -3rd case, is in
3 4 39 3.4.39 3.4.39
3360 3934 composition. 3.4.40 3.4.38
The affix comes after the verb 'to feed'
when a word in the Instrumental -3rd case having
3 4 40 3.4.40 3.4.40 3361 3894 the sense of is in composition. 3.4.41 3.4.39
The affix comes after the 'to bind' when a
3 4 41 3.4.41 3.4.41

3362 146 word expressing location is in construction with it. 3.4.42 3.4.40
The affix comes after the 'to bind' when a
3 4 42 3.4.42 3.4.42
3363 3548 word so formed denotes an appellative. 3.4.43 3.4.41
The affix comes after the roots 'to destroy'
and 'to carry' when the words 'life' and
'person' expressing the agent of these verbs, are
3 4 43 3.4.43 3.4.43

3364 1006 respectively in construction with them. 3.4.44 3.4.42
The affix comes after the roots 'to dry' and
'to fill' when the word denoting an agent is
3 4 44 3.4.44 3.4.44
3365 843 in composition with them. 3.4.45 3.4.43
The affix comes after a root when an object or
an agent denoting similitude is in composition with
3 4 45 3.4.45 3.4.45

3366 770 it. 3.4.46 3.4.44
The same verb should be used after the gerunds
formed from the verbs 'to rub' etc. as the verb
3 4 46 3.4.46 3.4.46

3367 1040 from which the gerund is derived. 3.4.47 3.4.45
The affix comes after a root 'to bite'
preceded by the preposition when a word
ending with the Instrumental -3rd case is in
3 4 47 3.4.47 3.4.47

3368 758 composition with it.. 3.4.48 3.4.46
The affix comes after the roots having the
sense of 'to injure, to strike' when the object of
this gerund is the same as the object of the main
verb and when the noun with which it is
compounded ends with the Instrumental -3rd case-
3 4 48 3.4.48 3.4.48

3369 3938 affix. 3.4.49 3.4.47
The affix comes after the roots 1. 'to
press' 2. 'to obstruct' 3. 'to draw' when they
are preceded by the preposition and when they
are compounded with nouns ending with the
3 4 49 3.4.49 3.4.49

3370 3612 Locative -7th case-affix. 3.4.50 3.4.48
(The affix comes after a root when a word in
the Locative -7th case or Instrumental -3rd case is
in composition with it) and when immediate
contiguity is intended i.e. 'to fall together by the
3 4 50 3.4.50 3.4.50

3371 3639 ears'. 3.4.51 3.4.49
The affix comes after a root when a noun in
the Instrumental -3rd case or Locative -7th case is
in composition with it and when measure of length
3 4 51 3.4.51 3.4.51
3372 2494 is intended. 3.4.52 3.4.50
The affix is added to the root when a noun in
the Ablative -5th case is in composition and when
3 4 52 3.4.52 3.4.52

3373 291 'haste' is intended. 3.4.53 3.4.51
The affix is added to the root when a word in
the Accusative -2nd case is in composition and
3 4 53 3.4.53 3.4.53

3374 1956 when 'haste' is intended. 3.4.54 3.4.52
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix comes after a verb when a word in
the Accusative -2nd case is in composition,
signifying the limbs of one's own body, when the
3 4 54 3.4.54 3.4.54

3376 3886 limb is such that its loss will not destroy life. 3.4.55 3.4.53
The affix comes after a root when a word in
the Accusative -2nd case denoting a limb of one's
own body, which is completely afflicted by the
3 4 55 3.4.55 3.4.55

3377 2309 action, is in composition. 3.4.56 3.4.54
The affix comes after the verbs 1. 'to
enter' 2. 'to fall' 3. 'to pace, to go' 4. 'to
leap', when a word in Accusative -2nd case is in
composition and when the sense denoted is that of
3 4 56 3.4.56 3.4.56

3378 3263 complete pervasion and total abosrption. 3.4.57 3.4.55
The affix comes after the verbs 1. 'to
throw' 2. 'to be thirsty' when it is intended to
express an intermission of the action denoted by
the root, provided that a word in the Accusative -2
3 4 57 3.4.57 3.4.57

3379 444 nd case denoting time is in composition. 3.4.58 3.4.56
The affix comes after the verbs 1. 2.
'to seize' when the word 'name' in the
3 4 58 3.4.58 3.4.58

3380 2158 Accusative -2nd case is in composition. 3.4.59 3.4.57
The affixes and come after the root 'to
make' when an indeclinable word in composition and
with it and the meaning is the communication of
3 4 59 3.4.59 - 3.4.59

3381 410 anything in a disagreeable or undesired way. 3.4.60 3.4.58
and
make' when the word is in composition in the
3 4 60 3.4.60 - 3.4.60
3382 1737 sense of 'carrying to the end'. 3.4.61 3.4.59
The affixes and are added to the roots
'to make' and 'to be', in composition with a
word denoting a member of one's own body when and
3 4 61 3.4.61 - 3.4.61

3383 3885 the affix is joined thereto. 3.4.62 3.4.60
'to make' and 'to be', when a word ending in
the affix -- 5.2.27, or in an
affix having the force of --
5.3.42, or having the sense of the affix 'to make
or to become something with it had not been
and
before' --
3 4 62 3.4.62 - 3.4.62

3384 2149 5.4.50, is in composition. 3.4.63 3.4.61
and
'to be', when the word 'silently' is in
3 4 63 3.4.63 - 3.4.63
3385 1763 composition. 3.4.64 3.4.62
and
be' when the word in the sense of being
3 4 64 3.4.64 - 3.4.64

3386 267 favourably disposed, is in composition. 3.4.65 3.4.63
The affix
is added to every verb when another
verb having the sense of 1. 'to be able' 2. 'to
make bold' 3. 'to know' 4. 'to be weary' 5.
'to strive' 6. 'to begin' 7. 'to get' 8. 'to set
about' 9. 'to bear' 10. 'to be pleased or to
3 4 65 3.4.65 3.4.65

3177 3344 condescend' 11. 'to be'.
3.4.66 3.4.64
The affix
comes after a verb haivng in
composition with it and its synonyms when
3 4 66 3.4.66 3.4.66

3178 2336 these words express to be capable of something.
3.4.67 3.4.65
The affixes calle are used in the sense of an
3 4 67 3.4.67 - - 3.4.67 2832 992 agent. 3.4.68 3.4.66
The words 1. 2. 3. 3. 4.
5. 6. may be optionally be
3 4 68 3.4.68 - - 3.4.68

2894 2654 used to denote the agent. 3.4.69 3.4.67
The tense affixes called are used in denoting the
object and the agent and after intransitive verbs,
3 4 69 3.4.69 - - 3.4.69

. 2152 2962 they denote the action as well as the agent. 3.4.70 3.4.68
The affixes called and the affix called and
those that have the sense of have only these
last two senses, viz. an action and an object (
3 4 70 3.4.70 - - 3.4.70

2833 1670 and ). and 3.4.71 3.4.69
The affix also denotes the agent when it
3 4 71 3.4.71 - - 3.4.71

3053 131 expresses a beginning of an action. 3.4.72 3.4.70
The affix is used in denoting the agent as well
as the act and the object after verbs implying
motion after intransitive roots and after the verbs 1.
'to embrace' 2. 'to lie down' 3. 'to stand'
4. 'to sit' 5. 'to dwell' 6. 'to produce' 7.
3 4 72 3.4.72 - -
3.4.72

3086 1266 'to mount' 8. 'to grow old'. 3.4.73 3.4.71
The word and are irregularly formed and
the affix in these denotes the idea of the Dative or
3 4 73 3.4.73 - - 3.4.73
3172 1852 Receipient. Irregular 3.4.74 3.4.72
The words etc. are irregularly formed and
3 4 74 3.4.74 - - 3.4.74
3173 2676 denote ablation. Irregular 3.4.75 3.4.73
The words formed by affixes denote other
ideas other than these two - 1. Reciepient 2.
3 4 75 3.4.75 - - 3.4.75

3174 1713 Ablation. 3.4.76 3.4.74
The affix which is ordained after roots denoting
fixedness (to cling to a place), motion and taking
3 4 76 3.4.76 - - 3.4.76

3087 1186 gives the sense of location as well. 3.4.77 3.4.75
34077- In the place of will be substituted the affixes we
3 4 77 3.4.77 34112 3.4.77 2153 2976 shall announce hereafter. 3.4.78 3.4.76
The following are the substitutes of - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
3 4 78 3.4.78 3.4.78

2154 1732 - - - - - 3.4.79 3.4.77
The substitute replaces he last vowel, with the
consonant that follows it, of the
3 4 79 3.4.79 3.4.79

2233 1559 substitutes of that which has an indicatory 3.4.80 3.4.78
The word is the substitute of in those tenses
3 4 80 3.4.80 3.4.80 2236 1820 that have an indicatory - 3.4.81 3.4.79
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The words and are the substitutes of and
3 4 81 3.4.81 3.4.81
2241 2991 respectively in the (Perfect Tense). - 3.4.82 3.4.80
In the room of the affixes, the following are
substituted in the (Perfect Tense). Singular -
(), (), (). Dual - (),
3 4 82 3.4.82 3.4.82

2173 2301 (), (). Plural - () , (), (). 3.4.83 3.4.81
The above nine affixes of the (Perfect Tense)
are optionally added in the (Present Tense) also
3 4 83 3.4.83 3.4.83

2464 3166 after the verb 'to know'. and 3.4.84 3.4.82
Instead of the first 5 tense-affixes in the
(Present Tense) coming after the verb 'to speak'
there may optionally be the affixes of the
(Perfect Tense) ; being at the same time the
3 4 84 3.4.84 3.4.84

2450 2636 substitute in the room of 'to speak'. 3.4.85 3.4.83
The personal endings of the (Imperative Mood)
3 4 85 3.4.85 3.4.85 2198 3023 are as those of the (Imperfect Tense). and 3.4.86 3.4.84
In the (Imperative Mood) is the substitute of
3 4 86 3.4.86 3.4.86 2196 922 3.4.87 3.4.85
In the (Imperative Mood) , is substituted for
and this has not the indicatory of , i.e. it is
3 4 87 3.4.87 3.4.87

2201 3787 acutely accented. 3.4.88 3.4.86
In the (Vedas) the substitute of is
3 4 88 3.4.88 3.4.88
3552 3104 optionally treated as not having an indicatory 3.4.89 3.4.87
In the (Imperative Mood) is substituted for
3 4 89 3.4.89 3.4.89 2203 2799 the affix 3.4.90 3.4.88
In the (Imperative Mood) is substituted for
what would have substituted otherwise by
3 4 90 3.4.90 3.4.90
2251 555 3.4.79. 3.4.91 3.4.89
For such an coming after , is substituted and
for that coming after , is substituted , in the
3 4 91 3.4.91 3.4.91

2252 3692 (Imperative Mood). 3.4.92 3.4.90
In the (Imperative Mood) is the augment of
the affixes the first person and the termination is as
3 4 92 3.4.92 3.4.92

2204 492 if it had an indicatory 3.4.93 3.4.91
The is substituted for forming part of the affixes
3 4 93 3.4.93 3.4.93
2253 909 of the first person of the (Imperative Mood). 3.4.94 3.4.92
The augments and are added to the
3 4 94 3.4.94 3.4.94 3427 3021 (Personal Endings) of the (Vedic Subjunctive). 3.4.95 3.4.93
In the (Vedic Subjunctive) is the substitute of
in the first and second person dual of the
3 4 95 3.4.95 3.4.95 3429 496 3.4.96 3.4.94
In the (Vedic Subjunctive) is optionally the
substitute of in other places then those
3 4 96 3.4.96 3.4.96

3430 3311 mentioned in the last stra. 3.4.97 3.4.95
In the affixes the is optionally elided in
3 4 97 3.4.97 3.4.97

3426 632 the (Vedic Subjunctive). 3.4.98 3.4.96
The of the first person is optionally elided in the
3 4 98 3.4.98 3.4.98
3428 3502 (Vedic Subjunctive). 3.4.99 3.4.97
There is always elision of the of the first person
of the affixes that come in the room of that which
3 4 99 3.4.99 3.4.99
2200 2173 has an indicatory 3.4.100 3.4.98
And there is elision of the of that affix
which is the substitute of a having an indicatory
3 4 100 3.4.100 3.4.100
2207 631 3.4.101 3.4.99
The affixes 1. 2. 3. 4. are the
substitutes of the four affixes , , and
3 4 101 3.4.101 3.4.101

2199 1683 respectively of any which has an indicatory 3.4.102 3.4.100
The (Personal Endings) of the
(Benedictive) and the Potential take the augment
3 4 102 3.4.102 3.4.102 2255 2980 3.4.103 3.4.101
When the affixes of the Potential follow,
then acutely accented, is their augment and
the termination is regarded as having an indicatory
3 4 103 3.4.103 3.4.103

2209 2862 3.4.104 3.4.102
The augment comes after that
(Benedictive) also which denotes benediction and it
is acutely accented and the substitutes of this
3 4 104 3.4.104 3.4.104
2216 1086 (Benedictive) are as they had an indicatory 3.4.105 3.4.103
The affix is the substitute of in the
3 4 105 3.4.105 3.4.105
2256 1549 (Potential and Benedictive). 3.4.106 3.4.104
The short is the substitute of of the
first person singular in the Potential and
3 4 106 3.4.106 3.4.106
2257 618 Benedictive. 3.4.107 3.4.105
The augment is added to the following affixes
and when part of the affixes of the Potential and
3 4 107 3.4.107 3.4.107
2210 3752 Benedictive. 3.4.108 3.4.106
In the Potential and Benedictive is the
substitute of , the ending of the first person
3 4 108 3.4.108 3.4.108 2213 1550 plural 3.4.109 3.4.107
(In those tenses which are marked with an
indicatory ) is the substitute of when it
comes after an (Aorist) in or the
(Imperfect Tense) of a reduplicated verb or the root
3 4 109 3.4.109 3.4.109
2226 3733 'to know'. 3.4.110 3.4.108
When is elided is the substitute of after
3 4 110 3.4.110 3.4.110
2227 498 a (Aorist) stem which ends in long 3.4.111 3.4.109
In the opinion of only is the substitute
of , in the (Imperfect Tense) of the roots
3 4 111 3.4.111 3.4.111

2463 2968 which end in a long 3.4.112 3.4.110
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
In the opinion of only is the substitute
of , in the (Imperfect Tense) after the verb
3 4 112 3.4.112 3.4.112
2435 1971 'to hate'. 3.4.113 3.4.111
All the personal endings --

3.4.78, and all affixes with an indicatory are
3 4 113 3.4.113 3.4.113
2166 1728 called 3.4.114 3.4.112
The remainder i.e. the affixes other than
(Personal Endings) and those with an indicatory
3 4 114 3.4.114 3.4.114
2187 565 sub-joined to a verbal root are called 3.4.115 3.4.113
The (Personal Endings) of the (Perfect
3 4 115 3.4.115 3.4.115
2172 2994 Tense) are also called 3.4.116 3.4.114
When the sense is that of Benediction, the
substitutes of (Benedictive) are called
i.e. the (Personal Endings) of the
3 4 116 3.4.116 3.4.116
2215 2981 (Benedictive) are 3.4.117 3.4.115
In the (Vedas) this distinction of
and is not always maintained and the
3 4 117 3.4.117 3.4.117
3435 1463 affixes are promiscuously used. 4.1.1 3.4.116

? 05. (From this point forward up to the end of the Fifth
, " - - - - Chapter, whatever we shall treat of, should be
understood to come) after what ends with the
"
41001- feminine affixes or or after a
4 1 1 4.1.1 54160 4.1.1 182 1379 , 138 (Nominal Stem). 4.1.2 3.4.117
(After what ends with the feminine teminations or
or after a (Nominal Stem), the
following case-affixes ae used for declension) - 1st
05. - (), , ()
2nd - , (),
()
3rd - (), , 4th - (), ,
5th - (), , 6th - (),
4 1 2 4.1.2 - 4.1.2

183 3895 137 , 7th - (), , () 4.1.3 4.1.1
When the feminine nature is to be indicated the
41003- affixes which we shall treat of hereinafter must be
4 1 3 4.1.3 41081 4.1.3 453 3822 used. 4.1.4 4.1.2
The affix is used to indicate feminine nature
after the (Nominal Stem) etc. and
4 1 4 4.1.4 4.1.4 454 65 after the stems ending in short -F 4.1.5 4.1.3
The affix is used in forming the feminine after
4 1 5 4.1.5 4.1.5 306 871 (Nominal Stem) ending in or -F 4.1.6 4.1.4
And after what has an indicatory ( , or )
4 1 6 4.1.6 4.1.6 455 696 the affix is used denoting a feminine. -F 4.1.7 4.1.5
The affix is added, in forming the feminine to
the stems that end in the syllable , and is the
4 1 7 4.1.7 4.1.7 456 3058 substitute of the final such syllable. - 4.1.8 4.1.6
The affix is optionally used in the feminine after
a (Nominal Stem) ending with the word
4 1 8 4.1.8 4.1.8
457 2360 - 4.1.9 4.1.7
The affix is used in the feminine after a
(Nominal Stem) ending with the word
4 1 9 4.1.9 4.1.9
458 1557 when the word denotes a verse of the - 4.1.10 4.1.8
The feminine affixes are not used after the stems
4 1 10 4.1.10 4.1.10
308 2073 called -- 1.1.24 and after etc. -F 4.1.11 4.1.9
The affix is not used after a (Nominal
4 1 11 4.1.11 4.1.11 459 2734 Stem) ending in the syllable - 4.1.12 4.1.10
The affix is not used to denote the feminine
4 1 12 4.1.12 4.1.12
460 228 after a ending in - 4.1.13 4.1.11
The affix comes optionally after both - 1.
(Nominal Stem) ending in 2.
4 1 13 4.1.13 4.1.13

461 1570 - 4.1.14 4.1.12
The following rules apply to a (Nominal
41014- Stem) which is not a subordinate term in a
4 1 14 4.1.14 41081 4.1.14
469 214 compound. - 4.1.15 4.1.13
The affix is added in the feminine after the
(Nominal Stems) ending in short , if the
affix with which it ends has an indicatory or if the
affix be or or or or or
4 1 15 4.1.15 4.1.15

470 1558 or or or or or - 4.1.16 4.1.14
The affix is used in denoting the feminine after
a (Nominal Stem) ending in --
4 1 16 4.1.16 4.1.16

471 2823 4.1.105. - 4.1.17 4.1.15
In the opinion of the Eastern Grammarians, the affix
is used after what ends with the affix and it
4 1 17 4.1.17 4.1.17
473 2533 is to be regarded as a -affix. - 4.1.18 4.1.16
The affix is invariably added in the feminine
after the words beginning with and ending
4 1 18 4.1.18 4.1.18

476 3676 with when they take the affix - 4.1.19 4.1.17
The affix is added in the feminine after the
4 1 19 4.1.19 4.1.19

477 1174 words 1. and 2. - 4.1.20 4.1.18
(Nominal Stem) ending in and denoting
4 1 20 4.1.20 4.1.20

478 3064 early age. - 4.1.21 4.1.19
The affix come in the feminine after a
(Nominal Stem) ending in , which is
4 1 21 4.1.21 4.1.21

479 1945 (Numeral Determinative Compound). - 4.1.22 4.1.20
The affix is not used when a affix is
elided after a (Numeral Determinative
Compound) ending in a word not denoting a mass
4 1 22 4.1.22 4.1.22

480 280 or measure; or in 1. 2. or 3. - 4.1.23 4.1.21
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix is not used after an adjectival
(Numeral Determinative Compound) ending
with the word where the affix is elided
4 1 23 4.1.23 4.1.23

481 1047 when the compound means field. - 4.1.24 4.1.22
The affix is not optionally used after a
(Numeral Determinative Compound) where
the affix is elided when the compound ends
4 1 24 4.1.24 4.1.24

482 2395 in the word , referring to 'measure'. - 4.1.25 4.1.23
4 1 25 4.1.25 4.1.25

484 2602 ending in the word 'an udder'. - 4.1.26 4.1.24
The affix comes in the feminine after a
ending in the word 'an udder', beginning
4 1 26 4.1.26 4.1.26

485 3509 with a Numeral or indeclinable. - 4.1.27 4.1.25
The affix comes in the feminine after a
beginning with a Numeral and ending with
4 1 27 4.1.27 4.1.27

486 1849 the words 1. 'a rope' and 2. 'a year'. - 4.1.28 4.1.26
The affix comes after that which
4 1 28 4.1.28 4.1.28

462 167 ending in the syllable loses its penultimate - 4.1.29 4.1.27
The affix necessarily comes in the
(Vedas) and in forming Names after that
which ending in the syllable loses its
4 1 29 4.1.29 4.1.29

487 2180 penultimate - 4.1.30 4.1.28
The affix necessarily comes denoting the
feminine after the following (Nominal
Stems) when used to express a Name or in the
4 1 30 4.1.30 4.1.30
:
-

488 1164 (Vedas). - 4.1.31 4.1.29
The affix comes after the word in the
(Vedas) and in denoting a Name except the affix
4 1 31 4.1.31 4.1.31

3445 2929 (1st - Nominative Case Plural) is added. - 4.1.32 4.1.30
The augment is added to the words and
when the affix is added to form the
4 1 32 4.1.32 4.1.32

489 247 feminine. - 4.1.33 4.1.31
The substitute replaces the final of before
the feminine affix when the word so formed
means 'a wife' who takes part in the sacrifices of
4 1 33 4.1.33 4.1.33

490 2274 her husband. - 4.1.34 4.1.32
In forming the feminine with the affix , is
optionally the substitute of the final of when
4 1 34 4.1.34 4.1.34

491 3230 the latter is preceded by another vowel. - 4.1.35 4.1.33
In forming the feminine with the affix the word
always takes the substitute in the words like
4 1 35 4.1.35 4.1.35

492 2181 etc. - 4.1.36 4.1.34
In forming the feminine, the letter is the substitute
4 1 36 4.1.36 4.1.36

493 2411 of the final word when the affix is added. - 4.1.37 4.1.35
In forming the feminine with the affix the letter
having accent is the substitute of the finals 1.
4 1 37 4.1.37 4.1.37

494 3295 2. 3. and 3. - 4.1.38 4.1.36
In forming the feminine with the affix , is
optionally the substitute of the final (as well as
4 1 38 4.1.38 4.1.38
495 2737 the ). - 4.1.39 4.1.37
The affix is optionally used after a
(Nominal Stem) expressive of colour ending with a
gravely accented vowel and having the letter as
its penultimate letter and the letter is substituted
4 1 39 4.1.39 4.1.39

496 3072 in the room of - 4.1.40 4.1.38
The affix is used in the feminine after every
other word expressive of colour and ending with an
4 1 40 4.1.40 4.1.40
497 258 accent. - 4.1.41 4.1.39
The affix is used in forming the feminine after
the words ending with affixes which have an
4 1 41 4.1.41 4.1.41

498 3496 indicatory and after the words etc. - - 4.1.42
1. 2. 4.1.40
..
The affix is used after the 11 words etc.
in the sense of 'profession' etc. 1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
and 11 ; the affix is employed when
the sense is that of 1. 'profession or living' 2. 'a
bowl' 3. 'a sack or vessel for keeping grain' 4. 'a
natural spot of ground' 5. 'a cooked food or rice-
gruel' 6. 'stout' 7. 'black-coloured' 8. 'blue-coloured
other than cloth' 9. 'a plough-share' 10. 'a libidinous
4 1 42 4.1.42 4.1.42

1510
500 female' 11. 'a fellet or braid of hair', respectively. - 4.1.43 4.1.41
The affix is used in the feminine according to
the opinion of the Eastern Grammarians after the
4 1 43 4.1.43 4.1.43

501 3439 word - 4.1.44 4.1.42
a word ending in short and being expressive of
4 1 44 4.1.44 4.1.44

502 3316 quality. - 4.1.45 4.1.43
And the affix is optionally used in the feminine
4 1 45 4.1.45 4.1.45

503 2618 after the words etc. - -4.1.46
1. 2. 4.1.44
3. 4. 5.
The affix is always used in the (Vedas) in
4 1 46 4.1.46 4.1.46
3446 2174 forming the feminine of the words etc. - 4.1.47 4.1.45
The affix is always used in the (Vedas) in
4 1 47 4.1.47 4.1.47
3447 2686 forming the feminine after the word - 4.1.48 4.1.46
The feminine affix comes after a word when it
expresses the name of a wife in relation to her
4 1 48 4.1.48 4.1.48

504 2378 husband. - 4.1.49 4.1.47
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The augment is added to the Proper Nouns
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. and 6. and to
the words 1. 'snow' 3. 'forest' 4.
'barely' 5. 'a Yavana' 6. 'a maternal
uncle' and 7. 'a perceptor', before the
4 1 49 4.1.49 4.1.49

505 657 feminine affix - 4.1.50 4.1.48
compound word ending in , the first member of
the compound being the name of the means
4 1 50 4.1.50 4.1.50

506 1212 wherewith the thing is bought. - 4.1.51 4.1.49
The affix is used after a compound
(Nominal Stem) in which a name denoting the
means herewith, is the first member and the
second member is a word formed by the Particle
4 1 51 4.1.51 4.1.51

507 1179 when the sense is that of 'a small quantity'. - 4.1.52 4.1.50
The affix is used in the feminine after that
which ending with a word formed by
the affix has an acute accent on the last
4 1 52 4.1.52 4.1.52

508 2603 syllable. - 4.1.53 4.1.51
a ending with the word in having
acute accent on the final, the antecedent word not
4 1 53 4.1.53 4.1.53

509 447 being a word denoting a part of the body. - 4.1.54 4.1.52
And the feminine affix comes optionally after
what ends with the name of a part of the body when
the word is a subordinate member in compound
and has not a conjunct for its penultimate letter (i.e.
4 1 54 4.1.54 4.1.54

510 3884 the final is not preceded by a double consonant). - technical meaning
4.1.55 of 4.1.53
And the feminine comes optionally after
compounds ending with 1. 'a nose' 2.
'belly' 3. 'lip' 4. 'leg' 5. 'tooth' 6.
4 1 55 4.1.55 4.1.55

511 2164 'ear' and 7. 'horn'. - 4.1.56 4.1.54
The feminine affix does not come after a
(Nominal Stem) which denoting a part of
the body, belongs to the class 'the flank' etc.,
of a horse', nor when the word is a stem of more
4 1 56 4.1.56 4.1.56
512 2018 than two syllables. - 4.1.57 4.1.55
The affix does not come in the feminine after a
(Nominal Stem) denoting a part of the
body when the word is subordinate in a compound,
preceded by the word 1. 'with' 2. 'not' or 3.
4 1 57 4.1.57 4.1.57

513 3699 'having'. - 4.1.58 4.1.56
The feminine affix is not used after 1. 2.
when (the word at the end of which they stand) is a
4 1 58 4.1.58 4.1.58

514 2088 Name. - 4.1.59 4.1.57
The form 'long-tongued' is irregularly
4 1 59 4.1.59 4.1.59

3448 1881 formed in the (Vedas). Irregular 4.1.60 4.1.58
The feminine affix comes after a
(Nominal Stem) which is preceded by a word
4 1 60 4.1.60 4.1.60

515 1856 signifying direction. - 4.1.61 4.1.59
4 1 61 4.1.61 4.1.61
516 3148 (Nominal Stem) ending with the word - 4.1.62 4.1.60
The forms and are irregular forms
ending in found in secular (or vernacular as
4 1 62 4.1.62 4.1.62

517 3574 opposed to Vedic) Sanskrit. Irregular 4.1.63 4.1.61
The feminine affix comes after a word denoting
a or species when it does not express in its
original meaning a feminine and which moreovere
4 1 63 4.1.63 4.1.63

518 1505 has not the letter for its penultimate. - 4.1.64 4.1.62
And the feminine affix comes after the
(Nominal Stem) expressive of , followed by the
following 1. 'cooked' 2. 'ear' 3. 'flower'
4 1 64 4.1.64 4.1.64

519 2345 4. 'fruit' 5. 'root' 6. 'youth' - 4.1.65 4.1.63
(Nominal Stem) ending in short denoting classes
4 1 65 4.1.65 4.1.65

520 634 or races of men. - 4.1.66 4.1.64
After a (Nominal Stem) ending in short ,
not having the letter as its penultimate letter and
being expressive of races of men, the affix in the
4 1 66 4.1.66 4.1.66
521 831 feminine is - 4.1.67 4.1.65
The feminine affix comes in denoting a Name
after a (Nominal Stem) ending with the
4 1 67 4.1.67 4.1.67

522 2620 word - 4.1.68 4.1.66
The feminine affix comes after the word
4 1 68 4.1.68 4.1.68
523 2256 'lame'. - 4.1.69 4.1.67
When the feminine affix comes after a stem
ending in when comparision with something
4 1 69 4.1.69 4.1.69

524 838 (expressed by the first term) is meant. - 4.1.70 4.1.68
The feminine affix comes in the (Vedas)
after the word when the words 1.
'accompained or joined' 2. 'a hoof' 3. 'a
4 1 70 4.1.70 4.1.70

525 3568 mark' 4. 'handsome' precede it. - 4.1.71 4.1.69
The feminine affix comes in the (Vedas)
after the words 1. 'twany' 2. 'a water
4 1 71 4.1.71 4.1.71

3449 971 pot'. - 4.1.72 4.1.70
The feminine affix comes in denoting a Name
after the words 1. 'twany' 2. 'a water
4 1 72 4.1.72 4.1.72

526 3549 pot'. - 4.1.73 4.1.71
The feminine affix comes after the words
4 1 73 4.1.73 4.1.73

527 3388 etc. and that which ends with the affix - 4.1.74 4.1.72
The feminine affix comes after a stem which is
4 1 74 4.1.74 4.1.74
528 2806 formed by the affix or - 4.1.75 4.1.73
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
And the feminine affix comes after the word
4 1 75 4.1.75 4.1.75
529 572 - 4.1.76 4.1.74
41076-
4 1 76 4.1.76 ;
54160 4.1.76
530 1650 The -affixes are treated of here after. 4.1.77 4.1.75
The feminine affix comes after the
(Nominal Stem) and this affix gets the name
4 1 77 4.1.77 4.1.77
531 2882 4.1.78 4.1.76
In Patronymics used in narrower sense (counting
first from the grand-child), which are formed the
affixes and , the feminine is formed by
substituting ( ) for the and of those affixes
and adding the long under -- 4.1.74,
provided that they do not denote clans and
have prosodially long syllable preceding the last
4 1 78 4.1.78 4.1.78

1198 85 syllable. 4.1.79 4.1.77
After a word denoting a non-principal , is
the substitute of and , the feminine, even
though the syllable preceding the final be not
4 1 79 4.1.79 4.1.79
1199 1318 prosodially long. 4.1.80 4.1.78
The affix comes in the feminine after the words
4 1 80 4.1.80 4.1.80

1200 1216 etc. 4.1.81 4.1.79
The affix optionally comes after the words 1.
4 1 81 4.1.81 4.1.81

1201 1920 2. 3. and 4. 4.1.82 4.1.80
The affixes, on the alternative of their being
41082- used at all, comes after the word that is signified by
4 1 82 4.1.82 52140 4.1.82
1072 3626 the first of the words in construction in a stra. 4.1.83 4.1.81
The affix should be understood to come after
whatever we shall teach hereafter up to stra
41083-
4 1 83 4.1.83 44001
4.1.83

1073 2525 4.4.2 etc. 4.1.84 4.1.82
The affix comes after the (Nominal
Stem) etc., in the various mentioned
senses antedcedently up to
4 1 84 4.1.84
4.1.84

1074 417 4.4.2. 4.1.85 4.1.83
The affix comes, in the various senses taught
here-in-after antecedently to
4.4.2 etc. after the Proper Names - 1. 2.
3. and that which has the word
4 1 85 4.1.85
4.1.85

1077 1862 as its final member. 4.1.86 4.1.84
The affix comes after the word etc. in the
various senses taught antecedently to
4 1 86 4.1.86
4.1.86
1078 721 4.4.2. 4.1.87 4.1.85
The affixes and come after the words
and respectively, in the senses specified in the
stra reckoning from this one as far as stra
4 1 87 4.1.87
4.1.87

1079 3824 5.2.1. and 4.1.88 4.1.86
A affix ordained to come on account of the
relation of the words being that of a
(Numeral Determinative Compound) is elided by
when it has the sense of the various affixes
taught antecedent to
4.4.2 etc., but not so, the affix having the sense of a
4 1 88 4.1.88
4.1.88

1080 1947 (Patronymic). 4.1.89 4.1.87
The elision of (Patronymic) affixes in plural,
which have been enjoined by stras
2.4.63 etc. and the rest is prohibited, when the affix
has an initial vowel and it has the sense of the
various affixes taught antecedent to
4 1 89 4.1.89
4.1.89
1081 1320 4.4.2. - 4.1.90 4.1.88
There is elision of the (Patronymic)
forming affix -- 4.1.163, when a
affix beginning with a vowel is to be
4 1 90 4.1.90
4.1.90

1083 2883 added. - 4.1.91 4.1.89
There is optionally elision of the affixes
and when a affix beginning
4 1 91 4.1.91
4.1.91

1087 2569 with a vowel is to be added. - 4.1.92 4.1.90
The affix mentioned in 4.1.83 and
41092- those which follow it denote 'theh descendant of
4 1 92 4.1.92 43120
4.1.92

1088 1707 someone'. 4.1.93 4.1.91
The one and the same affix is used when a more
distant descendant, how low-so-ever, is to be
4 1 93 4.1.93
4.1.93

1093 898 denoted. 4.1.94 4.1.92
When a descendant of the description denoted by
-- 4.1.163, is intended to be
expressed, a new affix is attached, only after that
what already ends with an affix marking a
descendant as low at least as a grandson ( ): but
in the feminine the word is not termed and no
4 1 94 4.1.94
4.1.94

1094 1316 new affix is added. 4.1.95 4.1.93
The affix affix after a (Nominal Stem)
4 1 95 4.1.95
4.1.95

1095 96 which ends in short , in denoting a descendant. 4.1.96 4.1.94
The affix is added in the sense of a descendant
4 1 96 4.1.96
4.1.96

1096 2621 after the words etc. - 4.1.97
1. 2. 3. ............
4.1.95
The affix is placed after the word in
denoting the descendant and the of is
4 1 97 4.1.97
4.1.97

1097 3754 replaced by the substitute before this affix. 4.1.98 4.1.96
The affix comes after the words etc.
when a remoter descendant (called ) is to be
4 1 98 4.1.98
4.1.98

1099 1319 denoted. 1. 2. 4.1.99
..............
4.1.97
The affix comes, in denoting a descendant
4 1 99 4.1.99
4.1.99
1101 2099 after the (Nominal Stems) etc. 1. 2. 4.1.100
() 3. ..........
4.1.98
The affix comes after the words etc. when
they end in the affix --
4 1 100 4.1.100
4.1.100

1102 3908 4.1.104 4.1.101 4.1.99
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix is added in denoting a descendent
after a (Nominal Stem) ending in the
4 1 101 4.1.101
4.1.101

1103 2824 affixes or 4.1.102 4.1.100
The affix comes in denoting a (Patronymic)
descendant after the words 1. 2. 3.
when they denote the descendants of ,
4 1 102 4.1.102
4.1.102

1104 3367 and , respectively. 4.1.103 4.1.101
The affix comes in the sense of a
(Patronymic) descendant, optionally after the words
4 1 103 4.1.103
4.1.103

1105 1931 1. 2. and 3. 4.1.104 4.1.102
The affix comes after the words etc. in
denoting a remote ( ) descendant, but after
those words of this class which are not the names
of ancient sages, the affix has the force of
4 1 104 4.1.104
4.1.104

1106 224 denoting immediate descendant. 1. 2. 4.1.105
3. ..........
4.1.103
4 1 105 4.1.105
4.1.105
1107 1277 (Patronymic) descendant after the words etc. 1. 2. 3. ...........
4.1.106 4.1.104
The affix comes, in the sense of a
(Patronymic) descendant after the words 1. and
2. when the words so formed mean and
4 1 106 4.1.106
4.1.106

1109 2726 respectively. 4.1.107 4.1.105
(Patronymic) descendant after the words 1. and
2. when the special descendants of the family
4 1 107 4.1.107
4.1.107
1110 978 of are meant. 4.1.108 4.1.106
(Patronymic) descendant after the word when
4 1 108 4.1.108
4.1.108

1111 3046 meaning a descendant of 4.1.109 4.1.107
The affix is elided in the feminine after the
word when meaning a female descendant of
4 1 109 4.1.109
4.1.109
1112 3004 4.1.110 4.1.108
4 1 110 4.1.110
4.1.110

1113 420 (Patronymic) descendant after the words etc. ...........................
4.1.111 4.1.109
(Patronymic) descendant after the word when
4 1 111 4.1.111
4.1.111

1114 2648 the meaning is a
4.1.112 4.1.110
The affix comes in the sense of a descendant
4 1 112 4.1.112
4.1.112

1115 3401 after the words etc. ..............................
4.1.113 4.1.111
The affix comes in the sense of descendant
after the words are the names of rivers or women
when such words are not words and when
4 1 113 4.1.113
4.1.113

1116 391 they are used as names and not as adjectives. 4.1.114 4.1.112
after (Nominal Stem) denoting the name
of a or the name of a person of the family of 1.
4 1 114 4.1.114
4.1.114

1117 873 2. 3. 4.1.115 4.1.113
after the word when it is preceded by a
Numeral or by the words or and the letter
4 1 115 4.1.115
4.1.115

1118 2765 is substituted for the final of 4.1.116 4.1.114
after the word and when this affix is added,
4 1 116 4.1.116
4.1.116

1119 975 is the substitute of 4.1.117 4.1.115
The affix comes after the words 1. 2.
and 3. when the sense is a descendant
of the family of , and ,
4 1 117 4.1.117
4.1.117

1120 3155 respectively. 4.1.118 4.1.116
The affix comes optionally after the word
4 1 118 4.1.118
4.1.118
1121 2377 in denoting a descendant. 4.1.119 4.1.117
The affix comes optionally in the sense of a
descendant after the word as well as the affix
4 1 119 4.1.119
4.1.119

1122 1573 and 4.1.120 4.1.118
Words ending in the feminine affixes take the affix
4 1 120 4.1.120
4.1.120
1123 3825 in forming their (Patronymic). 4.1.121 4.1.119
after a word ending in a feminine affix and
4 1 121 4.1.121
4.1.121

1124 1978 consisting of two vowels. 4.1.122 4.1.120
after a dissyallabic (Nominal Stem)
ending in short , but not, however after a word
4 1 122 4.1.122
4.1.122
1125 633 ending in the Patronymic affix 4.1.123 4.1.121
4 1 123 4.1.123
4.1.123
1126 3411 after the stems etc. 1. ..
4.1.124 4.1.122
The affix comes after the words 1. and 2.
4 1 124 4.1.124
4.1.124

1127 3154 when they mean the descendants of 4.1.125 4.1.123
after the word and the augment is added
4 1 125 4.1.125
4.1.125

1128 2710 when this affix is to be applied. 4.1.126 4.1.124
after the words etc. and the substitute
takes the place of the final of these words before
4 1 126 4.1.126
4.1.126

1131 1036 this affix. 1. ...............
4.1.127 4.1.125
after the word and is optionally the
4 1 127 4.1.127
4.1.127
1132 1119 substitute of the final before this affix. 4.1.128 4.1.126
The word takes the affix in forming the
4 1 128 4.1.128
4.1.128

1134 1385 Patronymic. 4.1.129 4.1.127
4 1 129 4.1.129
4.1.129
1135 1323 after the word 4.1.130 4.1.128
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
after the word according to the opinion of
4 1 130 4.1.130
4.1.130
1136 564 Northern Grammarians. 4.1.131 4.1.129
The affix comes optionally in the sense of
descendant after the feminine words denoting
4 1 131 4.1.131
4.1.131
1137 1234 mean objects. 4.1.132 4.1.130
The affix comes in the senes of a descendant
4 1 132 4.1.132
4.1.132
1138 2375 after the word 4.1.133 4.1.131
The final vowel of is elided when the affix
4 1 133 4.1.133
4.1.133
1139 1572 , in the sense of a descendant, is added. 4.1.134 4.1.132
So also after the word the affix is
added and the final is elided when follows in
4 1 134 4.1.134
4.1.134
1140 2767 forming Patronymic. 4.1.135 4.1.133
4 1 135 4.1.135
4.1.135

1141 1394 after the bases denoting quadrupeds. 4.1.136 4.1.134
4 1 136 4.1.136
4.1.136

1143 1304 after the word etc. 4.1.137 4.1.135
The affix comes in the sense of the descendant
4 1 137 4.1.137
4.1.137

1153 2920 after the words and 4.1.138 4.1.136
4 1 138 4.1.138
4.1.138
1161 1224 after the word 4.1.139 4.1.137
after the (Nominal Stem) and a
4 1 139 4.1.139
4.1.139
1162 1121 compound word that ends in 4.1.140 4.1.138
The affixes and come optionally after the
word when it is not preceded by any other word
which gets the designation of --
4 1 140 4.1.140
4.1.140

1163 294 1.4.14. and 4.1.141 4.1.139
The affixes and come optionally after the
4 1 141 4.1.141
4.1.141

1164 2756 word and 4.1.142 4.1.140
4 1 142 4.1.142
4.1.142
1165 1892 descendant after the word 4.1.143 4.1.141
The affix comes in the sense of descendant after
4 1 143 4.1.143
4.1.143

1166 3881 the word 4.1.144 4.1.142
The affix also comes in the sense of
4 1 144 4.1.144
4.1.144
1167 2708 descendant after the word 4.1.145 4.1.143
The affix comes after the word when the
4 1 145 4.1.145
4.1.145
1168 3325 sense is that of 'an enemy'. 4.1.146 4.1.144
4 1 146 4.1.146
4.1.146

1169 2952 after the word etc. 1. 2. 4.1.147
3. 4.1.145
4. 5. 6.
And when contempt is to be expressed, the affix
comes in the sense of descendant after a feminine
4 1 147 4.1.147
4.1.147

1171 1314 word denoting a -descendant. 4.1.148 4.1.146
When contempt is to be expressed, the affix is
diversely added in the senses of a descendant after
4 1 148 4.1.148
4.1.148

1172 3284 a word denoting -s. 4.1.149 4.1.147
When contempt is to be expressed, the affix (as
well as the affix ) comes in the sense of
descendant after a (Nominal Stem)
4 1 149 4.1.149
4.1.149
1173 2576 ending in the affix and denoting a and 4.1.150 4.1.148
The affixes and comes in the sense of
descendant of a person belonging to country
4 1 150 4.1.150
4.1.150

1174 2574 after the word and and 4.1.151 4.1.149
4 1 151 4.1.151
4.1.151

1175 1117 after the words etc. .............. 4.1.152 4.1.150
after (Nominal Stem) ending in after
4 1 152 4.1.152
4.1.152

1176 3785 the word and after words denoting artisans. 4.1.153 4.1.151
According to the opinion of Northern Grammarians,
the affix comes in the sense of descendant after
the words ending in , the word and words
4 1 153 4.1.153
4.1.153
1177 744 expressing artisans. 4.1.154 4.1.152
4 1 154 4.1.154
4.1.154
1178 1722 after the words etc. 4.1.155 4.1.153
4 1 155 4.1.155
4.1.155

4 1 156 4.1.156
4.1.156
1180 89 after a dissyllabic word ending in the affix 4.1.157 4.1.155
According to the opinion of Northern Grammarians
after the words with in the first syllable when it
is not a -name, the affix is used in the
4 1 157 4.1.157
4.1.157

1181 742 sense of a descendant. 4.1.158 4.1.156
The augment ( ) is added to the words
4 1 158 4.1.158
4.1.158

1182 3134 etc. when the Patronymic affix follows. 4.1.159 4.1.157
The augment optionally comes after a stem
ending with the word when the Patronymic affix
4 1 159 4.1.159
4.1.159

1183 2386 follows. 4.1.160 4.1.158
According to the opinion of Eastern Grammarians
after a stem not having vowel in the first
syllable, the affix is diversely used in the sense
4 1 160 4.1.160
4.1.160

1184 2534 of a descendant. 4.1.161 4.1.159
The affixes and come after the word
and the augment is added when these affixes
follow provided that the whole word so formed
4 1 161 4.1.161
4.1.161

1185 2738 denotes a (class name). and 4.1.162 4.1.160
A descendant being a grandson or a still lower
4 1 162 4.1.162
4.1.162

1089 272 offspring is called 4.1.163 4.1.161
But when one in a line of descent beginning with a
father (and reckoning upwards) is alive, the
descendant of a grandson or still lower descendant
4 1 163 4.1.163
4.1.163

1090 1519 is called only. 4.1.164 4.1.162
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
When an elder brother is alive, the younger brother
gets the title of , being the descendant of a
4 1 164 4.1.164
4.1.164

1091 2707 grandson etc. 4.1.165 4.1.163
The living descendant of a grandson etc. is called
optionally a when a more superior other
4 1 165 4.1.165
4.1.165

1092
3129 than a brother is alive. 4.1.166 4.1.164
The is sometimes optionally regarded as
4 1 166 4.1.166
4.1.166

3282 when respectful reference to him is intended. 4.1.167 4.1.165
The is optionally spoken of as when
4 1 167 4.1.167
4.1.167

2881 contemptuous reference to him is intended. 4.1.168 4.1.166
after a word which while denoting a country,
4 1 168 4.1.168
4.1.168

1186 1479 expresses also a tribe of -s. 4.1.169 4.1.167
4 1 169 4.1.169
4.1.169

1187 3726 after the words 1. and 2. 4.1.170 4.1.168
after dissyllabic words and the words 1. 2.
and 3. when they are the names of
4 1 170 4.1.170
4.1.170

1188 1982 countries as well as -s. 4.1.171 4.1.169
after a word having in the first syllable and
after a word ending in short and after the words 1.
and 2. when they are the names of
4 1 171 4.1.171
4.1.171

1189 3291 countries and -s. 4.1.172 4.1.170
The affix comes after the word and a word
beginning with when these words denote a
4 1 172 4.1.172
4.1.172

1190 1116 country being the name of a tribe also. 4.1.173 4.1.171
after a word which denotes any sub-division of the
country and after the words 1. 2.
and 3. , when these are names of
4 1 173 4.1.173
4.1.173

1191 3725 countries and of tribes. 4.1.174 4.1.172
These (viz. the affixes --
4.1.168 etc.) are called 'the king thereof'
4 1 174 4.1.174
4.1.174

1192 1779 affixes. 4.1.175 4.1.173
After the word there is elision by of the
4 1 175 4.1.175
4.1.175

1194 982 affix. 4.1.176 4.1.174
In denoting a feminine name, the is elided
4 1 176 4.1.176
4.1.176

1195 3821 after the words 1. 2. and 3. 4.1.177 4.1.175
In forming the feminine of a word which ends in the
masculine in the affix , the affix is
4 1 177 4.1.177
4.1.177

1196 102 elided. 4.1.178 4.1.176
The affix is not elided in the feminine, if it
forms the names of the -stras of the East or it
4 1 178 4.1.178
4.1.178

1197 2044 comes after the word etc. and etc. 4.2.1 4.1.177
The affix already ordained --
4.1.83, comes after the name of a colour in the
4 2 1 4.2.1
4.2.1

1202 1789 sense of 'coloured thereby'. 4.2.2 4.1.178
The affix comes, in the sense of coloured
thereby after the words 1. 2. 3. 4.
(which being names of colours, are in the
4 2 2 4.2.2
4.2.2
()
1203 2977 Instrumental -3rd case in a sentence). 4.2.3 4.2.1
4.1.83, comes after a word in the Instrumental -3rd
case in construction which is the name of a lunar
mansion, to signify a time connected with the
4 2 3 4.2.3
4.2.3

1204 2086 asterism. 4.2.4 4.2.2
The affix above ordained is elided by when
4 2 4 4.2.4
4.2.4

1205 3015 there is no specification. 4.2.5 4.2.3
The affix above ordained is elided by after the
words 1. and 2. when the whole word
so formed is an appellation and there is
4 2 5 4.2.5
4.2.5

1206 3542 specification of time. 4.2.6 4.2.4
The affix comes after the compound of the
names of lunar mansions, when it is in the
Instrumental -3rd case in construction, to signify
time connected with the asterism whether there be
4 2 6 4.2.6
4.2.6

1207 1936 a specification or not. 4.2.7 4.2.5
The affix -- 4.1.83 comes after a
word in construction in the Instrumental -3rd case,
in the sense of seen - the thing seen by the one
whose name is in the Instrumental -3rd case, being
4 2 7 4.2.7
4.2.7
1208 1905 the 4.2.8 4.2.6
The affix comes in the sense of seen
after the word being in the Instrumental -3rd
4 2 8 4.2.8
4.2.8
1209 1035 case. 4.2.9 4.2.7
The affixes and come in the sense of the
seen after the word , being in the
4 2 9 4.2.9
4.2.9

1210 3143 Instrumental -3rd case in construction. and 4.2.10 4.2.8
The affix comes after a word in the
Instrumental -3rd case in construction in the sense
of 'surrounded' the thing so surrounded being 'a
4 2 10 4.2.10
4.2.10
1211 2319 chariot'. 4.2.11 4.2.9
The affix comes after the word etc.
being in the Instrumental -3rd case in construction
in the sense of 'surrounded' the thing so
4 2 11 4.2.11
4.2.11

1212 2349 surrounded being 'a chariot'. 4.2.12 4.2.10
The affix comes after the words and
being in the Instrumental -3rd case in construction
in the sense of 'surrounded' the thing so
4 2 12 4.2.12
4.2.12

1213 1977 surrounded being 'a chariot'. 4.2.13 4.2.11
The word is irregularly formed by adding the
4 2 13 4.2.13
4.2.13

1214 1173 affix when meaning 'virginity'. Irregular 4.2.14 4.2.12
4.1.83, comes in the sense of 'placed thereon' after
words denoting vessels when such words are in the
4 2 14 4.2.14
4.2.14

1215 1621 Locative -7th case in construction. 4.2.15 4.2.13
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
4.1.83, comes after the word being in the
Locative -7th case in construction in the sense of 'a
sleeper thereon' and the whole word so formed
4 2 15 4.2.15
4.2.15

1216 3828 denotes 'a person performing a vow'. 4.2.16 4.2.14
The affix comes after a word ending in the
Locative -7th case to denote 'what is prepared
therein' -if that which is so prepared be 'granular
4 2 16 4.2.16
4.2.16
1217 3566 food'. 4.2.17 4.2.15
The affix comes in the sense of 'prepared food'
after the words and ending in the Locative
4 2 17 4.2.17
4.2.17

1218 3418 -7th case. 4.2.18 4.2.16
4 2 18 4.2.18
4.2.18
1219 1831 The affix 4.2.19 4.2.17
The affix comes in the sense of 'prepared food',
optionally after the word ending in the
4 2 19 4.2.19
4.2.19

1220 732 Locative -7th case. 4.2.20 4.2.18
The affix comes in the sense of 'prepared food'
4 2 20 4.2.20
4.2.20
1222 1232 after the word ending in the Locative -7th case. 4.2.21 4.2.19
The affix comes after the name of a full-moon-
night to denote the division of time in which the
4 2 21 4.2.21

4.2.21

(
)
1223 3709 night falls. 4.2.22 4.2.20
The affix comes in the sense of Locative -7th
case after the words and ending
in the 1st - Nominative Case-affix in construction
4 2 22 4.2.22

4.2.22

1224 472 and being the name of a full-moon night. 4.2.23 4.2.21
The affix optionally comes after the words 1.
2. and 3. being the names of
full-moon nights, the whole word so formed being a
Name denoting a division of time (a month, a
4 2 23 4.2.23

4.2.23

1225 3215 fortnight or a year) in which the moon is full. 4.2.24 4.2.22
The affix -- 4.1.83, is added to the
name of a deity when something is to be spoken of
4 2 24 4.2.24
4.2.24
1226 3710 as his. 4.2.25 4.2.23
The short is the substitute of the final of
4 2 25 4.2.25
4.2.25

1227 1044 when the affix is added. 4.2.26 4.2.24
The affix comes in the sense of 'that its deity'
4 2 26 4.2.26
4.2.26
1228 3409 after the word 4.2.27 4.2.25
4 2 27 4.2.27
4.2.27

1229 300 in the sense of 'that its deity'. 4.2.28 4.2.26
Also is added to the words 1. and 2.
4 2 28 4.2.28
4.2.28
1230 1437 in the sense of 'that its deity'. 4.2.29 4.2.27
The affixes and and come after the name , and
4 2 29 4.2.29
4.2.29

1231 2760 in the sense of 'this its deity'. 4.2.30 4.2.28
The affix comes after the name in the
4 2 30 4.2.30
4.2.30
1232 3796 sense of 'this its deity'. 4.2.31 4.2.29
The affix comes after the names 1. 2. 3.
4 2 31 4.2.31
4.2.31

1233 3144 and 4. in the sense of 'this its deity'. 4.2.32 4.2.30
The affix also comes in the sense of 'this its deity'
after the names 1. 2. 3. 4.
4 2 32 4.2.32
4.2.32

1235 1924 5. 6. 7. 4.2.33 4.2.31
The affix comes in the sense of 'this its deity'
4 2 33 4.2.33
4.2.33
1236 26 after the name 4.2.34 4.2.32
After the words expressive of time, the affixes
denoting 'who stays there' -- 4.3.11 to
4 2 34 4.2.34
4.2.34
1237 1070 4.3.53, come also in the sense of 'this its deity'. 4.2.35 4.2.33
The affix comes in the sense of 'this its deity'
4 2 35 4.2.35
4.2.35

The words 1. 'a father's brother' 2. 'a
mother's brother' 3. 'a mother's father' 4.
4 2 36 4.2.36
4.2.36

1242 2374 'a father's father' are irregularly formed. Irregular 4.2.37 4.2.35
An affix is added to a word when the sense is 'a
4 2 37 4.2.37
4.2.37

1243 1705 collection thereof'. 4.2.38 4.2.36
The affix comes the sense is 'a collection
4 2 38 4.2.38
4.2.38

1244 2668 thereof' after the words etc. 4.2.39 4.2.37
The affix comes the sense is 'a collection
thereof' after a word denoting a (Patronymic)
and after 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
4 2 39 4.2.39
4.2.39

1246 1321 7. 8. and 9. 4.2.40 4.2.38
The affixes and come after the word in
4 2 40 4.2.40
4.2.40
1248 1163 the sense of 'collection thereof'. and 4.2.41 4.2.39
The affix comes in the sense of 'collection
thereof' after the word and also after the word
4 2 41 4.2.41
4.2.41
1249 1565 4.2.42 4.2.40
The affix is added in the sense of 'collection
thereof' after the words 1. 2. and
4 2 42 4.2.42
4.2.42

1250 2633 4.2.43 4.2.41
thereof' after the words 1. 2. 3. and 4.
4 2 43 4.2.43
4.2.43

1251 1344 4.2.44 4.2.42
thereof' after the words having on the first
4 2 44 4.2.44
4.2.44
1253 199 syllable. 4.2.45 4.2.43
4 2 45 4.2.45
4.2.45

1254 1248 thereof' after the words etc. .
4.2.46 4.2.44
After the name of a Vedic School, the affixes which
denote the rule of that school, also come in the
4 2 46 4.2.46
4.2.46

1255 1397 sense of 'collection thereof'. 4.2.47 4.2.45
thereof' after the names of things without
4 2 47 4.2.47
4.2.47

1256 52 consciousness and after 1. and 2. 4.2.48 4.2.46
The affixes and come optionally in the sense
of 'collection thereof' after the words 1. and 2.
4 2 48 4.2.48
4.2.48

1257 1166 , respectively. and 4.2.49 4.2.47
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
4 2 49 4.2.49
4.2.49
1258 2370 thereof' after the words etc.
4.2.50 4.2.48
4 2 50 4.2.50
4.2.50
1259 1252 thereof' after the words 1. 2 and 3. 4.2.51 4.2.49
The affixes , and come in the sense
of 'collection thereof', respectively after the words 1. , and
4 2 51 4.2.51
4.2.51
1260 656 2 and 3. 4.2.52 4.2.50
The affix -- 4.1.83, comes after a
word in the Genitive -6th-Case in construction in
the sense of 'any body'stras sphere', if a country is
4 2 52 4.2.52
4.2.52
1261 3268 indicated by such sphere. 4.2.53 4.2.51
4 2 53 4.2.53
4.2.53

1262 2918 the same sense. ..
4.2.54 4.2.52
The affixes and come respectively
and
after the words and etc. in the
4 2 54 4.2.54
4.2.54

1263 2702 sense of 'sphere of country'. ..
4.2.55 4.2.53
The affix is added to the names of Meters,
4 2 55 4.2.55
4.2.55

1264 3792 indicates a beginning therewith. 4.2.56 4.2.54
The affix -- 4.1.83 when it is
added to a word which denotes either the object of
a battle or the warrior of a battle fought for that
4 2 56 4.2.56
4.2.56

1265 3523 object or by that warrior as a leader. ..
4.2.57 4.2.55
The affix to the name of a weapon indicates a
4 2 57 4.2.57
4.2.57

1266 1641 game played with that weapon. 4.2.58 4.2.56
The affix added to a noun of action ending in the
4 2 58 4.2.58
4.2.58

1267 1356 affix denotes an action occurring in that. 4.2.59 4.2.57
The affix -- 4.1.83 comes after a
word denoting 'some subject of study' in the sense
4 2 59 4.2.59
4.2.59

1269 1625 of 'who has studied that or who understands that'. 4.2.60 4.2.58
The affix comes in the sense of 'one who
studies or one who understands' after the name of
a sacrifice after etc. and after a stem ending
4 2 60 4.2.60
4.2.60

1270 1199 with the word ..
4.2.61 4.2.59
The affix comes in the sense of 'who studies or
4 2 61 4.2.61
4.2.61
1271 1204 who knows' after the words etc. ..
4.2.62 4.2.60
4 2 62 4.2.62
4.2.62

1272 217 who knows' after the word 4.2.63 4.2.61
4 2 63 4.2.63
4.2.63

1273 3089 who knows' after the words etc. ..
4.2.64 4.2.62
After the title of a work which is named after the
Announcer thereof the affixes denoting 'who
4 2 64 4.2.64
4.2.64

1274 2562 studies or who knows that' are elided by 4.2.65 4.2.63
The affix denoting denoting 'who studies or who
knows that' is elided by after the title of a stra
4 2 65 4.2.65
4.2.65

1277 3775 work having as penultimate. 4.2.66 4.2.64
The affixes denoting the Announcer when added to
(Vedas) and the -stras express this
4 2 66 4.2.66
4.2.66

1278 1470 relation only. 4.2.67 4.2.65
(An affix is placed after a word expressive of
anything) in the sense of '- that thing is in this' - the
4 2 67 4.2.67
4.2.67

1279 1633 place takeing a name therefrom. - 4.2.68 4.2.66
After a word in the Instrumental -3rd case in
construction an affix is added in the sense of
'completed by him' when the whole word so formed
4 2 68 4.2.68
4.2.68
1280 1784 is the name of a country. - 4.2.69 4.2.67
After a word in the Genitive -6th-Case in
construction an affix is added in the sense of 'his
dwelling-place' the whole word expressing the
4 2 69 4.2.69
4.2.69
1281 1696 name of a country. - 4.2.70 4.2.68
And lastly a place is named after whatever is found
4 2 70 4.2.70
4.2.70

1282 133 near it. - 4.2.71 4.2.69
The affix comes after a stem ending in a or
4 2 71 4.2.71
4.2.71
1283 940 (in the four-fold senses given above). - 4.2.72 4.2.70
The affix comes in the quadruple sense after a
word which ends in the affix and whose stem
4 2 72 4.2.72
4.2.72

1284 2717 is polysyllabic. - 4.2.73 4.2.71
The affix comes in the quadruple sense after a
polysyllabic (Nominal Stem) when 'a well'
4 2 73 4.2.73
4.2.73
1285 2612 is to be designated. - 4.2.74 4.2.72
The affix comes in the quadruple sense after
any polysyllabic (Nominal Stem) in
denoting 'a well' situated on the Northern bank of
4 2 74 4.2.74
4.2.74
1286 726 the river - 4.2.75 4.2.73
4 2 75 4.2.75
4.2.75

1287 3505 the above 4-fold sense. -
4.2.76 4.2.74
So also when the palce is situated in the lands of
the or or of the Eatern People and the
4 2 76 4.2.76
4.2.76

1288 3826 word in these cases is always feminine. - 4.2.77 4.2.75
4 2 77 4.2.77
4.2.77

1289 3769 the 4-fold sense. -
4.2.78 4.2.76
4 2 78 4.2.78
4.2.78
1290 2959 The affix comes after in the 4-fold sense. - 4.2.79 4.2.77
The affix comes in the 4-fold sense after a
4 2 79 4.2.79
4.2.79

1291 1168 stem having for its penultimate. -
4.2.80 4.2.78
In the above 4-senses are added the following 17-
affixes after the following 17 classes of words
respectively -
4 2 80 4.2.80
4.2.80

1292 3275

. -
4.2.81 4.2.79
The name of a kingdom is formed by the elision
of these affixes (when the name of the people
without the change of number and gender, is at the
4 2 81 4.2.81
4.2.81
1293 1481 same time the name of the kingdom). - 4.2.82 4.2.80
Also after the owrd etc. the affix denoting
locality becomes elided but the number and gender
4 2 82 4.2.82
4.2.82

1301 3066 ar not changed. - ..
4.2.83 4.2.81
Optionally after the word the 4-fold significant
4 2 83 4.2.83
4.2.83
1302 3373 affix is elided by - 4.2.84 4.2.82
4 2 84 4.2.84
4.2.84
1303 1563 the 4-fold sense. - 4.2.85 4.2.83
4 2 85 4.2.85
4.2.85

1304 2105 The affix is added denoting a river. 4.2.86 4.2.84
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix is added to the words etc. in the
4 2 86 4.2.86
4.2.86
1305 2732 four senses given above.
4.2.87 4.2.85
and 3. in the above four senses and the final
4 2 87 4.2.87
4.2.87

1306 1113 of these words is elided before this affix. 4.2.88 4.2.86
The affix comes after 1. and 2. in the
four senses given above, the final of the words
4 2 88 4.2.88
4.2.88

1307 2098 being elided. 4.2.89 4.2.87
4 2 89 4.2.89
4.2.89

1308 3394 above four senses. 4.2.90 4.2.88
The affix comes after the words etc. in the
4 2 90 4.2.90
4.2.90

1309 712 four senses. ..
4.2.91 4.2.89
The augment comes aftere the words etc.
4 2 91 4.2.91
4.2.91

1310 2100 when the affix follows in the above four senses. - ..
4.2.92 4.2.90
The affixes taught hereafter have senses other than
4 2 92 4.2.92

4.2.92
1312 3430 those mentioned above. 4.2.93 4.2.91
The affixes and are respectively added after
4 2 93 4.2.93

4.2.93

1313 2935 the words 1. and 2. and 4.2.94 4.2.92
The affixes and () come after the word
4 2 94 4.2.94

4.2.94
1314 1346 and 4.2.95 4.2.93
The affix () comes after the words
4 2 95 4.2.95

4.2.95

1315 969 etc. .
4.2.96 4.2.94
The affix is added to the words 1. 2.
and 3. when the whole words so formed mean
4 2 96 4.2.96

4.2.96

1316 1118 respectively 'a dog', 'a sword' and 'an ornament'. 4.2.97 4.2.95
4 2 97 4.2.97

4.2.97

1317 2107 remaining senses i.e. 4.3.25 etc.
4.2.98 4.2.96
The words 1. 2. and 3. the affix
4 2 98 4.2.98

4.2.98

1318 1823 ( ) is added in the remaining senses. 4.2.99 4.2.97
After the word , the affix is added in the
remaining senses (the feminine being formed by
4 2 99 4.2.99

4.2.99
1319 1049 -- 4.1.41). 4.2.100 4.2.98
After the word the affixes and are
added in the remaining senses when the meaning
4 2 100 4.2.100

4.2.100

1320 2899 is a non-human being. 4.2.101 4.2.99
After the words 1. 2. 3. 4. and 5.
, the affix is added in the remaining
4 2 101 4.2.101

4.2.101

1321 1928 senses. 4.2.102 4.2.100
After the word the affix is is added in the
4 2 102 4.2.102

4.2.102
1322 974 remaining senses. 4.2.103 4.2.101
To the same stem is added the affix when it
treats about something which is to be found in the
land of (name of a river and also the country
4 2 103 4.2.103

4.2.103
1323 3076 near it). 4.2.104 4.2.102
The affix comes after an indeclinable in the
4 2 104 4.2.104

4.2.104
The affix is added optionally after the words 1.
4 2 105 4.2.105

4.2.105

1326 927 2. and 3. , in the remaining senses. 4.2.106 4.2.104
The affix comes after a word ending with
and the comes after a word ending with , in
4 2 106 4.2.106

4.2.106

1327 1742 the remaining senses. 4.2.107 4.2.105
The affix comes in the remaining senses after a
word preceded by another that signifies 'direction'
4 2 107 4.2.107

4.2.107

1328 1855 provided the compound is not a name. 4.2.108 4.2.106
The affix is added to the word , preceded by
a word denoting 'direction', in the remaining
4 2 108 4.2.108

4.2.108
1329 2725 senses. 4.2.109 4.2.107
word consisting of more than two syllables having
accent on the final, being the name of a
4 2 109 4.2.109

4.2.109

1330 745 village of the people of the North. 4.2.110 4.2.108
word ending with after the words etc. and
after a word having a penultimate , whether
4 2 110 4.2.110

4.2.110

1331 2515 these words express villages of North folk or not.
4.2.111 4.2.109
The affix comes after the Patronymics formed
4 2 111 4.2.111

4.2.111

1332 966 from etc. 4.2.112 4.2.110
After a family-name formed by the affix is
4 2 112 4.2.112

4.2.112
1333 616 added in the remaining senses. 4.2.113 4.2.111
The affix is however not added to a word which
though ending in the Patronymic affix consists
of two syllables when it is the family name of
4 2 113 4.2.113

4.2.113

1334 2033 Eastern People or of 4.2.114 4.2.112
After the word , the affix is added in the
4 2 114 4.2.114

4.2.114
The affixes and come after word ,
4 2 115 4.2.115

4.2.115
1339 2649 in the remaining senses. and 4.2.116 4.2.114
The affixes and come in the remaining
4 2 116 4.2.116

4.2.116

1340 1073 senses after the words etc. and
4.2.117 4.2.115
senses after the words denoting the villages of
4 2 117 4.2.117

4.2.117

1341 3150 and 4.2.118 4.2.116
The affixes and come optionally in the
remaining senses after the words denoting
4 2 118 4.2.118

4.2.118

1342 3257 villages situated in and 4.2.119 4.2.117
The affixes comes in the remaining senses after
a (Nominal Stem) denoting a locality and
4 2 119 4.2.119

4.2.119

1343 944 ending in 4.2.120 4.2.118
The affixes comes in the remaining senses after
a word ending in and denoting a locality of
4 2 120 4.2.120

4.2.120
1344 3285 East-folks. 4.2.121 4.2.119
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
word denoting a locality which has the letter
as its penultimate and after a place name
4 2 121 4.2.121

4.2.121

1345 1990 denoting a waste or desert place. 4.2.122 4.2.120
word denoting a locality and ending with 1.
4 2 122 4.2.122

4.2.122

1346 2513 2. or 4.2.123 4.2.121
word denoting a locality of the East-folk, the
4 2 123 4.2.123

4.2.123
1347 2960 word having penultimate or ending in 4.2.124 4.2.122
word denoting an inhabited kingdom or a limit
4 2 124 4.2.124

4.2.124

1348 1478 of such kingdom 4.2.125 4.2.123
The affix comes in the remaining senses, even
after a word which is not a which is always
plural, when it denotes an inhabited country or a
limit of such country, as well as after such
4 2 125 4.2.125

4.2.125

1349 390 words. 4.2.126 4.2.124
word whether a or not, denoting a locality and
having its second term the words 1. 2. 3.
4 2 126 4.2.126

4.2.126

1350 1176 and 4. 4.2.127 4.2.125
The affix comes in the remaining senses after
4 2 127 4.2.127

4.2.127
1351 2007 the words etc. denoting country.
4.2.128 4.2.126
remaining senses, when censure or praise is
4 2 128 4.2.128

4.2.128

1352 2089 implied. 4.2.129 4.2.127
4 2 129 4.2.129

4.2.129

1353 343 the word , in the sense of 'a man'. 4.2.130 4.2.128
The affix comes optionally in the remaining
4 2 130 4.2.130

4.2.130

1354 3187 senses after the words 1. and 2. 4.2.131 4.2.129
4 2 131 4.2.131

4.2.131
1355 2723 the words 1. and 2. 4.2.132 4.2.130
word denoting a place and having the letter as its
4 2 132 4.2.132

4.2.132
1356 1170 penultimate. 4.2.133 4.2.131
4 2 133 4.2.133

4.2.133
1357 958 the words etc. denoting places.
4.2.134 4.2.132
senses of born etc. when the meaning is 'a man' or
4 2 134 4.2.134

4.2.134

1358 2736 'what exists in a man'. 4.2.135 4.2.133
senses of being born etc. when denoting 'a man 'or
'what exists in a man', provided that it does not
4 2 135 4.2.135

4.2.135

1359 274 mean a foot-soldier. 4.2.136 4.2.134
The affix comes in the remaining senses of
being born etc. after the words etc. when the
4 2 136 4.2.136

4.2.136
1360 1327 word signifies 'a cow' or 'a barley gruel'. 4.2.137 4.2.135
(Nominal Stem) denoting a place and
4 2 137 4.2.137

4.2.137
1361 1278 having the word as its second term. 4.2.138 4.2.136
The affix comes in the remaining senses after the
4 2 138 4.2.138

4.2.138
1362 1284 words etc.
4.2.139 4.2.137
words beginning with denoting the places of the
4 2 139 4.2.139

4.2.139
1363 2529 East-folk. 4.2.140 4.2.138
The letter is the substitute of the final of the word
4 2 140 4.2.140

4.2.140
1364 2925 , when is added. 4.2.141 4.2.139
word denoting a place and ending with or
4 2 141 4.2.141

4.2.141

1365 3286 or having as its penultimate. 4.2.142 4.2.140
words, having the words 1. 2. 3.
4 2 142 4.2.142

4.2.142

1366 973 4. and 5. , as second terms. 4.2.143 4.2.141
4 2 143 4.2.143

4.2.143

The affix optionally comes in the remaining
senses after the word when it does not denote
4 2 144 4.2.144

4.2.144

1368 3246 'a man'. 4.2.145 4.2.143
4 2 145 4.2.145

4.2.145

1369 1133 and when denoting the country 4.3.1 4.2.144
The affix also comes optionally in the remaining
4 3 1 4.3.1

4.3.1

1370 2876 senses after the words 1. and 2. 4.3.2 4.2.145
When the affix is added and when is added
then 1. and 2. are the substitutes of
4 3 2 4.3.2

4.3.2

1371 1688 and 4.3.3 4.3.1
In expressing one individual, and are the
substitutes of and respectively when
4 3 3 4.3.3

4.3.3

1372 1675 and follow. and 4.3.4 4.3.2
4 3 4 4.3.4

4.3.4

the word when preceded by 1. 2. 3.
4 3 5 4.3.5

4.3.5

1375 2307 and 4. 4.3.6 4.3.4
And the affix also (as well as ) comes in the
remaining senses after the word when the
4 3 6 4.3.6

4.3.6

1376 1854 prior term denotes a direction. and 4.3.7 4.3.5
senses after the word preceded by a word
denoting direction when a particular portion of a
4 3 7 4.3.7

4.3.7

1377 1343 village or an inhabited country. and 4.3.8 4.3.6
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
After the word there is the affix in the
4 3 8 4.3.8

4.3.8
4 3 9 4.3.9

4.3.9
1379 4 word , the meaning being 'fit' or 'proper'. 4.3.10 4.3.8
4 3 10 4.3.10

4.3.10

1380 1975 the word , which is near the sea. 4.3.11 4.3.9
4 3 11 4.3.11

4.3.11

1381 1065 the words denoting time. 4.3.12 4.3.10
4 3 12 4.3.12

4.3.12
1382 3451 the word when expressing 4.3.13 4.3.11
The affix comes optionally comes in the
remaining senses after the word when
4 3 13 4.3.13

4.3.13

1383 3219 expressing illness or heat. 4.3.14 4.3.12
remaining senses after the words 1. and 2.
4 3 14 4.3.14

4.3.14

1384 2203 4.3.15 4.3.13
remaining senses after the word and it takes
4 3 15 4.3.15

4.3.15
1385 3466 the augment 4.3.16 4.3.14
the words etc. and the words expressing
4 3 16 4.3.16

4.3.16

1387 3555 'season' and 'asterism'. 4.3.17 4.3.15
4 3 17 4.3.17

4.3.17
1388 2548 the word 4.3.18 4.3.16
4 3 18 4.3.18

4.3.18
1389 3081 the word 4.3.19 4.3.17
In the (Vedas), the word takes the affix
4 3 19 4.3.19

4.3.19
3450 1446 , in the remaining senses. -
4.3.20 4.3.18
In the (Vedas), the affix comes in the
4 3 20 4.3.20

4.3.20

3451 3088 remaining senses after the word -
4.3.21 4.3.19
4 3 21 4.3.21

4.3.21

3452 3959 remaining senses after the word -
4.3.22 4.3.20
The affix comes always after the word
4 3 22 4.3.22

4.3.22

1390 3679 and (before this affix) the letter of is elided. -
4.3.23 4.3.21
After the words 1. 'at eve' 2. 'for a long
time' 3. 'in the forenoon' 4. 'at dawn' and
after indeclinables expressing time, there are the
4 3 23 4.3.23

4.3.23

1391 3721 affixes and and their augment is and 4.3.24 4.3.22
Optionally after the words 1. and 2.
there are the affixes and and their augment
4 3 24 4.3.24

4.3.24

1392 3213 is and 4.3.25 4.3.23
The affixes ordained above or hereafter come after
a word in the Locative -7th case in construction in
the sense of 'born or grown or originated there or
4 3 25 4.3.25

4.3.25
1393 1614 then'. and 4.3.26 4.3.24
After the word being in the Locative -7th case-
affix, there is the affix in the sense of 'produced
4 3 26 4.3.26

4.3.26
1394 2549 therein'. 4.3.27 4.3.25
Locative -7th case-affix in the sense of 'born
4 3 27 4.3.27

4.3.27

1395 3541 therein', the whole word being a name. 4.3.28 4.3.26
The affix comes in the sense of 'born therein'
after the words 1. 2. 3. 4.
4 3 28 4.3.28

4.3.28

1401 2430 5. and 6. , the whole being a name. 4.3.29 4.3.27
The affix comes after the word , in the sense
of 'produced therein' and thereby in the room of
4 3 29 4.3.29

4.3.29

1402 2275 , the substitute is 4.3.30 4.3.28
4 3 30 4.3.30

4.3.30

1403 328 in the sense of 'born therein'. 4.3.31 4.3.29
The affix is also added to the word in
4 3 31 4.3.31

4.3.31
1404 2 the sense of 'born therein'. 4.3.32 4.3.30
After the words 1. and 2. there is the
4 3 32 4.3.32

4.3.32

1405 3739 affix in the sense of 'born therein'. 4.3.33 4.3.31
And the affixes and come respectively after
4 3 33 4.3.33

4.3.33

1406 82 the words 1. and 2. and 4.3.34 4.3.32
The affix denoting 'born therein' is elided by
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
4 3 34 4.3.34

4.3.34

1407 3448 and 10. , all denoting asterisms. 4.3.35 4.3.33
There is elision of the affix denoting 'born
therin' after a word ending in and after the
4 3 35 4.3.35

4.3.35

1410 3832 words 1. and 2. 4.3.36 4.3.34
There is optionally elision of the affix denoting
'born therin' after the words 1. 2.
4 3 36 4.3.36

4.3.36

1411 3050 3. and 4. 4.3.37 4.3.35
There is diversely elision of the affix denoting
4 3 37 4.3.37

4.3.37

1412 2087 'born therein' after an asterism. 4.3.38 4.3.36
An affix (one of those already taught) comes after a
word in the Locative -7th case, in the sense of
'done there', 'obtained there', 'bought there' and
4 3 38 4.3.38
,
4.3.38

1413 1140 'dexterous therein'. -7 4.3.39 4.3.37
After a word being in construction in the Locative -7
th case, an affix (one of those ordained already)
4 3 39 4.3.39
,
4.3.39
1414 2546 comes in the sense of 'generally found therein'. -7 4.3.40 4.3.38
The affix comes in the sense of 'mostly to be
found there' after the words 1. 2.
4 3 40 4.3.40
,
4.3.40

1415 755 and 3. , being in the Locative -7th case. -7 4.3.41 4.3.39
After a (Nominal Stem) or a word ending
in the feminine affix and , being in the
Locative -7th case in construction, an affix comes in
4 3 41 4.3.41

4.3.41
1416 3557 the sense of 'adapted therein'. -7 4.3.42 4.3.40
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
4 3 42 4.3.42

4.3.42
1417 1171 sense of 'adapted to that'. 4.3.43 4.3.41
An affix comes after a word denoting time being in
the Locative -7th case in construction, in the sense
4 3 43 4.3.43

4.3.43

1418 1067 of 'being good', 'flowering' or 'ripening therein. - 7 4.3.44 4.3.42
An affix comes after a word denoting 'time' being in
the Locative -7th case in construction meaning
4 3 44 4.3.44

4.3.44
1419 809 'sown therein'. -7 4.3.45 4.3.43
The affix comes in the sense of 'sown' after the
4 3 45 4.3.45

4.3.45

1420 585 word 4.3.46 4.3.44
The affix comes optionally after the words 1.
4 3 46 4.3.46

4.3.46

1421 1350 and 2. in the sense of 'sown'. 4.3.47 4.3.45
After a (Nominal Stem) being in the
Locative -7th case in construction denoting time, an
affix comes in the sense of 'being then due';
4 3 47 4.3.47

4.3.47
1422 1906 provided that the thing due be 'debt'. -7 4.3.48 4.3.46
The affix comes in the sense of 'debt then due'
after the words 1. 2. and 3. ,
4 3 48 4.3.48

4.3.48

1423 1034 denoting time and being in the Locative -7th case. -7 4.3.49 4.3.47
The affix comes in the sense of 'debt due' after
4 3 49 4.3.49

4.3.49

1424 1351 the words 1. and 2. 4.3.50 4.3.48
The affix also (as well as ) comes after the
words 1. 2. in the sense of 'debt
4 3 50 4.3.50

4.3.50

1425 3563 due'. 4.3.51 4.3.49
An affix comes after a word in the Locative -7th
case in construction denoting time, in the sense of
'who then wanders' and the word so formed refers
4 3 51 4.3.51

4.3.51

1426 3331 to a wild beast. -7 4.3.52 4.3.50
An affix comes after a word in the Nominative 1st-
Case in construction denoting time in the sense of
4 3 52 4.3.52

4.3.52
1427 1640 'this is his habit or endurance'. -1 4.3.53 4.3.51
An affix comes after a word in the Locative -7th
case in construction in the sense of 'who stays
4 3 53 4.3.53

4.3.53
1428 1618 there'. -7 4.3.54 4.3.52
The affix comes in the sense of 'who stays
4 3 54 4.3.54

4.3.54
1429 1860 there' after the (Nominal Stems) etc. ..
4.3.55 4.3.53
The affix comes in the sense of 'what stays
4 3 55 4.3.55

4.3.55
1430 3369 there' after a word denoting a part of the body. 4.3.56 4.3.54
there' after the words 1. 2. 3. 4.
4 3 56 4.3.56

4.3.56

1433 1902 5. and 6. 4.3.57 4.3.55
The affix also (as well as ) comes after the
4 3 57 4.3.57

4.3.57
1434 1349 word in the sense of 'what stays there'. 4.3.58 4.3.56
The affix comes in the sense of 'who stays
4 3 58 4.3.58

4.3.58
1435 1276 there' after the word 4.3.59 4.3.57

After an the affix is used in the
4 3 59 4.3.59

4.3.59

1436 407 sense of 'who stays there'. - 4.3.60 4.3.58
After an having the word as

prior term, the affix is used in the sense of 'who
4 3 60 4.3.60

4.3.60

1437 239 stays there'. - 4.3.61 4.3.59
After the word preceded by or (the

whole being ) there is the affix
4 3 61 4.3.61

4.3.61

1440 1345 in the sense of 'who stays there'. 4.3.62 4.3.60
After the words 1. and 2. there is
4 3 62 4.3.62

4.3.62

1441 1517 the affix in the sense of 'who stays there'. 4.3.63 4.3.61
After a word ending with the affix is used in
4 3 63 4.3.63

4.3.63
1442 3067 the sense of 'who ocurs there'. 4.3.64 4.3.62
After a word ending with but not meaning a
'letter or word' the affixes and are optionally
4 3 64 4.3.64

4.3.64

1443 413 used in the sense of 'who stays there'. and 4.3.65 4.3.63
The affix comes in the sense of 'what occurs
there' after and , the word denoting 'an
4 3 65 4.3.65

4.3.65
1444 989 ornament'. 4.3.66 4.3.64
After the name of a subject of commentary an affix
comes in the sense of 'its commentary', as well as
4 3 66 4.3.66

4.3.66

1445 1704 in the sense of 'what occurs there'. - 4.3.67 4.3.65
The affix comes in the sense of 'staying' and 'a
commentary' after a polysyllabic word having
on the final (the word being the name of a thing to
4 3 67 4.3.67

4.3.67

1446 2614 be explained). 4.3.68 4.3.66
The affix comes in the sense of 'occurring' and
'a commentary' after the name of a work to be
explained provided that such work relates to a
4 3 68 4.3.68

4.3.68

1447 1198 or a 4.3.69 4.3.67
The affix comes after the name of an
explainable work called after a in the senses of
'occurring therein' or 'commentary thereon' when it
4 3 69 4.3.69

4.3.69

1448 163 referes to an only. 4.3.70 4.3.68
The affix comes in the sense of 'occurring
therein' and 'commentary thereon' after the words
4 3 70 4.3.70

4.3.70

1449 2442 1. and 2. 4.3.71 4.3.69
The affixes and comes in the sense of
'occurring therein' or 'commentary thereon'after the
4 3 71 4.3.71

4.3.71
1450 1459 word and 4.3.72 4.3.70
The affix comes in the sense of 'occurring
therein' or 'commentary thereon'after a word of two
syllables and a word ending in short and the
words 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
and 7. being the names of
4 3 72 4.3.72

4.3.72

1451 1981 explainable works. 4.3.73 4.3.71
The affix comes in the senses of 'occurring
therein' and 'commentary thereon' after the words
4 3 73 4.3.73

4.3.73

1452 88 etc. ..
4.3.74 4.3.72
The affix -- 4.1.83 etc. comes in the
4 3 74 4.3.74

4.3.74
1453 1599 sense of 'what has come thence'. 4.3.75 4.3.73
After a word denoting sources of revenue there is
4 3 75 4.3.75

4.3.75

1454 1564 the affix in the sense of 'come thence'. 4.3.76 4.3.74
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix comes in the sense of 'thence come'
4 3 76 4.3.76

4.3.76

1455 3410 after the words etc. 1. 2.4.3.77
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8
4.3.75
The affix comes in the sense of 'thence come'
after a word denoting a person connected through
4 3 77 4.3.77

4.3.77

1456 3167 the relationship or family origin. 4.3.78 4.3.76
The affix comes in the sense of 'come thence'
after a word ending in short and denoting a
4 3 78 4.3.78

4.3.78
1457 856 person related through learning or blood. 4.3.79 4.3.77
The affix and comes in the sense of 'come
4 3 79 4.3.79

4.3.79

1458 2373 thence' after the word and 4.3.80 4.3.78
After a word ending with a Patronymic affix the rule
of affix in the sense of 'thence come' is like that
4 3 80 4.3.80

4.3.80

1459 1315 relating to the affix denoting its mark. 4.3.81 4.3.79
The affix denotes that which from something
has originated when it is added to a word denoting
4 3 81 4.3.81

4.3.81

1461 3955 'cause' or to the name of a man viewed as a cause. 4.3.82 4.3.80
After a word denoting a cause or a man viewed as
a cause, there is the affix in the sense of
4 3 82 4.3.82

4.3.82
1462 2749 'come thence'. 4.3.83 4.3.81
After a (Nominal Stem) which is the
Ablative -5th case in construction, an affix (one of
those already taught) comes in the sense of 'what
4 3 83 4.3.83

4.3.83
1463 2491 appears for the first time'. -5 4.3.84 4.3.82
The affix comes in the sense of 'what manifests
4 3 84 4.3.84

4.3.84

1464 3164 itself there' after the word 4.3.85 4.3.83
An affix -- 4.1.83 etc. comes after a
word in the Accusative -2nd case in construction in
the sense of 'what goes thereto', provided that,
4 3 85 4.3.85

4.3.85

1465 1646 which goes, is a road or a messenger. -2 4.3.86 4.3.84
word in the Accusative -2nd case in construction in
4 3 86 4.3.86

4.3.86

1466 309 the sense of 'a door which looks towards that'. -2 4.3.87 4.3.85
An affix comes after a word in the Accusative -2nd
case in construction in the sense of 'made in
relation to any subject' when the thing made is a
4 3 87 4.3.87

4.3.87

1467 149 'book'. -2 4.3.88 4.3.86
The affix comes in the sense of 'a book made
relating to a subject' after the following words in the
Accusative -2nd case in construction viz. 1.
2. , the and the words
4 3 88 4.3.88

4.3.88

1468 3402 etc. 4.3.89 4.3.87
After a word in the Nominative 1st-Case in
construction, an affix comes in the sense of 'this is
4 3 89 4.3.89

4.3.89

1469 3790 his dwelling place'. -1 4.3.90 4.3.88
After a word in the Nominative 1st-Case in
construction, an affix comes in the sense of 'this is
4 3 90 4.3.90

4.3.90

1470 305 his mother-land'. -1 4.3.91 4.3.89
The affix comes after a word denoting 'mountain'
in the sense of 'this is his mother-land', when it is a
4 3 91 4.3.91

4.3.91

1471 561 person who lives by arms. 4.3.92 4.3.90
The affix comes in the sense of 'this is his
4 3 92 4.3.92

4.3.92

1472 3350 native-land' after the words etc. 1. 2.4.3.93
3. 4. 5. () 6. 7.
4.3.91
The affixes and come respectively after the
words etc. and etc. in the sense of
4 3 93 4.3.93

4.3.93

1473 3738 'this is his native land'. and ..............................
4.3.94 4.3.92
After the words 1. 2. 3. and 4.
come respectively the affixes 1. 2. 3.
, ,
and 4. in the sense of 'this is his native
4 3 94 4.3.94

4.3.94

1474 1762 land'. and 4.3.95 4.3.93
An affix -- 4.1.83, comes after a word
in the Nominative 1st-Case in construction in the
4 3 95 4.3.95

4.3.95
1475 2642 sense of 'this is his object of veneration or love'. -1 4.3.96 4.3.94
After a word denoting a thing not having
consciousness, but not being the name of a country
or time, the affix is used in the sense of 'this is
4 3 96 4.3.96

4.3.96

1476 53 his object of devotion or love'. 4.3.97 4.3.95
4 3 97 4.3.97

4.3.97

1477 2759 object of veneration' after the word 4.3.98 4.3.96
object of veneration' after the words 1. and
4 3 98 4.3.98

4.3.98

1478 3146 4.3.99 4.3.97
The affix comes diversely in the sense of 'this is
his object of veneration' after a word denoting
4 3 99 4.3.99

4.3.99

1479 1311 (Patronymic) or a 4.3.100 4.3.98
Of words denoting Princes (literally - who are Lords
of ) the base and affix meaning 'this is his
object of veneration' are the same, in every
respect, like those of a word denoting kingdom,
provided that, the Prince-denoting words have, in
the plural, the same form as the Kingdom-denoting
4 3 100 4.3.100

4.3.100

1480 1480 words. 4.3.101 4.3.99
construction, an affix -- 4.1.83 etc.,
4 3 101 4.3.101

4.3.101
1481 1787 comes in the sense of 'enounced by him'. -3 4.3.102 4.3.100
The affix comes in the sense of 'enounced by
him' after the words 1. 2. 3.
4 3 102 4.3.102

4.3.102

1482 1730 and 4. 4.3.103 4.3.101
him' after the words 1. and 2.
4 3 103 4.3.103

4.3.103

1483 1072 denoting -s (Vedic Seers). 4.3.104 4.3.102
After the words denoting the pupils of and
, the affix is used in the sense of
4 3 104 4.3.104

4.3.104

1484 1033 'enounced by him'. 4.3.105 4.3.103
him' after a word in the Instrumental -3rd case in
construction when it denotes a or a -
4 3 105 4.3.105

4.3.105

1485 2391 work enounced by ancient sages. 4.3.106 4.3.104
him' after the words etc. in denoting
4 3 106 4.3.106

4.3.106
1486 3440 (Vedas).
4.3.107 4.3.105
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix denoting 'enounced by him' is elided by
4 3 107 4.3.107

4.3.107

1487 959 -substitution after the words and 4.3.108 4.3.106
4 3 108 4.3.108

4.3.108
1488 1032 him' after the word 4.3.109 4.3.107
4 3 109 4.3.109

4.3.109

1489 1438 him' after the word 4.3.110 4.3.108
him' after the words 1. and 2. , the
works enounced being -stra and -stra
4 3 110 4.3.110

4.3.110

1490 2367 respectively. 4.3.111 4.3.109
him' the thing enounced being -stra and -
4 3 111 4.3.111

4.3.111

1491 1023 stra after the words 1. 2. 4.3.112 4.3.110
word in the Instrumental -3rd case in construction in
4 3 112 4.3.112

4.3.112

1492 1792 the sense of 'in the same direction with that'. -3 4.3.113 4.3.111
The affix comes in the sense of 'in the same
4 3 113 4.3.113

4.3.113

1493 1680 direction with that'. 4.3.114 4.3.112
The affixes and come in the sense of 'in the
4 3 114 4.3.114

4.3.114
1494 820 same direction with that' after the word and 4.3.115 4.3.113
construction an affix is used in the sense
4 3 115 4.3.115

4.3.115
1495 756 'discovered by him'. -3 4.3.116 4.3.114
An affix comes after a word in the Instrumental -3rd
case in construction in the sense of 'made', the
4 3 116 4.3.116

4.3.116
1496 1141 thing made being 'a book'. -3 4.3.117 4.3.115
An affix comes after a word in the Instrumental -3rd
case in construction in the sense of 'made by him'
4 3 117 4.3.117

4.3.117
1497 3550 when the whole word is a Name. -3 4.3.118 4.3.116
The affix comes in the sense of 'made by him'
after the words etc. the whole word so
4 3 118 4.3.118

4.3.118

1498 1122 formed being a Name.
4.3.119 4.3.117
3. and 4. in the sense of 'made by him',
4 3 119 4.3.119

4.3.119

1499 1235 the whole word being a Name. 4.3.120 4.3.118
After a word in the Genitive -6th-Case in
construction an affix -- 4.1.83 comes
4 3 120 4.3.120
4.3.120
1500 1708 in the sense of 'this is his', -6 4.3.121 4.3.119
The affix comes after in the sense of 'this is
4 3 121 4.3.121

4.3.121

1501 2906 his'. 4.3.122 4.3.120
When preceded by a word denoting 'a draught
animal', takes the affix in the sense of 'this is
4 3 122 4.3.122

4.3.122
1502 2270 his'. 4.3.123 4.3.121
After a word denoting a draught-animal and after
the words 1. and 2. the affix is
4 3 123 4.3.123

4.3.123

1503 2271 added. 4.3.124 4.3.122
The affix comes in the sense of 'this is his' after
4 3 124 4.3.124

4.3.124

1504 3917 the words 1. and 2. 4.3.125 4.3.123
compound of words denoting 'mutual enmity'
4 3 125 4.3.125

4.3.125

1505 1937 or 'matrimonial relationship'. 4.3.126 4.3.124
the words denoting (Patronymic/Family-names)
4 3 126 4.3.126

4.3.126

1506 1313 of Vedic schools. 4.3.127 4.3.125
a (Patronymic) word ending with the affix or
or , the words so formed expressing a
4 3 127 4.3.127

4.3.127

1507 3524 multitude, a mark or a sign. 4.3.128 4.3.126
The affix optionally comes in the sense of 'this
is his congregation, mark, sign or hamlet' after the
4 3 128 4.3.128

4.3.128
1508 3381 word 4.3.129 4.3.127
The affix comes in the sense of 'this is his Law
or Tradition' after the words 1. 2. 3.
4 3 129 4.3.129

4.3.129

1509 1467 4. and 5. 4.3.130 4.3.128
The affix is not used after a Family-name when
4 3 130 4.3.130

4.3.130

1510 2029 it denotes 'a beginner pupil' and 'a boarder pupil'. 4.3.131 4.3.129
4 3 131 4.3.131

4.3.131

1511 2953 the words etc.
4.3.132 4.3.130
4 3 132 4.3.132

4.3.132

1512 1172 the words 1. 2. 4.3.133 4.3.131
the word and the penultimate is
4 3 133 4.3.133

4.3.133

1513 516 elided. 4.3.134 4.3.132
An affix -- 4.1.83 etc., comes after a
word in the Genitive -6th-Case in construction in
4 3 134 4.3.134
4.3.134
1514 1703 the sense of 'a modification thereof'. -6 4.3.135 4.3.133
An affix comes after a word denoting an animal, a
herb and a tree in Genitive -6th-Case in
construction in the sense 'this is its part' (as well as
4 3 135 4.3.135
4.3.135

1515 382 'this is its modification'). -6 4.3.136 4.3.134
The affix comes in the sense of 'its modification
4 3 136 4.3.136
4.3.136

1516 2624 or its part' after the words etc. 4.3.137 4.3.135
After a word having as its penultimate, the affix
comes in the sense of modification or a part or
4 3 137 4.3.137
4.3.137

1517 1169 both, as appropriate. 4.3.138 4.3.136
The affix with the augment comes in the
sense of 'its modification' after the words and
4 3 138 4.3.138
4.3.138
1518 1802 4.3.139 4.3.137
The affix comes in the sense of 'modification or
part' (provided that the word has not the -
4 3 139 4.3.139
4.3.139
1519 941 grave accent on the first syllable). 4.3.140 4.3.138
The affix comes in the sense of 'modification or
part' after a word having - grave accent on
4 3 140 4.3.140
4.3.140
1520 200 the first syllable. 4.3.141 4.3.139
4 3 141 4.3.141
4.3.141

1521 2341 'modification or part' after the words etc.
4.3.142 4.3.140
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix comes in the sense of 'modification
4 3 142 4.3.142
4.3.142
1522 3365 or part' after the word 4.3.143 4.3.141
The affix comes optionally after any base, in
these two meanings of 'product' and 'part' in secular
language when neither food nor clothing is spoken
4 3 143 4.3.143
4.3.143

1523 2750 of. 4.3.144 4.3.142
The affix comes in the sense of 'product' and
'part' when neither food nor clothing is spoken of,
4 3 144 4.3.144
4.3.144

1524 2178 invariably after words and etc.
4.3.145 4.3.143
The affix comes after the word in the sense
4 3 145 4.3.145
4.3.145
1525 1329 of 'its dung'. 4.3.146 4.3.144
The affix invariably comes in the sense of 'its
4 3 146 4.3.146
4.3.146

1526 2376 product or part' after the word 4.3.147 4.3.145
The affix comes in the sense of 'product' after
4 3 147 4.3.147
4.3.147

1527 3528 the word , the whole word being a Name. 4.3.148 4.3.146
4 3 148 4.3.148
4.3.148
1528 3341 sense of a 4.3.149 4.3.147
the words and - the whole not being a
4 3 149 4.3.149
4.3.149

1529 428 name. 4.3.150 4.3.148
In the (Vedas) after a dissyllabic word the
4 3 150 4.3.150
4.3.150

3453 1979 affix comes in the sense of 'product or part'. -
4.3.151 4.3.149
The affix does not come in the (Vedas)
after the dissyllabic words having a short vowel in
4 3 151 4.3.151
4.3.151

3454 2239 them, nor after the words 1. and 2. -
4.3.152 4.3.150
The affix comes in the sense of 'its product or
4 3 152 4.3.152
4.3.152

1530 1714 part' after the words etc. ..
4.3.153 4.3.151
The affix comes after a word denoting 'gold'
4 3 153 4.3.153
4.3.153
1531 1500 when the sense is a weight or measure. 4.3.154 4.3.152
The affix comes in the sense of 'product or part'
after the words expressing living beings and after
4 3 154 4.3.154
4.3.154

1532 2537 etc. 4.3.155 4.3.153
after a word which ends in an affix having an
indicatory , such affix denoting 'its product or
4 3 155 4.3.155
4.3.155

1533 1552 part'. 4.3.156 4.3.154
After a word denoting 'a measure' the affix
expressing 'its product or part' is the same as the
4 3 156 4.3.156
4.3.156
1534 1211 affix having the sense of 'purchased'. 4.3.157 4.3.155
4 3 157 4.3.157
4.3.157
1535 827 after the word 4.3.158 4.3.156
4 3 158 4.3.158
4.3.158
1536 816 'product or part' after the words 1. and 2. 4.3.159 4.3.157
4 3 159 4.3.159
4.3.159

1537 907 'product or part' after the feminine word 4.3.160 4.3.158
4 3 160 4.3.160
4.3.160

4 3 161 4.3.161
4.3.161
1539 1932 after the word 4.3.162 4.3.160
4 3 162 4.3.162
4.3.162
1540 2772 the word , the word meaning 'a measure'. 4.3.163 4.3.161
The affix denoting 'product or part' is elided
4 3 163 4.3.163
4.3.163

1541 2571 when such a product or part is 'a fruit'. 4.3.164 4.3.162
The affix comes in the sense of 'product or
4 3 164 4.3.164
4.3.164

1542 2565 part, it being a fruit' after the words etc. 4.3.165 4.3.163
The affix optionally comes in denoting a fruit
4 3 165 4.3.165
4.3.165
1544 1488 after the word 4.3.166 4.3.164
The affix denoting 'fruit' is optionally elided by
4 3 166 4.3.166
4.3.166
1545 3014 after the word 4.3.167 4.3.165
The affix denoting 'fruit' is elided by after the
4 3 167 4.3.167
4.3.167

1546 3909 words etc. ..
4.3.168 4.3.166
The affixes and come respectively in the
sense of 'its product' after the words 1. and 2.
and there is elision (of the and
4 3 168 4.3.168
4.3.168

1547 955 affixes of those words). and 4.4.1 4.3.167
44001- The affix comes as a governing affix in the
4 4 1 4.4.1 44074
4.4.1

1548 2528 senses enumerated hereafter up to stra 4.4.76. 4.4.2 4.3.168
The affix comes after a word in the Instrumental
-3rd case in construction in the sense of 'he plays',
4 4 2 4.4.2
4.4.2

1550 1783 'he digs', 'he conquers' or 'he is conquered'. 4.4.3 4.4.1
-3rd case in construction, in the sense of 'refined
4 4 3 4.4.3
4.4.3
1551 3567 thereby'. 4.4.4 4.4.2
After the word and after the words having a
penultimate , the affix is added in the sense
4 4 4 4.4.4
4.4.4

1552 1120 of 'refined or prepared therewith'. 4.4.5 4.4.3
-3rd case in construction, in the sense of 'he
4 4 5 4.4.5
4.4.5
1553 1673 crosses thereby over the waters'. 4.4.6 4.4.4
4 4 6 4.4.6
4.4.6
1554 1325 sense of 'he crosses thereby'. 4.4.7 4.4.5
The affix comes after the word and after
bases having two syllables in the sense of 'he
4 4 7 4.4.7
4.4.7
1555 2248 crosses therewith'. 4.4.8 4.4.6
construction comes the affix in the sense of 'he
4 4 8 4.4.8
4.4.8
1556 1398 goes on by means thereof'. 4.4.9 4.4.7
The affix comes in the sense of 'he goes on by
4 4 9 4.4.9
4.4.9
1557 461 means thereof' after the word 4.4.10 4.4.8
The affix comes in the sense of 'he goes on, by
4 4 10 4.4.10
4.4.10
1558 2334 means thereof' after the words etc. 1. 2. 3. 4.4.9
4.4.11 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
The affixes and , come after the word
4 4 11 4.4.11
4.4.11

1559 3462 , in the sense of 'he goes by means thereof'. and 4.4.12 4.4.10
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix comes in the sense of 'he lives
thereby' after the words etc. being in the
4 4 12 4.4.12
4.4.12

1562 3305 Instrumental -3rd case in construction. ..
4.4.13 4.4.11
The affix comes in the sense of 'he lives
thereby' after the words 1. 2. and 3.
4 4 13 4.4.13
4.4.13

1563 3094 being in the Instrumental -3rd case in construction. 4.4.14 4.4.12
The affixes and come in the sense of 'he
4 4 14 4.4.14
4.4.14
1564 563 conveys thereby' after the word and 4.4.15 4.4.13
The affix comes in the sense of 'he conveys
4 4 15 4.4.15

4.4.15

1565 3907 Instrumental -3rd case in construction. 1. 2.4.4.16
3. ( ) 4. 5. 6.
4.4.14
The affix comes in the sense of 'he conveys'
after the words etc. being in the Instrumental
4 4 16 4.4.16

4.4.16

1566 2655 -3rd case in construction. 1. 2. 3. 4.4.15
4.4.17 () 4. 5. 6.
The affix optionally comes in the sense of 'he
conveys' after the words 1. and 2. being
4 4 17 4.4.17

4.4.17

1567 3224 in the Instrumental -3rd case in construction. 4.4.18 4.4.16
The affix comes in the sense of 'he conveys'
after the word in the Instrumental -3rd
4 4 18 4.4.18

4.4.18

1568 92 case in construction. 4.4.19 4.4.17
The affix comes in the sense of 'completed
4 4 19 4.4.19

4.4.19

1569 2199 Instrumental -3rd case in construction. 4.4.20 4.4.18
The affix comes always after the words ending
4 4 20 4.4.20

4.4.20

1570 1187 in the affix , in the sense of 'completed thereby'. 4.4.21 4.4.19
words 1. and 2. when the sense is
4 4 21 4.4.21

4.4.21

1571 278 that of completion. and 4.4.22 4.4.20
-3rd case in construction when the sense is 'mixed
4 4 22 4.4.22
4.4.22
1572 3565 therewith'. 4.4.23 4.4.21
4 4 23 4.4.23
4.4.23
1573 1426 sense is 'mixed therewith'. 4.4.24 4.4.22
The affix meaning 'mixed therewith' is
4 4 24 4.4.24
4.4.24

1574 2973 elided after the word 4.4.25 4.4.23
4 4 25 4.4.25
4.4.25
1575 2790 sense is 'mixed therewith'. 4.4.26 4.4.24
The affix comes after a word denoting a
condiment, being in the Instrumental -3rd case in
construction when the sense is 'sprinkled
4 4 26 4.4.26
4.4.26

1576 3321 therewith'. 4.4.27 4.4.25
The affix comes in the sense of 'it exists' after
the words 1. 2. and 3. being in the
4 4 27 4.4.27
4.4.27

The affix comes in the sense of 'it exists' after 1.
2. and 3. preceded by and ; the
word being in the Accusative -2nd case in
4 4 28 4.4.28
4.4.28

1578 1600 construction. 4.4.29 4.4.27
The affix comes in the sense of 'it exists' after
the word being it the Accusative -2nd case
4 4 29 4.4.29
4.4.29

1579 2318 in construction. 4.4.30 4.4.28
The affix comes after a word in the Accusative
-2nd case in construction when the sense is 'he
4 4 30 4.4.30
4.4.30

1580 2496 gives', the motive being mean. 4.4.31 4.4.29
The affixes and come respectively after
the words and when the sense is 'he
4 4 31 4.4.31
4.4.31

1581 1127 gives for a mean motive'. and 4.4.32 4.4.30
-2nd case in construction when the sense is 'who
4 4 32 4.4.32
4.4.32

1582 704 gleans that'. 4.4.33 4.4.31
-2nd case in construction when the sense is 'he
4 4 33 4.4.33
4.4.33
1583 2901 aids or protects that'. 4.4.34 4.4.32
-2nd case in construction when the sense is 'who
4 4 34 4.4.34
4.4.34

1584 3359 makes a sound or croaking'. 4.4.35 4.4.33
-2nd case in construction denoting birds, fishes or
4 4 35 4.4.35
4.4.35

1585 2254 wild beasts, when the sense is 'who kills that'. 4.4.36 4.4.34
The affix also comes in the sense of 'who stays'
after the word , the word being in the
4 4 36 4.4.36
4.4.36

1586 2313 Accusative -2nd case in construction. 4.4.37 4.4.35
The affix also comes in the sense of 'who runs'
after a word having as its second term and
4 4 37 4.4.37
4.4.37

The affixes and come after the word
being in the Accusative -2nd case in construction in
4 4 38 4.4.38
4.4.38

1588 464 the sense of 'who runs'. and 4.4.39 4.4.37
The affix comes in the sense of 'who takes'
after a word having as its second member, the
word being in the Accusative -2nd case in
4 4 39 4.4.39
4.4.39

1589 2292 construction. 4.4.40 4.4.38
The affix comes in the sense of 'who takes'
after the words 1. 2. and 3.
4 4 40 4.4.40
4.4.40

1590 2462 being in the Accusative -2nd case in construction. 4.4.41 4.4.39
The affix comes after the word being in the
Accusative -2nd case in construction in the sense
4 4 41 4.4.41
4.4.41
1591 1991 of 'who practices that'. 4.4.42 4.4.40
The affix and comes after the word
, in the Accusative -2nd case in construction in the
4 4 42 4.4.42
4.4.42

1592 2465 sense of 'who goes'. 4.4.43 4.4.41
The affix and comes after the words in the
Accusative -2nd case in construction denoting
4 4 43 4.4.43
4.4.43

1593 3628 combination in the sense 'who assembles there'. and 4.4.44 4.4.42
4 4 44 4.4.44
4.4.44
1594 2321 sense of 'who assembles there'. 4.4.45 4.4.43
The affix comes optionally after the word in
4 4 45 4.4.45
4.4.45
1595 3786 the sense of 'who assembles there'. 4.4.46 4.4.44
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix comes in the sense of 'who sees that'
after the words 1. and 2. in the
Accusative -2nd case in construction, the whole
4 4 46 4.4.46
4.4.46

1596 3540 word being a Name. 4.4.47 4.4.45
The affix comes after a word in the Genitive -6
4 4 47 4.4.47
4.4.47
1597 1694 th-Case in construction in the sense of 'its usage'. 4.4.48 4.4.46
The affix comes in the sense of 'its law' after
4 4 48 4.4.48
4.4.48

1598 94 the word etc. 1. 2. 4.4.49
3. 4.4.47
4. 5. 6.
The affix comes in the sense of 'its law' after a
4 4 49 4.4.49
4.4.49
1599 861 (Nominal Stem) ending 4.4.50 4.4.48
The affix comes in the sense of 'its tax' after a
4 4 50 4.4.50
4.4.50
1600 375 word in the Genitive -6th-Case in construction. 4.4.51 4.4.49
The affix comes in the sense of 'this is whose
saleable commodity' after a word in the Nominative
1st-Case in construction denoting the thing to be
4 4 51 4.4.51
4.4.51

1601 1636 sold. 4.4.52 4.4.50
4 4 52 4.4.52
4.4.52

1602 2972 saleable commodity' after the word 4.4.53 4.4.51
4 4 53 4.4.53
4.4.53

1603 1097 saleable commodity' after the words etc. 1. ( ) 2. 4.4.52
4.4.54 3. 4. 5. 6. 7
4 4 54 4.4.54
4.4.54

1604 3377 saleable commodity' after the word 4.4.55 4.4.53
Art' after a word denoting Art in the Nominative 1st-
4 4 55 4.4.55
4.4.55
1605 3397 Case in construction. 4.4.56 4.4.54
The affix optionally comes in the sense of 'this
4 4 56 4.4.56
4.4.56

1606 2712 is whose Art' after the words 1. and 2. 4.4.57 4.4.55
weapon' after a word denoting 'a weapon' and
4 4 57 4.4.57
4.4.57
1607 2516 being in the Nominative 1st-Case in construction. 4.4.58 4.4.56
The affixes and come in the sense of 'this is
4 4 58 4.4.58
4.4.58

1608 2299 whose weapon' after the word and 4.4.59 4.4.57
4 4 59 4.4.59
4.4.59

1609 3348 weapon' after the words 1. and 2. 4.4.60 4.4.58
4 4 60 4.4.60
4.4.60 ?

1610 436 belief' after the words 1. 2. and 3. 4.4.61 4.4.59
The affix comes in the sense of 'whose habit is
this' after a word in the Nominative 1st-Case in
4 4 61 4.4.61
4.4.61
1611 3408 construction. 4.4.62 4.4.60
The affix comes in the sense of 'whose habit is
4 4 62 4.4.62
4.4.62
1612 1439 this' after the words etc.
4.4.63 4.4.61
The affix comes in the sense of 'this is his act,
occurring in study' after a word in the Nominative
1st-Case in construction, if such a word is an
4 4 63 4.4.63
4.4.63

1614 1029 (act) which has (occurred) in (study). 4.4.64 4.4.62
act occurring in study' after a compound having
4 4 64 4.4.64
4.4.64

1615 2615 polysyllabic word as a prior member. 4.4.65 4.4.63
The affix comes after a word expressing food,
in the Nominative 1st-Case in construction, in the
4 4 65 4.4.65
4.4.65
1616 3939 sense of 'this is wholesome diet for whom'. 4.4.66 4.4.64
The affix comes in the sense of 'to whom this is
to be given rightfully' after a word expressing the
thing to be given, in the Nominative 1st-Case ( )
in construction, the force of the affix being that of a
4 4 66 4.4.66
4.4.66

1617 1634 Dative -4th Case. 4.4.67 4.4.65
The affix comes in the sense of 'to whom this
is given rightfully' after the words 1. and 2.
4 4 67 4.4.67
4.4.67

1618 3449 4.4.68 4.4.66
The affix optionally comes after the word
in the sense of 'to whom this is to be given
4 4 68 4.4.68
4.4.68

1619 2641 rightfully'. 4.4.69 4.4.67
The affix comes in the sense of 'appointed
there' after a word in the Locative -7th case ( ) in
4 4 69 4.4.69
4.4.69
1620 1617 construction. 4.4.70 4.4.68
The affix comes in the sense of 'appointed
4 4 70 4.4.70
4.4.70

1621 22 there' after a word ending with 4.4.71 4.4.69
The affix comes in the sense of 'who studies
there' after a word in the Locative -7th case in
4 4 71 4.4.71
4.4.71

1622 162 construction, denoting an improper place or time. 4.4.72 4.4.70
The affix comes in the sense of 'who transacts
business therein', after compounds ending in
and after , being in the Locative -7th case in
4 4 72 4.4.72
4.4.72

1623 960 construction. 4.4.73 4.4.71
The affix comes in the sense of 'who dwells'
4 4 73 4.4.73
4.4.73

1624 2165 after the Locative word 4.4.74 4.4.72
The affix comes in the sense of 'who dwells
there' after the word in the Locative -7th
4 4 74 4.4.74
4.4.74

In each stra from this one forward to --
44075-
4 4 75 4.4.75 51136

4.4.75

1626 2523 5.1.5, the affix bears rule. 4.4.76 4.4.74
The affix comes in the sense of 'what bears it'
after the words 1. 2. and 3. being in
4 4 76 4.4.76

4.4.76

1627 1655 the Accusative -2nd case in construction. 4.4.77 4.4.75
The affixes and comes in the sense of 'what
bears it' after the word in the Accusative -2nd
4 4 77 4.4.77

4.4.77
1628 2006 case in construction. and 4.4.78 4.4.76
after the word being in Accusative -2nd case
4 4 78 4.4.78

4.4.78
1630 1245 construction. 4.4.79 4.4.77
4 4 79 4.4.79

4.4.79

1631 880 construction, the affix is optionally elided too. 4.4.80 4.4.78
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
4 4 80 4.4.80

4.4.80
1632 3343 construction. 4.4.81 4.4.79
after the words 1. and 2. in Accusative -2nd
4 4 81 4.4.81

4.4.81

1633 3918 case construction. 4.4.82 4.4.80
4 4 82 4.4.82

4.4.82

1634 3535 construction, the whole word being a Name. 4.4.83 4.4.81
The affix comes in the sense of 'what pierces it'
after a word in the Accusative -2nd case in
construction, provided that it is not a bow with
4 4 83 4.4.83

4.4.83

1635 3169 which anything is pierced. 4.4.84 4.4.82
The affix comes in the sense of 'who obtains it'
after the words 1. and 2. being in the
4 4 84 4.4.84

4.4.84
The affix comes in the sense of 'who obtains it'
after the word , in the Accusative -2nd case in
4 4 85 4.4.85

4.4.85
1637 256 construction. 4.4.86 4.4.84
The affix comes in the sense of 'gone' after the
word 'control', being in the Accusative -2nd
4 4 86 4.4.86

4.4.86
The affix comes in the sense of 'in it is visible'
after the word being in the Nominative 1st-Case
4 4 87 4.4.87

4.4.87

1639 2282 in construction. 4.4.88 4.4.86
The affix comes in the sense of 'whose root is
eradicated' after the word being in the
4 4 88 4.4.88

4.4.88

1640 2792 Nominative 1st-Case in construction. 4.4.89 4.4.87
The word is irregularly formed being a
4 4 89 4.4.89

4.4.89

1641 3536 Name. Irregular 4.4.90 4.4.88
The affix comes in the sense of 'joined with'
after the word in the Instrumental -3rd case
4 4 90 4.4.90

4.4.90

1642 1305 in construction. 4.4.91 4.4.89
The affix comes after the words 1. 'a boat' 2.
'age' 3. 'merit' 4. 'poison' 5. 'a root'
6. 'a capital' 7. 'a furrow' and 8. 'a
balance', in the senses respectively of 1. 'to be
crossed' 2. 'like' 3. 'attainable' 4. 'to be put to death'
5. 'to be bent down' 6. 'equivalent to' 7. 'united with'
4 4 91 4.4.91

4.4.91

1643 2249 and 8. 'equally measured'. 4.4.92 4.4.90
The affix comes in the sense of 'not deviating
there from' after the words 1. 2. 3.
4 4 92 4.4.92

4.4.92

1644 1992 and 4. 4.4.93 4.4.91
The affix comes in the sense of 'made' after the
word being in the Instrumental -3rd case in
4 4 93 4.4.93

4.4.93

1645 1458 construction. 4.4.94 4.4.92
'made' after in the Instrumental -3rd case in
4 4 94 4.4.94

4.4.94
1646 821 construction. and 4.4.95 4.4.93
The affix comes in the sense of 'loved' after the
word being in the Genitive -6th-Case in
4 4 95 4.4.95

4.4.95
1647 3948 construction. 4.4.96 4.4.94
The affix comes in the sense of 'a bond' after
the word being in the Genitive -6th-Case
4 4 96 4.4.96

4.4.96
1648 2577 construction, when the word denotes a 'hymn'. 4.4.97 4.4.95
The affix comes after words 1. 2. and 3.
in the senses respectively of 1. 'means 2.
'gossip' and 3. 'drawing', the words being in the
4 4 97 4.4.97

4.4.97
1649 2713 Genitive -6th-Case in construction. 4.4.98 4.4.96
The affix comes in the sense of 'excellent in
regard thereto' after a word in the Locative -7th
4 4 98 4.4.98

4.4.98

The affix comes in the sense of 'excellent in
4 4 99 4.4.99

4.4.99

1651 2463 regard thereto' after the words etc. ..
4.4.100 4.4.98
The affix comes in the sense of 'excellent with
4 4 100 4.4.100

4.4.100
1652 2640 regard thereto' after the word 4.4.101 4.4.99
4 4 101 4.4.101

4.4.101
4 4 102 4.4.102

4.4.102
1654 970 regard thereto' after the words etc.
4.4.103 4.4.101
4 4 103 4.4.103

4.4.103

1655 1293 regard thereto' after the words etc.
4.4.104 4.4.102
regard thereto' after the words 1. 2. 3.
4 4 104 4.4.104

4.4.104

1656 2281 and 4. 4.4.105 4.4.103
4 4 105 4.4.105

4.4.105
regard thereto' after the word in the
4 4 106 4.4.106

4.4.106
3455 1574 (Vedas). 4.4.107 4.4.105
The affix comes in the sense of 'resident
therein' after the word in the Locative -7th
4 4 107 4.4.107

4.4.107

1658 3634 case construction. 4.4.108 4.4.106
The affix comes in the sense of 'who sleeps'
after the word in the Locative -7th case
4 4 108 4.4.108

4.4.108

1659 3636 construction and the falls on the letter 4.4.109 4.4.107
The affix comes in the sense of 'who sleeps' after
the word the word being in the Locative -7th
4 4 109 4.4.109

4.4.109
here' in the (Vedas) when in the Locative -7
4 4 110 4.4.110
4.4.110

3456 2653 th case in construction. 4.4.111 4.4.109
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
there' after the words 1. and 2. , in the
(Vedas), whereby the last vowel with the
4 4 111 4.4.111
4.4.111

3457 2354 consonant following is elided. 4.4.112 4.4.110
there' after the words 1. and 2. , in the
4 4 112 4.4.112
4.4.112

3458 3308 (Vedas). 4.4.113 4.4.111
The affixes and come in the sense of 'what
stays there' after the word and before these
affixes the final syllable of is elided, in the
4 4 113 4.4.113
4.4.113

3459 3861 (Vedas). and 4.4.114 4.4.112
4 4 114 4.4.114
4.4.114

3460 3578 there' after the words 1. 2. and 3. 4.4.115 4.4.113
4 4 115 4.4.115
4.4.115

3461 1745 there' after the word , in the (Vedas). 4.4.116 4.4.114
4 4 116 4.4.116
4.4.116

3462 30 there' after the word , in the (Vedas). 4.4.117 4.4.115
The affixes and come in the sense of 'what
stays there' after the word , in the
4 4 117 4.4.117
4.4.117

3463 1355 (Vedas). and 4.4.118 4.4.116
The affix comes in the sense of 'what stays there'
after the words 1. and 2. , in the
4 4 118 4.4.118
4.4.118

3464 3653 (Vedas). 4.4.119 4.4.117
The affix comes in the sense of 'given' after the
word in the Locative -7th case in construction,
4 4 119 4.4.119
4.4.119

3465 2581 in the (Vedas). 4.4.120 4.4.118
The affix comes in the sense of 'its share' or 'its
duty' after the word in the Genitive -6th-Case in
4 4 120 4.4.120
4.4.120

3466 1895 construction, in the (Vedas). 4.4.121 4.4.119
The affix comes in the sense of 'killer' after the
words 1. and 2. in the Genitive -6th-Case in
4 4 121 4.4.121
4.4.121

The affix comes in the sense of 'praising' after
the words 1. 2. and 3. in the
Genitive -6th-Case in construction, in the
4 4 122 4.4.122
4.4.122

3468 2951 (Vedas). 4.4.123 4.4.121
The affix comes in the sense of 'property' after
the word in the Genitive -6th-Case in
4 4 123 4.4.123
4.4.123

The affix comes in the sense of 'glamour' after
the word in the Genitive 6th-Case in
4 4 124 4.4.124
4.4.124

The affix comes in the (Vedas) after a
(Nominal Stem) in the Nominative 1st-
Case in construction, ending with the affix
when the sense is 'this is their of putting up'
provided that the things put are bricks and the affix
4 4 125 4.4.125
4.4.125

3471 1656 is elided. - 4.4.126 4.4.124
words to denote bricks put up with the
containing the word and the affix is
4 4 126 4.4.126
4.4.126

3472 421 elided. - 4.4.127 4.4.125
The affix is added in the (Vedas) to the
word in expressing bricks collected with the
4 4 127 4.4.127
4.4.127

3473 3065 containing the word 4.4.128 4.4.126
The affix comes in the (Vedas) with the
force of after a word in the Nominative 1st-
Case in construction, the word so formed meaning
4 4 128 4.4.128
4.4.128

3474 2721 'a month' or 'a body'. -
4.4.129 4.4.127
The affixes and come with the force of in
4 4 129 4.4.129
4.4.129

3475 2728 the (Vedas) after the word and 4.4.130 4.4.128
The affixes and come with the force of
4 4 130 4.4.130
4.4.130

3476 932 after the word when 'a day' is meant. and 4.4.131 4.4.129
force of after the word having the words 1.
4 4 131 4.4.131
4.4.131

3477 3309 or 2. in the beginning. 4.4.132 4.4.130
4 4 132 4.4.132
4.4.132
?
3478 1244 in the (Vedas) with the force of 4.4.133 4.4.131
The affixes , and come in the sense of
'made by them' after the word 'fore-fathers' in
4 4 133 4.4.133
4.4.133

3479 2433 the Instrumental -3rd case in construction. , and 4.4.134 4.4.132
The affix comes in the sense of 'sanctified' after
the word in the Instrumental -3rd case in
4 4 134 4.4.134
4.4.134

The affix comes in the sense of 'like' after the
word in the Instrumental -3rd case in
4 4 135 4.4.135
4.4.135

4 4 136 4.4.136
4.4.136

3482 2718 force of after the word 4.4.137 4.4.135
The affix comes in the sense of 'who deserves
that' after the word in the Accusative -2nd case
4 4 137 4.4.137
4.4.137

3483 3795 in construction, in the (Vedas). 4.4.138 4.4.136
4 4 138 4.4.138
4.4.138

3484 2753 word with the force of 4.4.139 4.4.137
4 4 139 4.4.139
4.4.139

3485 2727 word with the force of 4.4.140 4.4.138
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix comes in the sense of 'a collection'
after the word , as well as with the force of
4 4 140 4.4.140
4.4.140

3486 3091 , in the (Vedas). 4.4.141 4.4.139
4 4 141 4.4.141
4.4.141

3487 2083 word without altering the meaning. 4.4.142 4.4.140
the words 1. and 2. without altering the
4 4 142 4.4.142
4.4.142

3488 3680 meaning. 4.4.143 4.4.141
the words 1. 2. and 3. in the Genitive
6th-Case in construction when the sense is 'he
4 4 143 4.4.143
4.4.143

3489 3400 does'. 4.4.144 4.4.142
the words 1. 2. and 3. in the Genitive
6th-Case in construction, the sense being that of
4 4 144 4.4.144
4.4.144

3490 2664 condition. 5.1.1 4.4.143

From this one forward to 6.1.37, the affix
51001-
5 1 1 5.1.1 51017

5.1.1
1661 2519 bears the rule. 5.1.2 4.4.144
The affix comes after a ending with
(long or short), and after the words and the rest,
the senses of the affix being those taught up to
5 1 2 5.1.2

5.1.2

1662 695 suutra 5.1.37 5.1.3 5.1.1
The affix comes in the senses after
5 1 3 5.1.3

5.1.3

1663 981 the word , when a Name is meant. 5.1.4 5.1.2
The affix comes optionally after the words
denoting 'offering' and etc., in the sense of
5 1 4 5.1.4

5.1.4

1664 3238 5.1.5 5.1.3
An affix comes after a word in the fourth case in
5 1 5 5.1.5
5.1.5
1665 1691 construction, in the sense of 'good for that'. 5.1.6 5.1.4
The affix comes in the sense of 'good for that'
5 1 6 5.1.6
5.1.6

1666 3370 after a word denoting a part of the body. 5.1.7 5.1.5
5 1 7 5.1.7
5.1.7

1668 1253 after the word , , , , and 5.1.8 5.1.6
5 1 8 5.1.8
5.1.8

after the words and and after the
compounds having the word as their second
5 1 9 5.1.9
5.1.9

1670 513 term 5.1.10 5.1.8
The affixes and come in the sense of 'good
5 1 10 5.1.10
5.1.10
1672 3685 for that' after the words and 5.1.11 5.1.9
5 1 11 5.1.11
5.1.11

After the word being the name of a product, the
above-mentioned affix comes, to denote a thing
5 1 12 5.1.12

5.1.12

1674 1627 which is the primitive that is servicable for that. 5.1.13 5.1.11
The affix (+/- ) comes, in the sense of a
primitive serviceable for a product after the words
5 1 13 5.1.13

5.1.13

1675 1440 , and , denoting the product. 5.1.14 5.1.12
primitive serviceable for a product after the words
5 1 14 5.1.14

5.1.14

1676 872 and , denoting the products. 5.1.15 5.1.13
primitive serviceable for a product after a word
5 1 15 5.1.15

5.1.15
1677 1402 expressing the product of leather. 5.1.16 5.1.14
The above mentioned affixes come after a word in
the first case in construction, with the force of a
genitive or locative, when the word in the first case
is agent of the verb ; in other words - the
above-mentioned affixes have also the senses of
'very well sufficient there to' and 'very well sufficient
5 1 16 5.1.16

5.1.16

1678 1635 to be made therein'. 5.1.17 5.1.15
The affix (+/- ) comes after the word in
the above senses of 'this is sufficient for that' and
5 1 17 5.1.17

5.1.17
1679 2310 'this is sufficient therein'. 5.1.18 5.1.16
Up to sutra 5.1.115 (excluding that) the affix (+/-
51018-
5 1 18 5.1.18 51114

5.1.18
1680 2527 or +/- ) bears rule. 5.1.19 5.1.17
Up to sutra 5.1.63, inclusive, the affix (+/- or
51019-
5 1 19 5.1.19 51063

5.1.19

1681 570 +/- ) 5.1.20 5.1.18
The affix comes after the words etc.,
when they are not parts of a compound, the sense
of the affix being that taught in the subsequent
5 1 20 5.1.20

5.1.20
1682 430 sutras up to 5.1.63. 5.1.21 5.1.19
The affixes (-/- ) and (-/) come in the
senses taught up to 5.1.63 after the word ,
when it is not part of a compound and when it does
5 1 21 5.1.21

5.1.21

1686 3353 not mean merely 'hundred'. 5.1.22 5.1.20
The affix (-/- -) comes after a Numeral, when it
does not end with or , in the sense of the
5 1 22 5.1.22

5.1.22

1687 3511 affix being that taught hereafter up to 5.1.63 5.1.23 5.1.21
The affix coming after a Numeral ending with
, takes optionally the augment , the sense of
5 1 23 5.1.23

5.1.23
1688 3047 the affix being those given up to 5.1.63 5.1.24 5.1.22
The affix (-/- -) comes in the senses taught
up to 5.1.63 after the words and , when
it does not denote a Name: the and of the
5 1 24 5.1.24

5.1.24

1689 3152 base being dropped before this affix. 5.1.25 5.1.23
The affix (-/- -) comes in the senses taught
5 1 25 5.1.25

5.1.25
1690 954 up to 5.1.63 after the word 5.1.26 5.1.24
The affix (+/- ) comes optionally in the senses
5 1 26 5.1.26

5.1.26

1691 3416 taught up to 5.1.63 after the word 5.1.27 5.1.25
The affix (-/- -) comes in the senses taught up
to 5.1.63 after the words , ,
5 1 27 5.1.27

5.1.27

1692 3351 and 5.1.28 5.1.26
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix having the senses taught up to 5.1.63, is
elided by after a stem beginning with the word
, and after a compound, when it is not
5 1 28 5.1.28

5.1.28

1693 159 in a name. 5.1.29 5.1.27
The affix having the senses taught up to 5.1.63, is
not always Thus for the purpose of
application of the affix 5.4.17, this word is
5 1 29 5.1.29

5.1.29

1694 3186 not a 5.1.30 5.1.28
The affix 5.1.63 is optionally elided after a
occasioning compound, of the word
5 1 30 5.1.30

5.1.30

1695 1961 preceded by and 5.1.31 5.1.29
The affix 5.1.37-63 occasioning a
compound, is optionally elided after the word
5 1 31 5.1.31

5.1.31

1696 2625 preceded by and 5.1.32 5.1.30
The affix () comes in the senses 5.1.37-
63 after the word , when preceded by the
5 1 32 5.1.32

5.1.32
1697 3151 word or a Numeral, occasioning a 5.1.33 5.1.31
The affix (-/- -) comes in the senses
5.1.37-63 after the word , when preceded by
5 1 33 5.1.33

5.1.33

1698 1254 the word or a Numeral occasioning a 5.1.34 5.1.32
The affix () comes in the senses 5.1.37-
63 after the words , and , when
preceded by the word or a Numeral
5 1 34 5.1.34

5.1.34
1699 2267 occasioning a 5.1.35 5.1.33
The affix comes optionally after the word , in
the -senses 5.1.63, when it is preceded by
5 1 35 5.1.35

5.1.35
1700 3385 the word or a Numeral occasioning a 5.1.36 5.1.34
The affix (-/- -) as well as optionally also
comes after the word , in the -senses
5 1 36 5.1.36

5.1.36

1701 1960 5.1.37-63, when preced by the words and 5.1.37 5.1.35
The thirteen affixes taught in 5.1.18-36 have the
sense of 'purchased with this price' and are added
5 1 37 5.1.37

5.1.37
1702 1781 to a word in the third case in construction. 5.1.38 5.1.36
The above affixes have further the sense of 'for its
sake', when the meaning is a relation or an
5 1 38 5.1.38

5.1.38

1704 1695 unwanted appearance. 5.1.39 5.1.37
After the word and after a word having two
syllables, with the exception of a Numeral, or a
Measure of capacity or etc., the affix () is
added, in the above sense of 'a relation or a portent
5 1 39 5.1.39

5.1.39

1705 1322 for the purpose of that'. 5.1.40 5.1.38
After the word the affix () also comes, as
well as (), in the above sense of 'a relation or
5 1 40 5.1.40

5.1.40
1706 2385 a portent for the purpose of that'. 5.1.41 5.1.39
The affixes (+/- -) and (+/- -) are
respectively added to the words and ,
in the above mentioned sense of 'a connection or a
5 1 41 5.1.41

5.1.41

1707 3686 portent for its purpose'. 5.1.42 5.1.40
To the same bases and , are added
the same affixes and respectively, in the
5 1 42 5.1.42

5.1.42
1708 1709 sense of 'lord thereof'. 5.1.43 5.1.41
To the same bases and , being in the
7th case in construction, are added the same
affixes and respectively, in the sense that
5 1 43 5.1.43

5.1.43

1709 1619 of 'known therein'. 5.1.44 5.1.42
The affix (+/- ) comes in the sense of 'known
therein' after the words and , in the 7th
5 1 44 5.1.44

5.1.44

The above mentioned affixes 5.1.18 etc. come after
a word in the 6th-Case in construction, in the sense
5 1 45 5.1.45

5.1.45
1711 1702 of 'sown with so much'. 5.1.46 5.1.44
The affix (-/- ) comes in the sense of 'sown
5 1 46 5.1.46

5.1.46
1712 2351 with so much' after the word 5.1.47 5.1.45
The above mentioned affixes have also the sense
of 'an interest, or a rent, or a profit, or a tax,or a
5 1 47 5.1.47

5.1.47

1713 1630 bribe given thereby or in that'. 5.1.48 5.1.46
The affix (+/- ) comes in the same sense of
'an interest, or a rent, or a profit, or a tax,or a bribe
given thereby or therein' after a word denoting an
5 1 48 5.1.48

5.1.48
1714 2414 ordinal and after the word 5.1.49 5.1.47
The affix () comes after the word in the
sense of 'an interest, or a rent, or a profit, or a tax,
5 1 49 5.1.49

5.1.49
1715 2659 or a bribe given thereby or therein'. 5.1.50 5.1.48
The above mentioned affixes after the word
preceded by the word etc., have the sense of
5 1 50 5.1.50

5.1.50

1716 1647 'who carries away, or conveys or brings that'. 5.1.51 5.1.49
The affix (-/- - ) and (-/- ) come
respectively after the words and , in the
2nd case in construction, in the same sense of 'who
5 1 51 5.1.51

5.1.51

1717 3095 carries etc.'. 5.1.52 5.1.50
The above mentioned affixes have also the sense
of 'what is capable of holding that, or takes away
5 1 52 5.1.52

5.1.52

1718 3668 that, or cooks that'. 5.1.53 5.1.51
The affix () may optionally be added in the
above sense of 'being capable of holding etc.' after
5 1 53 5.1.53

5.1.53

1719 493 the words , and 5.1.54 5.1.52
The affix (-/- ) as well as the affix affix
() may optionally come after the same words
, and being final of a
compound, the sense being that of 'what can hold
5 1 54 5.1.54

5.1.54

1720 1949 etc.'. 5.1.55 5.1.53
After the word , being final of a , there
is optionally the elision of the above affixes, or the
adding of the affix (), in the sense of 'what can
5 1 55 5.1.55

5.1.55

1721 1123 hold that etc.'. 5.1.56 5.1.54
The affixes taught in 5.1.18 etc. have
5 1 56 5.1.56

5.1.56

1722 3791 also the sense of 'this is his portion, price or pay'. 5.1.57 5.1.55
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affixes taught in 5.1.18 etc. have the
5 1 57 5.1.57

5.1.57

1723 1637 sense of 'this is its measure'. 5.1.58 5.1.56
The affixes 5.1.18 etc. come after a word
denoting a numeral in the sense of 'this is its
measure when the word so formed means a Name,
a Multitude, a Book or a fixed way and mode of
5 1 58 5.1.58

5.1.58

1724 3516 study. 5.1.59 5.1.57
The following words are anomalous - 1. 'a
verse' 2. 'twenty' 3. 'thirty' 4.
'forty' 5. 'fifty' 6. 'sixty' 7.
'seventy' 8. 'eighty' 9. 'ninety' 10.
5 1 59 5.1.59

5.1.59

1725 2255 'hundred'. 5.1.60 5.1.58
The words 1. and 2. in combination with
may be anomalously so formed, in the sense of
5 1 60 5.1.60

5.1.60

1726 2258 'this is its measure'. 5.1.61 5.1.59
The affix (+/- ) comes after the word in
the (Vedas) when the meaning is that of a
5 1 61 5.1.61

5.1.61

3491 3605 5.1.62 5.1.60
The affix (+/- ) comes in the sense of 'this is
its measure' after the words 1. and 2.
when it is a Name denoting a -
5 1 62 5.1.62

5.1.62

1727 1804 book. 5.1.63 5.1.61
The affixes 5.1.18 have also the sense of
5 1 63 5.1.63
5.1.63
1728 1645 'who deserves that'. 5.1.64 5.1.62
After the words etc. in the Accusative -2nd case
in construction, the above mentioned affixes have
the sense of 'who deserves that under all
5 1 64 5.1.64
5.1.64

1729 1475 circumstances'. ..
5.1.65 5.1.63
The affix as well as the above affixes come
after the word in the Accusative -2nd case
in the sense 'who deserves that under all
5 1 65 5.1.65
5.1.65

1730 3407 circumstances'. 5.1.66 5.1.64
After the words etc. in the Accusative -2nd
case the affix comes in the sense of 'who
5 1 66 5.1.66
5.1.66

1731 1827 deserves that'. 5.1.67 5.1.65
The affix () comes in the sense of 'deserving
that' after a (Nominal Stem), in the
5 1 67 5.1.67
5.1.67

3492 1443 (Vedas). 5.1.68 5.1.66
The affix (-/- ) together with () comes in
5 1 68 5.1.68
5.1.68
1732 2352 the sense of 'deserving that' after the word 5.1.69 5.1.67
The affixes () and () comes in the sense
of 'deserving that' after the words 1. and 2.
5 1 69 5.1.69
5.1.69

1733 961 5.1.70 5.1.68
The affixes () and () comes in the sense
5 1 70 5.1.70
5.1.70
1734 3836 of 'deserving that' after the word 5.1.71 5.1.69
The affixes ( ) and (+/- --) come
respectively after the words 1. and 2. in
5 1 71 5.1.71
5.1.71

1735 2820 the sense of 'deserving that' and 5.1.72 5.1.70
The affix (+/- -- , 5.1.18) comes in
the sense of 'who performs this' after the words 1.
2. and 3. being in the
5 1 72 5.1.72
5.1.72

The affix (+/- -- ) comes in the sense of
'being fallen into this or thrown into it' after the word
5 1 73 5.1.73
5.1.73

1737 3564 in the Accusative -2nd case in construction. 5.1.74 5.1.72
The affix comes in the sense of 'who goes' after
the word in the Accusative -2nd case
5 1 74 5.1.74
5.1.74

1738 2896 construction. 5.1.75 5.1.73
The affix comes in the sense of 'who goes
there' after the word being in the Accusative -2
5 1 75 5.1.75
5.1.75
1739 2276 nd case in construction. 5.1.76 5.1.74
The affix comes after the word which
becomes the substitute of , the sense of the
5 1 76 5.1.76
5.1.76

1740 2295 affix being 'who always goes'. 5.1.77 5.1.75
The affix comes in the sense of 'who passes by
that way' and 'what is conveyed by that way' after
the word in the Instrumental -3rd case in
5 1 77 5.1.77
5.1.77

1741 714 construction. 5.1.78 5.1.76
In the following stras the phrase 'after a word
51078- denoting time' should be supplied to complete the
5 1 78 5.1.78 51098

5.1.78

1742 1066 sense. 5.1.79 5.1.77
The affix comes after a word denoting time in
the Instrumental -3rd case in construction in the
5 1 79 5.1.79

5.1.79
1743 1785 sense of 'to be accomplished by that time'. 5.1.80 5.1.78
The above affixes come after a word expressing
time in the Accusative -2nd case in construction in
the senses of 'solicited to instruct for such a period
5 1 80 5.1.80

5.1.80

1744 1669 or which will last so long'. 5.1.81 5.1.79
5 1 81 5.1.81

5.1.81

1745 2776 denoting 'age'. and 5.1.82 5.1.80
The affix comes after the word when
forming a (Numeral Determinative
5 1 82 5.1.82

5.1.82

1746 1946 Compound) and meaning 'age'. 5.1.83 5.1.81
The affixes , and comes in the sense of , and
5 1 83 5.1.83

5.1.83

1747 3477 'age' after the word 5.1.84 5.1.82
5 1 84 5.1.84

5.1.84
1748 383 'age' is Not meant. 5.1.85 5.1.83
The affix () comes in the four-fold senses of
'solicited', 'hired', 'lasted' and 'will last', after the
5 1 85 5.1.85

5.1.85
1749 3638 word 5.1.86 5.1.84
The affix () comes optionally in the senses
taught in 5.1.76,
5.1.80 after the word , forming a
5 1 86 5.1.86

5.1.86

1750 1948 (Numeral Determinative Compound). 5.1.87 5.1.85
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix optionally in the senses taught in
5.1.79, 5.1.82, after the words 1.
2. and 3. , occasioning a
5 1 87 5.1.87

5.1.87

The above affixes and and may also be
elided after a (Numeral Determinative
5 1 88 5.1.88

5.1.88
1753 3083 Compound) ending in and 5.1.89 5.1.87
The affixes meaning 'accomplished' etc.
5.1.76, 5.1.80 are
necessarily elided after the word forming a
(Numeral Determinative Compound)
5 1 89 5.1.89

5.1.89

1755 1418 when it refers to being endowed with reason. 5.1.90 5.1.88
The anomalously formed word has the
5 1 90 5.1.90

5.1.90

1756 3480 meaning of 'what are matured in six nights'. 5.1.91 5.1.89
The affix comes in the (Vedas) in the five-
fold senses taught in 5.1.76,
5.1.80, after a stem ending in
5 1 91 5.1.91

5.1.91

3493 3049 5.1.92 5.1.90
When the affixes () and () coem in the
(Vedas) in the five-fold senses taught in
5.1.76, 5.1.80, after
5 1 92 5.1.92

5.1.92

3494 3657 the word , when preceded by and and 5.1.93 5.1.91
The affix comes after a word denoting time in
the Instrumental -3rd case in construction in the
sense 'to be subdued, to be gained or attained, to
be completed and to be easily completed in that
5 1 93 5.1.93

5.1.93

1757 1786 time'. 5.1.94 5.1.92
The affix comes after a word of time in the
sense of 'an abstinence that lasts so long' or 'who
5 1 94 5.1.94

5.1.94

1758 1638 practises abstinence so long'. 5.1.95 5.1.93
The affix comes after a word being the name of
5 1 95 5.1.95

5.1.95

1759 1692 sacrifice, in the sense of 'the fee thereof'. 5.1.96 5.1.94
The affixes having the sense of 4.3.53 ,
4.3.11 , come after a time-denoting word
in the sense of 'what is given in that, and what is
5 1 96 5.1.96

5.1.96

1760 1613 done in that'. 5.1.97 5.1.95
Locative -7th case in construction, the sense of
5 1 97 5.1.97

5.1.97

1761 3333 'being given therein or done therein'.
5.1.98 5.1.96
words -- and being in the
Instrumental -3rd case in construction having the
5 1 98 5.1.98
5.1.98

1762 1788 sense of what is 'given or is done in this way'. and 5.1.99 5.1.97
-3rd case in construction in the sense of 'fitted for
5 1 99 5.1.99
5.1.99
1763 3659 that'. 5.1.100 5.1.98
The affix () comes in the sense of 'being fitted
with that', after the words 1. and 2. being in
5 1 100 5.1.100
5.1.100
1764 1027 the Instrumental -3rd case in construction. () 5.1.101 5.1.99
Dative -4th Case in construction in the sense of
5 1 101 5.1.101
5.1.101

1765 1690 'what is able to effect that'. 5.1.102 5.1.100
The affix () is also added in the sense of 'able
5 1 102 5.1.102
5.1.102
1766 2895 to effect that' after the word () 5.1.103 5.1.101
5 1 103 5.1.103
5.1.103

1767 1007 same sense of 'able to effect that'. 5.1.104 5.1.102
The affix comes in the sense of 'that has arrived
for it' after the word in the Nominative 1st-
5 1 104 5.1.104

5.1.104

The affix comes in the sense of 'that has come
5 1 105 5.1.105

5.1.105
1769 862 for it' after the word 5.1.106 5.1.104
In the (Vedas) the affix () comes in the
sense of 'season has come for it' After the verbs
5 1 106 5.1.106

5.1.106
3495 1442 the word 5.1.107 5.1.105
The affix () comes in the same sense of 'time
5 1 107 5.1.107

5.1.107

1770 1068 has come for it' after the word () 5.1.108 5.1.106
The affix () comes in the sense of 'long
standing' after the word being the Nominative
5 1 108 5.1.108
5.1.108
1771 2452 1st-Case in construction. () 5.1.109 5.1.107
The affix comes in the sense of 'that whose
occasion or purpose is this' after a word in the
5 1 109 5.1.109
5.1.109
The affix comes in the sense of 'that whose
purpose is this' after the words 1. and 2.
when the derivative of the first is combined
5 1 110 5.1.110
5.1.110
1773 3262 with and that of the second with 5.1.111 5.1.109
The affix () comes in the same sense of 'that
whose purpose is this' after The affix words
5 1 111 5.1.111
5.1.111

1774 216 etc. () ..
5.1.112 5.1.110
The affix () comes in the same sense of 'that
whose purpose is this' after the word when it
5 1 112 5.1.112
5.1.112
1775 3637 has a word in composition preceding it. () 5.1.113 5.1.111
The word is irregularly formed in the
5 1 113 5.1.113
5.1.113

1776 925 sense of 'thief'. Irregular 5.1.114 5.1.112
The word is irregularly formed in the
sense of 'what coincides with the beginning and the
5 1 114 5.1.114
5.1.114

1777 463 end i.e. what lasts only an instant'. Irregular 5.1.115 5.1.113
The affix ( ) comes after a word in the
Instrumental -3rd case in construction, in the sense
of 'like that' when the meaning is 'similarity of
5 1 115 5.1.115 5.1.115

1778 1782 action'. 5.1.116 5.1.114
The affix ( ) also comes in the sense of 'like
5 1 116 5.1.116 5.1.116
1779 1615 what is therein or thereof'. 5.1.117 5.1.115
The affix ( ) comes after a word in the
Accusative -2nd case in construction in the sense
5 1 117 5.1.117 5.1.117
1780 1628 of 'befitting that or suited to that'. 5.1.118 5.1.116
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
In the (Vedas) the affix ( ) is added to
5 1 118 5.1.118 5.1.118

3496 782 an (Preposition) in the sense of a verbal root. - 5.1.119 5.1.117
The affixes and come in the sense of 'the

nature thereof' after a word in the Genitive 6th-
5 1 119 5.1.119 5.1.119

1781 1700 Case. and 5.1.120 5.1.118
From this forward as far as the stra
51120-
5 1 120 5.1.120 51136 5.1.120

1782 458 5.1.136, the affixes and bear the rule. and 5.1.121 5.1.119
The affixes denoting 'nature' taught hereafter do not
come after a - compound formed by the
negative particle with the exception of the the
following - 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
5 1 121 5.1.121 5.1.121

1783 2036 7. and 8. 5.1.122 5.1.120
The affix ( ) comes optionally in the
5 1 122 5.1.122 5.1.122

1784 2436 sense of 'nature thereof' after the words etc. ( ) ....................
5.1.123 5.1.121
'nature thereof' after a word denoting colour and and
5 1 123 5.1.123 5.1.123

1787 3071 after the words etc. ....................
5.1.124 5.1.122
The affix has after a word expressive of quality
and after etc., the sense of the activity or
5 1 124 5.1.124 5.1.124

1788 1294 occupation or something or someone. 5.1.125 5.1.123
The affix () comes in the sense of 'nature
thereof or action thereof' after the word in the
5 1 125 5.1.125 5.1.125

1790 3811 Genitive 6th-Case and is elided before this affix. () 5.1.126 5.1.124
The affix comes in the sense of 'nature or action
5 1 126 5.1.126 5.1.126
1791 3576 thereof' after the word 5.1.127 5.1.125
5 1 127 5.1.127 5.1.127
1792 977 thereof' after the words 1. and 2. 5.1.128 5.1.126
The affix comes in the sense of 'nature or
action thereof' after a compound ending with
5 1 128 5.1.128 5.1.128

1793 2272 and after etc. .. 5.1.129 5.1.127
action or thereof' after class names of animals and
5 1 129 5.1.129 5.1.129

1794 2536 words expressing age as well as after etc. .. 5.1.130 5.1.128
action thereof' after compounds ending in and
5 1 130 5.1.130 5.1.130

1795 3935 after etc. .. 5.1.131 5.1.129
action thereof' after a stem ending in (
or ) when the preceding syllable is prosodially
5 1 131 5.1.131 5.1.131

1796 602 light. 5.1.132 5.1.130
thereof' after a polysyllabic stem whose penultimate
letter is and whose penultimate syllable is
5 1 132 5.1.132 5.1.132

1797 2897 prosodially heavy. 5.1.133 5.1.131
thereof' after a and after the words
5 1 133 5.1.133 5.1.133

1798 1933 etc. .. 5.1.134 5.1.132
thereof' after a (Patronymic/Family-name) and
after the Name of a Vedic School when one boasts
thereby or manifests his contempt thereby or when
it means one who has attainted that (or has come
5 1 134 5.1.134 5.1.134

1799 1312 for an inspection or inquiring thereof). 5.1.135 5.1.133
The affix () comes in the sense of 'nature or
5 1 135 5.1.135 5.1.135

1800 3965 action thereof' after words expressing priests. () 5.1.136 5.1.134
The affix comes in the sense of of 'nature or
action thereof' after the word denoting a kind
5 1 136 5.1.136 5.1.136

1801 2628 of priest. 5.2.1 5.1.135
The affix comes in the sense of 'a place of
growing when that place is a field' after the name of
5 2 1 5.2.1 5.2.1

1802 2002 any particular corn being in the Genitive 6th-Case. 5.2.2 5.1.136
growing, when it is a field' after the words 1.
5 2 2 5.2.2 5.2.2

1803 3340 and 2. 5.2.3 5.2.1
growing, when it is a field' after the words 1. 2.
5 2 3 5.2.3 5.2.3

1804 2842 and 3. 5.2.4 5.2.2
growing, when it is a field' optionally after the words
5 2 4 5.2.4 5.2.4

1805 3203 1. 2. 3. 4. and 5. 5.2.5 5.2.3
The affix () and comes in the sense of () and
5 2 5 5.2.5 5.2.5
1806 3675 'wholly made thereof' after the word 5.2.6 5.2.4
The affix () and comes in the sense of 'a
() and
mirror' after the words 1. and 2.
being
5 2 6 5.2.6 5.2.6

1807 2830 in Genitive 6th-Case in construction. 5.2.7 5.2.5
After the words 1. 2. 3. 4. or 5.
, preceded by being in the Accusative -2nd
case in construction, the affix () comes in the
5 2 7 5.2.7 5.2.7

1808 1623 sense of 'what pervades or fills the whole of that'. () 5.2.8 5.2.6
The affix () comes in the sense of 'reaching
5 2 8 5.2.8 5.2.8

1809 546 thereto' after the word () 5.2.9 5.2.7
The affix () comes in the senses of 'so bound',
'eating that' and 'to carry thereto' after the words 1.
5 2 9 5.2.9 5.2.9

1810 207 2. and 3. () 5.2.10 5.2.8
The affix () comes in the sense of 'who
witnesses or experiences that' after the words 1.
2. and 3. , in the Accusative -2
5 2 10 5.2.10 5.2.10

1811 2330 nd case in construction. () 5.2.11 5.2.9
The affix () comes in the sense of 'who
purposes to go' after the words 1. 2.
and 3. being in the Accusative -2nd
5 2 11 5.2.11 5.2.11

lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix () comes in the sense of 'who bears
5 2 12 5.2.12 5.2.12

1813 3631 in the womb' after the word () 5.2.13 5.2.11
The word is anomalous meaning 'a
5 2 13 5.2.13 5.2.13

1814 140 female near delivery'. Anomalous 5.2.14 5.2.12
5 2 14 5.2.14 5.2.14
1815 470 The word is irregularly formed. Irregular 5.2.15 5.2.13
The affix () comes in the sense of 'who is fit to
5 2 15 5.2.15 5.2.15
1816 190 follow' after the word () 5.2.16 5.2.14
The affixes () and () come in the sense of () and
5 2 16 5.2.16 5.2.16
1817 164 'who is fit or able to follow' after the word () 5.2.17 5.2.15
(),
The affixes (), () and () come in the () and
5 2 17 5.2.17 5.2.17

1818 318 sense of 'who is able to go' after the word () 5.2.18 5.2.16
The affix comes in the sense of 'it formerly had
5 2 18 5.2.18 5.2.18

1819 1331 been' after the word 5.2.19 5.2.17
The affix comes in the sense of 'what is
travelled over or traversed in one day' after the
word being in the Genitive 6th-Case in
5 2 19 5.2.19 5.2.19

1820 418 construction. 5.2.20 5.2.18
The words and are anomalous when
meaning 'modest' and 'a shameful action,
5 2 20 5.2.20 5.2.20

1821 3389 respectively. Anomalous 5.2.21 5.2.19
The affix comes in the sense of 'who leads this
life' or 'who lives by this' after the word being in
5 2 21 5.2.21 5.2.21

1822 3339 the Instrumental -3rd case in construction. 5.2.22 5.2.20
The word is anomalous when meaning
5 2 22 5.2.22 5.2.22

1823 3718 'friendship'. Anomalous 5.2.23 5.2.21
5 2 23 5.2.23 5.2.23

1824 3961 The word is anomalous when it is a Name. Anomalous 5.2.24 5.2.22
()
The affixes () and () come in the
and
senses of 'the fruiting-season of this' and 'the root
5 2 24 5.2.24 5.2.24

1825 1698 of this'. () 5.2.25 5.2.23
The affix comes in the sense of 'the root of it'
after the word in the Genitive 6th-Case in
5 2 25 5.2.25 5.2.25

1826 2253 construction. 5.2.26 5.2.24
( )
The affixes ( ) and () come in the
and
sense of 'celebrated through this' after a word in the
5 2 26 5.2.26 5.2.26

1827 1790 Instrumental -3rd case in construction. () 5.2.27 5.2.25
The affixes and comes in the sense of 'not
being together' after the words 1. and 2.
5 2 27 5.2.27 5.2.27
1828 3171 respectively. and 5.2.28 5.2.26
()
The affixes () and ( ) come and
5 2 28 5.2.28 5.2.28

1829 3300 after the preposition without changing the sense. ( ) 5.2.29 5.2.27
The affix () comes after the words 1. 2.
5 2 29 5.2.29 5.2.29

1830 3663 3. and 4. () 5.2.30 5.2.28
The affixes and come after the word and
5 2 30 5.2.30 5.2.30

1831 387 5.2.31 5.2.29
The affixes , and come in the
,
sense of 'a hooked nose' after the word when
5 2 31 5.2.31 5.2.31

1832 2101 the word so formed is a Name. and 5.2.32 5.2.30
and
'a hooked nose' after the word when the word so
5 2 32 5.2.32 5.2.32

1833 2235 formed is a Name. 5.2.33 5.2.31
The affixes and come in the sense of 'a
hooked nose' after the word ; and and
and
are the substitutes of before those affixes
5 2 33 5.2.33 5.2.33

1834 654 respectively. 5.2.34 5.2.32
The affix comes in the sense of 'nearness'
and after the words 1. and 2. , respectively,
5 2 34 5.2.34 5.2.34

1835 803 the words so formed being Names. 5.2.35 5.2.33
The affix comes in the sense of 'employing
oneself zealously in it' after the word in the
5 2 35 5.2.35 5.2.35

The affix comes in the sense of 'that whereof
this is observed' after the words etc. in the
5 2 36 5.2.36 5.2.36

,
The affixes , and come in the
and
sense of 'that whereof this is the lineal measure'
5 2 37 5.2.37 5.2.37

1838 2495 after a word in Nominative 1st-Case in construction. 5.2.38 5.2.36
The affix , , and come in
,
the sense of 'that whereof this is the lineal measure'
, and
after the words 1. and 2. in the
5 2 38 5.2.38 5.2.38

The affix comes in the sense of 'that where of
this is the measure of volume' after the words 1.
2. and 3. being in the Nominative 1st-Case
5 2 39 5.2.39 5.2.39

1840 2834 of construction. 5.2.40 5.2.38
After the words and , ( ) is substituted and
5 2 40 5.2.40 5.2.40

1841 1091 for the of 5.2.41 5.2.39
The affixes ( with the elision of ) and
come in the sense of 'numerical quantity' after
the word in the Nominative 1st-Case in
5 2 41 5.2.41 5.2.41

1842 1089 construction. and 5.2.42 5.2.40
The affix comes in the sense of 'that whereof
5 2 42 5.2.42 5.2.42

1843 3512 the parts are so many' after a numeral. 5.2.43 5.2.41
The affix is optionally the substitute of
5 2 43 5.2.43 5.2.43

After the word , is always the substitute for
, having the (acute accent) on its first
5 2 44 5.2.44 5.2.44

1845 812 syllable. 5.2.45 5.2.43
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix ( with the elision of of the base)
comes in the sense of 'this is surplus in it' after a
Numeral ending in being in the Nominative
5 2 45 5.2.45 5.2.45

1846 1631 1st-Case in construction. 5.2.46 5.2.44
The affix comes in the sense of 'this is surplus in
it' after a Numeral ending in and after
5 2 46 5.2.46 5.2.46
1847 3355 with the elision of and 5.2.47 5.2.45
The affix ( with feminine in ) comes
when denoting a thing given in exchange in the
sense of 'containing so many times more of
something' or 'the price of a portion of this is so
5 2 47 5.2.47 5.2.47

1848 3513 many equal portion of the other' after a Numeral. 5.2.48 5.2.46
The affix ( causing the elision of the last vowel
with the consonant following it) comes in the sense
of 'making full this number' after a Numeral being
5 2 48 5.2.48 5.2.48
1849 1699 the Genitive 6th-Case in construction. 5.2.49 5.2.47
The augment comes before in the sense of
'making full this number' after a Numeral which
5 2 49 5.2.49 5.2.49

1850 2152 ends in when no other Numeral precedes it. and ( ) 5.2.50 5.2.48
The is the augment of in the (Vedas)
after a Numeral ending in and not preceded by
5 2 50 5.2.50 5.2.50
3497 1815 another Numeral as well as the augment and ( ) 5.2.51 5.2.49
When follows, is the augment of the words
5 2 51 5.2.51 5.2.51

1851 3472 1. 2. 3. and 4. and () 5.2.52 5.2.50
When follows, is the augment of the and
5 2 52 5.2.52 5.2.52

1852 2584 words 1. 2. 3. and 4. ( ) 5.2.53 5.2.51
When follows is the augment of a stem ending in and
5 2 53 5.2.53 5.2.53
1853 3048 () 5.2.54 5.2.52
The affix comes in the sense of 'completer
5 2 54 5.2.54 5.2.54
1854 1976 thereof' after the word 5.2.55 5.2.53
The affix comes in the sense of 'completer
thereof' after the word and there is
5 2 55 5.2.55 5.2.55

1855 1808 (Vocalisation) of the stem. 5.2.56 5.2.54
After the words etc. ( feminine in and
5 2 56 5.2.56 5.2.56

1856 3153 ) is optionally the augment of ( ) 5.2.57 5.2.55
After the words etc. and after 1. 2.
and 3. ( feminine in ) is always and
5 2 57 5.2.57 5.2.57

1857 2179 the augment of ( ) 5.2.58 5.2.56
After the words etc. when no other Numeral and
5 2 58 5.2.58 5.2.58

1858 3481 precedes them; is always the augment of ( ) 5.2.59 5.2.57
When a or is to be expressed, the affix
() comes after a (Nominal Stem) in
the sense of the affix --
5 2 59 5.2.59 5.2.59

1859 2719 5.2.94. () 5.2.60 5.2.58
When an or is to be expressed there
is elision of the affix () having the sense of
5 2 60 5.2.60 5.2.60

1860 161 -- 5.2.94. () 5.2.61 5.2.59
The affix comes in the sense of when an
or is to be expressed, after the
5 2 61 5.2.61 5.2.61

1861 3259 words etc. 5.2.62 5.2.60
The affix comes in the sense of when an
5 2 62 5.2.62 5.2.62

1862 1330 or is to be expressed 5.2.63 5.2.61
The affix comes in the sense of 'versed therein
or skilled therein' after the word being in the
5 2 63 5.2.63 5.2.63

The affix comes in the sense of 'versed therein
or skilled therein' after the (Nominal
Stem) etc. being in the Locative -7th case in
5 2 64 5.2.64 5.2.64

1864 462 construction. 5.2.65 5.2.63
The affix comes in the sense of 'a desire
thereafter' after the words 1. and 2. being
5 2 65 5.2.65 5.2.65

1865 1988 in the Locative -7th case in construction. 5.2.66 5.2.64
The affix comes in the sense of 'who takes care
of it, who bestows care upon' after a word denoting
5 2 66 5.2.66 5.2.66

1866 3887 a part of one's body. 5.2.67 5.2.65
The affix comes in the sense of 'voracious' after
5 2 67 5.2.67 5.2.67

1867 729 the word 5.2.68 5.2.66
The affix comes in the sense of 'to supply richly
with it' after the word being in the Instrumental
5 2 68 5.2.68 5.2.68

1868 3697 -3rd case in construction. 5.2.69 5.2.67
The affix comes in the sense of 'who must take
that' after the word 'a share' being in the
5 2 69 5.2.69 5.2.69
The affix comes in the sense of taken off there
from not long ago or shortly before' after the word
5 2 70 5.2.70 5.2.70

1870 1663 'a loom'. 5.2.71 5.2.69
The words and are anomalous when
5 2 71 5.2.71 5.2.71
1871 2632 they are a Name. Anomalous 5.2.72 5.2.70
The affix comes in the sense of 'who goes to
5 2 72 5.2.72 5.2.72

1872 3405 work thus' after the words and 5.2.73 5.2.71
5 2 73 5.2.73 5.2.73
1873 142 The word is anomalous. Anomalous 5.2.74 5.2.72
The words 1. 2. and 3. are
anomalous meaning 'being at liberty to do or being
5 2 74 5.2.74 5.2.74

1874 187 fond of'. Anomalous 5.2.75 5.2.73
The affix comes in the sense of 'who strives to
gain something by that' after the word in the
5 2 75 5.2.75 5.2.75

The affixes and come in the sense of 'who
strives to gain something by that 'after the words 1.
5 2 76 5.2.76 5.2.76

1876 338 and 2. , respectively and 5.2.77 5.2.75
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix is added to an ordinal number in the
sense of 'acquiring a subject after so many
attempts' and there is optionally the elision of the
5 2 77 5.2.77 5.2.77

1877 1715 affix denoting the ordinal number. 5.2.78 5.2.76
The affix comes in the sense of 'he is their
leader' after a word in the Nominative 1st-Case with
5 2 78 5.2.78 5.2.78
1878 3503 the force of Genitive 6th-Case. 5.2.79 5.2.77
The affix comes in the sense of 'clog is its fetter'
after the word 'a clog' when the whole word
5 2 79 5.2.79 5.2.79

1879 3419 means 'a young camel'. 5.2.80 5.2.78
The word is anomalous meaning 'longing after,
5 2 80 5.2.80 5.2.80
1880 711 yearning'. Anomalous 5.2.81 5.2.79
The affix comes after a word expressing a time
or a cause or effect (of the disease) when an illness
5 2 81 5.2.81 5.2.81

1881 1059 is denoted. 5.2.82 5.2.80
The affix comes in the sense of 'this is the
principal food of this particular occasion' after a
word denoting food in the Nominative 1st-Case in
construction, when the whole word so formed is a
5 2 82 5.2.82 5.2.82

1882 1632 Name. 5.2.83 5.2.81
The affix comes in the sense of 'this is the
principal food on this particular occasion' after the
5 2 83 5.2.83 5.2.83
1883 1124 word when the whole word is a Name. 5.2.84 5.2.82
The word is irregularly formed meaning 'who
5 2 84 5.2.84 5.2.84

1884 3457 has studied the (Vedas)'. Irregularly 5.2.85 5.2.83
The affixes ( ) and come in the sense of
5 2 85 5.2.85 5.2.85

1885 3450 'this is eaten by him' after the word and 5.2.86 5.2.84
The affix ( ) comes in the sense of 'by whom
5 2 86 5.2.86 5.2.86
1886 2425 something was done formerly' after the word ( ) 5.2.87 5.2.85
The affix ( ) comes in the sense of 'by whom
something is done' after the word , also when
5 2 87 5.2.87 5.2.87
1887 3603 another word precedes it. ( ) 5.2.88 5.2.86
The affix ( ) comes in the sense of 'by him'
5 2 88 5.2.88 5.2.88

1888 666 after etc. ( ) 5.2.89 5.2.87
In the (Vedas) the words 1. and 2.
are anomalously formed by this affix and
5 2 89 5.2.89 5.2.89

1889 1448 have the sense of 'an antagonist'. 5.2.90 5.2.88
The word formed anomalously by
5 2 90 5.2.90 5.2.90

1890 208 denotes 'who goes after, who searches'. Anomalous 5.2.91 5.2.89
The affix comes in the sense of 'a spectator,
looker on' after the word when the word so
5 2 91 5.2.91 5.2.91

1891 3712 formed is a Name. 5.2.92 5.2.90
The word ( ) is anomalous meaning
5 2 92 5.2.92 5.2.92

1892 1239 'curable in another body' i.e. 'not curable in this life'. Anomalous 5.2.93 5.2.91
The word (having (acute accent) on
the last) is anomalous meaning 'an organ of sense'
and so called either because it is 'the characteristic
from which the existence of is inferred' or 'it is
seen by ' or 'it is created by ' or it is wished
5 2 93 5.2.93 5.2.93

1893 658 by ' or 'it is given by '. 5.2.94 5.2.92
The affix comes in the sense of 'whose it is' or
'in whom it is' after a word in the Nominative 1st-
5 2 94 5.2.94 5.2.94

The affix comes in the sense of 'whose it is' or
'in whom it is' after the (Nominal Stem)
5 2 95 5.2.95 5.2.95
1895 2914 etc. 5.2.96 5.2.94
after a stem ending in long the word expressing
5 2 96 5.2.96 5.2.96

1903 2538 something which is found only in a living being. 5.2.97 5.2.95
The affix comes in the sense of after the
5 2 97 5.2.97 5.2.97
1904 3736 words etc. and optionally after also. and . 5.2.98 5.2.96
The affix comes in the senses of 'love' and
5 2 98 5.2.98 5.2.98

1905 3051 'strength' respectively after the words and 5.2.99 5.2.97
after the word and optionally after the affix
5 2 99 5.2.99 5.2.99
1906 2575 also. and 5.2.100 5.2.98
The three affixes , and come in the sense
of respectively after the words of the three
classes i.e. 1. 2. and 3. and , ,
5 2 100 5.2.100 5.2.100

1907 3034 the affix also comes in the alternative. and .. 5.2.101 5.2.99
words 1. 2. and 3. as well as the affix
5 2 101 5.2.101 5.2.101

1908 2457 5.2.102 5.2.100
The affixes and come with the force of
5 2 102 5.2.102 5.2.102
1909 1664 after the words and respectively. and 5.2.103 5.2.101
5 2 103 5.2.103 5.2.103
1910 93 And also comes after and 5.2.104 5.2.102
The affix comes in the sense of after
5 2 104 5.2.104 5.2.104

1911 3729 and 5.2.105 5.2.103
When the sense if of 'locality' there may take place
elision of the affixes denoting (with the
preservation of the gender and number of the word)
or there may be the affixes , and ,
5 2 105 5.2.105 5.2.105

1912 1919 after the words and and 5.2.106 5.2.104
The affix comes in the sense of 'having
5 2 106 5.2.106 5.2.106

1913 1832 projecting teeth' after the word 5.2.107 5.2.105
The affix comes after the words 1. 2. 3.
5 2 107 5.2.107 5.2.107

1914 845 and 4. with the force of 5.2.108 5.2.106
The affix comes in the sense of after 1.
5 2 108 5.2.108 5.2.108
1915 1927 and 2. 5.2.109 5.2.107
5 2 109 5.2.109 5.2.109

1916 1165 The affix comes optionally with the force of 5.2.110 5.2.108
5 2 110 5.2.110 5.2.110

1917 1287 and 2. when the word is a Name. 5.2.111 5.2.109
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
5 2 111 5.2.111 5.2.111

1918 1046 after the words 1. and 2. respectively. and 5.2.112 5.2.110
5 2 112 5.2.112 5.2.112

1919 2903 2. 3. and 3. 5.2.113 5.2.111
5 2 113 5.2.113 5.2.113

1920 1833 and 2. when a Name is formed. 5.2.114 5.2.112
The words 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. and 8.
are irregularly formed in the sense of and are
5 2 114 5.2.114 5.2.114

1921 1537 Names. Irregular 5.2.115 5.2.113
after the (Nominal Stems) ending in short
5 2 115 5.2.115 5.2.115
1922 97 and in the alternative also comes. and 5.2.116 5.2.114
5 2 116 5.2.116 5.2.116

1923 3342 after the words etc. as well as the affix and 5.2.117 5.2.115
The affix also comes in the sense of after
5 2 117 5.2.117 5.2.117

1924 1749 the (Nominal Stems) etc. .. 5.2.118 5.2.116
The affix always comes in the sense of
after a stem which in composition is preceded by
5 2 118 5.2.118 5.2.118

1925 879 or 5.2.119 5.2.117
words 1. and 2. when they follow after
5 2 119 5.2.119 5.2.119

1926 3352 5.2.120 5.2.118
word when 'stamping (coining)' or 'praise' is
5 2 120 5.2.120 5.2.120
1927 2950 denoted. 5.2.121 5.2.119
After a stem ending in and after , and
5 2 121 5.2.121 5.2.121

1928 442 comes the affix in the sense of 5.2.122 5.2.120
In the (Vedas) the affix is added
5 2 122 5.2.122 5.2.122

3498 2590 diversely in the sense of - 5.2.123 5.2.121
The affix is added to in the sense of in
5 2 123 5.2.123 5.2.123

1929 839 the (Vedas). -
5.2.124 5.2.122
The affix come in the sense of after the
5 2 124 5.2.124 5.2.124
1930 3139 word 5.2.125 5.2.123
The affixes and come in the sense of and
5 2 125 5.2.125 5.2.125
1931 571 after , the word denoting 'a talkative'. 5.2.126 5.2.124
The irregularly formed word denotes 'Sir or
5 2 126 5.2.126 5.2.126

1932 3892 Lord'. Irregular 5.2.127 5.2.125
5 2 127 5.2.127 5.2.127

1933 362 words etc. 5.2.128 5.2.126
The affix ( ) comes in the sense of after
a compound after the name of a disease and
after anything denoting fault when the thing is found
5 2 128 5.2.128 5.2.128

1934 1939 in a living being. ( ) 5.2.129 5.2.127
The augment comes before ( ) after the
5 2 129 5.2.129 5.2.129

1935 3141 words 1. and 2. 5.2.130 5.2.128
5 2 130 5.2.130 5.2.130
1936 3063 an ordinal numeral when age is denoted. ( ) 5.2.131 5.2.129
The affix ( ) comes (to the exclusion of other
5 2 131 5.2.131 5.2.131

1937 3748 affixes) in the sense of after the words etc. ( ) 5.2.132 5.2.130
The affix ( ) comes in the sense of (to
the exclusion of others) after nominal steps ending
5 2 132 5.2.132 5.2.132

1938 1993 in 1. 2. 3. ( ) 5.2.133 5.2.131
the word when a genus is denoted by the word
5 2 133 5.2.133 5.2.133
1939 3932 so formed. ( ) 5.2.134 5.2.132
the word when the word so formed means a
5 2 134 5.2.134 5.2.134

1940 3073 ( ) 5.2.135 5.2.133
the words etc. when the word so formed
5 2 135 5.2.135 5.2.135

1941 2401 denotes a locality. ( ) . 5.2.136 5.2.134
The affixes and come after the
5 2 136 5.2.136 5.2.136

1942 2582 (Nominal Stems) etc. and 5.2.137 5.2.135
a (Nominal Stem) ending in or
5 2 137 5.2.137 5.2.137
.
1943 3538 when the whole word so formed means a Name. ( ) 5.2.138 5.2.136
The seven affixes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. , , ,
and 7. comes in the sense of after , ,
5 2 138 5.2.138 5.2.138

1944 952 'water and happiness' and 'happiness'. and 5.2.139 5.2.137
5 2 139 5.2.139 5.2.139

1945 1750 2. and 3. 5.2.140 5.2.138
The affix () comes in the sense of after
5 2 140 5.2.140 5.2.140
1946 448 the word and the indeclinable 'good'. 5.3.1 5.2.139
The stra taught from this forward up to
5.3.27
5 3 1 5.3.1 5.3.1
1947 2524 (exclusive) are called 5.3.2 5.2.140
These affixes come after the word
and after a stem called and after but not -
53002-
5 3 2 5.3.2 53026 5.3.2

1948 1083 after etc. 5.3.3 5.3.1
-
For there is the substitute when a
5 3 3 5.3.3 5.3.3

1949 640 affix follows. 5.3.4 5.3.2
The substitutes and come instead of
-
when a affix beginning with and
5 3 4 5.3.4 5.3.4

1950 914 respectively follows. 5.3.5 5.3.3
The substitute comes in the place of when -
5 3 5 5.3.5 5.3.5
1951 912 a affix follows. 5.3.6 5.3.4
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The is substituted for before a -
5 3 6 5.3.6 5.3.6

1952 3689 beginning with 5.3.7 5.3.5
The affix () comes after the word , a
5 3 7 5.3.7 5.3.7

1953 2266 and when ending in Ablative -5th case. 5.3.8 5.3.6
The affix () is substituted for --
5.4.44, 5.4.45 when
5 3 8 5.3.8 5.3.8

1955 1681 a and follow. 5.3.9 5.3.7
5 3 9 5.3.9 5.3.9

1956 2335 The affix () comes after and also. 5.3.10 5.3.8
The affix comes after , and when
5 3 10 5.3.10 5.3.10

1957 3615 ending in Locative -7th case. 5.3.11 5.3.9
The affix comes after ending in the Locative
5 3 11 5.3.11 5.3.11
1958 644 -7th case. 5.3.12 5.3.10
The affix () comes after ending in the
5 3 12 5.3.12 5.3.12
1959 1093 Locative -7th case. ()- 5.3.13 5.3.11
Optionally the affix also comes in the
(Vedas) after the word in the Locative -7th
5 3 13 5.3.13 5.3.13

1961 3125 case as well as other affixes. 5.3.14 5.3.12
The above affixes are seen coming after , a
and ending with other case-affixes also
besides the Locative -7th case and Ablative -5th
5 3 14 5.3.14 5.3.14

1963 629 case. 5.3.15 5.3.13
After 1. 'all' 2. 'one' 3. 'other' 4.
'what' 5 'which' and 6. 'that' when time is
denoted comes the affix , the words being in the
5 3 15 5.3.15 5.3.15

1964 3691 Locative -7th case. 5.3.16 5.3.14
After 'this' ending in the Locative -7th case
5 3 16 5.3.16 5.3.16

1965 643 comes the affix when time is denoted. 5.3.17 5.3.15
The word is anomalous having the same
5 3 17 5.3.17 5.3.17
1966 155 sense. Anomalous 5.3.18 5.3.16
The affix also comes after ending in the
5 3 18 5.3.18 5.3.18
1967 1847 Locative -7th case, denoting time. 5.3.19 5.3.17
After ending in the Locative -7th case when time
5 3 19 5.3.19 5.3.19

1968 1643 is denoted, comes the affixes and and 5.3.20 5.3.18
After the two (Nominal Stems) and
come respectively the affixes and in the
5 3 20 5.3.20 5.3.20

3499 1671 (Vedas) and also other affixes. and 5.3.21 5.3.19
The affix comes optionally in denoting time not
of the current day after the words , the
5 3 21 5.3.21 5.3.21

1969 172 and etc. 5.3.22 5.3.20
The following words are anomalous - 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8. 9. 10. 11.
12. 13. and 14.
5 3 22 5.3.22 5.3.22

1970
3586
Anomalous 5.3.23 5.3.21
The affix comes after the words etc. --
5.3.2 when we speak of
5 3 23 5.3.23 5.3.23

1971 2445 a kind or manner of being. 5.3.24 5.3.22
After comes the affix () in the same
5 3 24 5.3.24 5.3.24

1972 641 sense of a kind or manner of being. () 5.3.25 5.3.23
Also after comes the affix in the sense of
5 3 25 5.3.25 5.3.25

1973 1090 denoting a manner. 5.3.26 5.3.24
The affix comes in the sense of 'cause' after the
5 3 26 5.3.26 5.3.26

3500 1818 word in the (Vedas). 5.3.27 5.3.25
The affix ( ) comes after the words of
'direction', 'locality' or 'time' ending in the Locative
-7th case, Ablative -5th case, Nominative 1st-Case,
5 3 27 5.3.27 5.3.27

1974 1858 without a change of sense. ( ) 5.3.28 5.3.26
The affix () comes in the sense of
'direction', 'locality' or 'time' after the words 1.
5 3 28 5.3.28 5.3.28

1978 1825 and 2. () 5.3.29 5.3.27
5 3 29 5.3.29 5.3.29

1979 3210 ( ) after 1. and 2. () 5.3.30 5.3.28
After words of direction ending in there is
5 3 30 5.3.30 5.3.30

1980 74 elision of the affix 5.3.31 5.3.29
The words 1. and 2. are anomalous
5 3 31 5.3.31 5.3.31

1981 774 in the sense of 5.3.32 5.3.30
The word is anomalous in the sense of
5 3 32 5.3.32 5.3.32
1982 2343 5.3.33 5.3.31
The words and are anomalous in the
5 3 33 5.3.33 5.3.33

3501 2342 (Vedas) having the force of 5.3.34 5.3.32
The affix is added to the words 1. and 2.
5 3 34 5.3.34 5.3.34

1983 720 in the sense of 5.3.35 5.3.33
The affix () comes optionally after the words
1. and 2. in the sense of , when
the limit indicated is not remote and when it is not a
5 3 35 5.3.35 5.3.35

1984 919 substitute of the Ablative -5th case affix. () 5.3.36 5.3.34
The affix () comes after the word in
the sense of , but not as a substitute of the
5 3 36 5.3.36 5.3.36

1985 1822 Ablative -5th case. () 5.3.37 5.3.35
sense of as well as when the reference
5 3 37 5.3.37 5.3.37

1986 590 is to a distant limit. 5.3.38 5.3.36
The affixes () and come after
() and
come in the sense of when the reference is
5 3 38 5.3.38 5.3.38

1987 719 to a distant limit. 5.3.39 5.3.37
after 1. 2. and 3. ; and 1. 2. and
3. are the respective substitutes before this
5 3 39 5.3.39 5.3.39

1975 2427 affix. () 5.3.40 5.3.38
The same substitution takes place when the affix
5 3 40 5.3.40 5.3.40

1976 435 follows. 5.3.41 5.3.39
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The substitution of for is optional when
5 3 41 5.3.41 5.3.41

1977 3247 follows. 5.3.42 5.3.40
The affix comes after a (Nominal
Stem) denoting a Numeral when it means the mode
5 3 42 5.3.42 5.3.42
1988 3514 or manner of an action. 5.3.43 5.3.41
The affix comes after a Numeral when the sense
is a change in the apportionment or distribution of
5 3 43 5.3.43 5.3.43

1989 145 substances. 5.3.44 5.3.42
After the word the substitute comes optionally
5 3 44 5.3.44 5.3.44

1990 896 instead of ( ) 5.3.45 5.3.43
The substitute comes optionally in the place
5 3 45 5.3.45 5.3.45

1991 1966 of after the words 1. and 2. 5.3.46 5.3.44
The substitute () comes optionally in the
5 3 46 5.3.46 5.3.46
1992 917 place of after 1. and 2. () 5.3.47 5.3.45
5 3 47 5.3.47 5.3.47 1993 2856 The affix denotes something as insignificant. 5.3.48 5.3.46
After a (Nominal Stem) an ordinal number
ending in , comes the affix (the word
5 3 48 5.3.48 5.3.48

1994 2413 retaining its denotation) when a 'part' is meant. 5.3.49 5.3.47
After an ordinal numeral up to 11 exclusive, comes
the affix , the word retaining its denotation when
5 3 49 5.3.49 5.3.49

1995 2522 a 'part' is meant, but not so in the (Vedas). 5.3.50 5.3.48
The affixes () and after 1. and 2.
() and
when a 'part' is meant, but not in the
5 3 50 5.3.50 5.3.50

1996 3482 (Vedas). 5.3.51 5.3.49
After the words 1. and 2. there may
come respectively () and elision of the
affix when the meaning is a division of a measure
called or grain or the part of the body of a
5 3 51 5.3.51 5.3.51

1997 2771 beast respectively. () 5.3.52 5.3.50
After the word comes also the affix

( ) (the word retaining its denotation) when
5 3 52 5.3.52 5.3.52
1998 893 the sense is 'without a companion'. ( ) 5.3.53 5.3.51
The affix (with the feminine in ) comes after a
(Nominal Stem), the word retaining its
detonation when the meaning is 'this had been
5 3 53 5.3.53 5.3.53
1999 2690 before'. 5.3.54 5.3.52
After a (Nominal Stem) ending in the
Genitive 6th-Case comes the affix and also
in the sense of 'having belonged formerly to
5 3 54 5.3.54 5.3.54 2000 3492 somebody'. 5.3.55 5.3.53
When the sense is that of surpassing, there come
()
the affixes () and ( ) after a
and
(Nominal Stem) the word retaining its
5 3 55 5.3.55 5.3.55

2001 106 denotation. ( ) 5.3.56 5.3.54
So also after a finite verb, comes the affix
5 3 56 5.3.56 5.3.56
2002 1723 () when 'surpassing' is meant () 5.3.57 5.3.55
The affixes () and () come in the
sense of 'surpassing' after a (Nominal
Stem) or a finite-verb when it expresses
(comparison between) two things or when that
() and
which is added to it () is to be distinguished
5 3 57 5.3.57 5.3.57

2005 1969 from another. () 5.3.58 5.3.56
The two affixes beginning with a vowel i.e. and
5 3 58 5.3.58 5.3.58

2006 63 are added only after words denoting attributes. and 5.3.59 5.3.57
The affixes and come in the
(Vedas) after a (Nominal Stem) ending in and
5 3 59 5.3.59 5.3.59
2007 1760 5.3.60 5.3.58
For is substituted when the affixes and
5 3 60 5.3.60 5.3.60
2009 2505 and follow. 5.3.61 5.3.59
For is also substituted when the affixes and
5 3 61 5.3.61 5.3.61
2011 1532 and follow. 5.3.62 5.3.60
is also substituted for when the affixes and
5 3 62 5.3.62 5.3.62
2013 3281 and follow. 5.3.63 5.3.61
For is substituted and for is and
5 3 63 5.3.63 5.3.63

2014 252 when the affixes and follow. 5.3.64 5.3.62
Before the affixes and , is and
5 3 64 5.3.64 5.3.64

2019 2870 optionally substituted for and 5.3.65 5.3.63
The affixes and are elided when and
5 3 65 5.3.65 5.3.65

2020 3174 and follow. 5.3.66 5.3.64
The affix comes without a change of
connotation after a stem - nominal or verbal,
5 3 66 5.3.66 5.3.66
2021 2503 denoting 'praise'. 5.3.67 5.3.65
( ),
and
The affixes ( ), and ( )

come after a nominal or verbal stem which
5 3 67 5.3.67 5.3.67

2022 693 connotes a slight incompleteness. ( ) 5.3.68 5.3.66
Optionally to a declined noun may be added the
affix ( ) but it stands before, when the sense
5 3 68 5.3.68 5.3.68

2023 3234 is slight incompleteness. 5.3.69 5.3.67

The affix () comes after a case-
5 3 69 5.3.69 5.3.69

2024 2444 inflected word which expresses 'a speciality'. () 5.3.70 5.3.68
53070- The affix governs all stras as far as
5 3 70 5.3.70 53095 5.3.70
2025 2521 5.3.96. 5.3.71 5.3.69
The affix ( ) is added to an indeclinable
and to a Pronominal before the last vowel of those
5 3 71 5.3.71 5.3.71

2026 401 words in the sense of affixes. ( ) 5.3.72 5.3.70
The letter is the substitute of the final of an
5 3 72 5.3.72 5.3.72
2027 1043 indeclinable when the affix ( ) is added. 5.3.73 5.3.71
The affixes -- 5.3.70, and ( ) --
5.3.71, come after a
and
word, noun or verb, when something or somebody
5 3 73 5.3.73 5.3.73 2028 72 not known is spoken of. ( ) 5.3.74 5.3.72
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affixes -- 5.3.70, and ( ) --
and
5.3.71, come when the
5 3 74 5.3.74 5.3.74 2029 1105 thing is spoken of as contemptible. ( ) 5.3.75 5.3.73
The affix () comes in the above sense of
5 3 75 5.3.75 5.3.75
2030 3529 contemptible when the whole word is a Name. () 5.3.76 5.3.74
The above affixes come when compassion is
5 3 76 5.3.76 5.3.76
2031 185 denoted. () 5.3.77 5.3.75
Also as an expression of courteousness, the above
mentioned affix is added to that by which
5 3 77 5.3.77 5.3.77

2032 2218 compassion is shown. () 5.3.78 5.3.76
The affix is optionally added to a word of more
than two syllables being the name of a human
being, as an expression of compassion or of
5 3 78 5.3.78 5.3.78

2033 2613 courtesy joined with compassion. 5.3.79 5.3.77
Also the affixes and come after a word of
more than two syllables being the name of a human
being when compassion or courtesy joined with
5 3 79 5.3.79 5.3.79

2034 1359 compassion is expressed. and 5.3.80 5.3.78
According to the opinion of Eastern Grammarians
the affixes and also come after a human
5 3 80 5.3.80 5.3.80

2036 2535 name beginning with the word and 5.3.81 5.3.79
The affix is added to a Name of a human being
which expresses a special idea when compassion
5 3 81 5.3.81 5.3.81

2037 1502 or courtesy is meant. 5.3.82 5.3.80
The affix comes in the sense of compassion,
after a man-name ending in and this second
5 3 82 5.3.82 5.3.82

2039 68 member is elided before the affix. 5.3.83 5.3.81
When -- 5.3.78, or one of
the affixes beginning with a vowel --
5.3.79, 5.3.80, taught above,
follows, there is elision of all that portion which
comes after the second vowel of the name of a
5 3 83 5.3.83 5.3.83

2035 1567 human being. 5.3.84 5.3.82
There is elision of that portion of the word which
follows the third vowel in the case of a man-name
beginning with 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
when the above affixes or those having
5 3 84 5.3.84 5.3.84

2038 3426 initial vowel follow. 5.3.85 5.3.83
The above-mentioned affix -- 5.3.70,
and the rest come in expressing the small quantity
5 3 85 5.3.85 5.3.85 2040 373 or small number of anything. 5.3.86 5.3.84
The above-mentioned affixes -- 5.3.70,
come in expressing shortness of length or
5 3 86 5.3.86 5.3.86 2041 3977 diminutive. 5.3.87 5.3.85
The affix comes when the short thing is a
5 3 87 5.3.87 5.3.87
2042 3530 Name. 5.3.88 5.3.86
The affix comes after the words 1. 2. and
5 3 88 5.3.88 5.3.88

2043 1100 3. when expressing shortness of length. 5.3.89 5.3.87
The affix () comes in expressing diminution
5 3 89 5.3.89 5.3.89 2044 1102 after the word 'a jar'. () 5.3.90 5.3.88
The affix ( with feminine --
4.1.40) comes in expressing diminution after the
5 3 90 5.3.90 5.3.90

2045 1074 words 1. and 2. 5.3.91 5.3.89
The affix expresses slenderness after the
5 3 91 5.3.91 5.3.91
2046 3052 words 1. 2. 3. and 4. 5.3.92 5.3.90
After the words , and in determining of
the one out of two, comes the affix ( with
5 3 92 5.3.92 5.3.92

2047 1080 the elision of the final and ). 5.3.93 5.3.91
The affix ( with the elision of the last
syllable) comes after , and , optionally
when the object is the determining of the one out of
5 3 93 5.3.93 5.3.93

2048 3113 many, the question being that of caste. 5.3.94 5.3.92
After the word , according to the opinion of
Eastern Grammarians, may be added the affixes and
5 3 94 5.3.94 5.3.94

2049 891 and in the above senses. 5.3.95 5.3.93
The affix comes after a (Nominal
5 3 95 5.3.95 5.3.95
2050 376 Stem) in expressing scoffing. 5.3.96 5.3.94
The affix means also 'like this' when the
5 3 96 5.3.96 5.3.96
2051 663 imitation of a thing is to be expressed. 5.3.97 5.3.95
The affix comes in the sense of 'like this' when
5 3 97 5.3.97 5.3.97
2052 3533 the whole word so formed is a Name. 5.3.98 5.3.96
When in the same way a Man is denoted the affix is
elided by , the word retaining its number and
5 3 98 5.3.98 5.3.98

2053 3018 gender. 5.3.99 5.3.97
A similar elision of the affix takes place then
also, when the figure is made a means of
livelihood, it being presumed, that no traffic is
5 3 99 5.3.99 5.3.99

2054 1520 driven thereby. 5.3.100 5.3.98
After the words etc. there is similar elision of
the affix -- 5.3.96 and
5 3 100 5.3.100 5.3.100

2055 1912 5.3.97 expressing an image or a Name. . 5.3.101 5.3.99
The affix comes in the sense of 'like this' after
5 3 101 5.3.101 5.3.101 2056 3093 5.3.102 5.3.100
5 3 102 5.3.102 5.3.102 2057 3396 5.3.103 5.3.101
5 3 103 5.3.103 5.3.103
2058 3382 etc. . 5.3.104 5.3.102
5 3 104 5.3.104 5.3.104 2059 1930 The word is anomalous meaning 'beautiful'. Anomalous 5.3.105 5.3.103
The affix comes in the sense of 'like this' after the
5 3 105 5.3.105 5.3.105 2060 1125 word 5.3.106 5.3.104
The affix comes, also, only in the sense of 'like
this' after a compound noun which contains in itself
5 3 106 5.3.106 5.3.106
2061 3641 the force of 'like this'. 5.3.107 5.3.105
5 3 107 5.3.107 5.3.107
2062 3372 the words etc. . 5.3.108 5.3.106
5 3 108 5.3.108 5.3.108
2063 39 the words etc. . 5.3.109 5.3.107
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix also comes optionally after the word
5 3 109 5.3.109 5.3.109

2064 884 with the force of 'like this'. 5.3.110 5.3.108
The affix () comes in the sense of 'like this'
5 3 110 5.3.110 5.3.110

2065 988 after 1. and 2. () 5.3.111 5.3.109
sense of 'like this' after 1. 2. 3. and 4.
5 3 111 5.3.111 5.3.111

3502 2474 (). 5.3.112 5.3.110
The affix is added without changing the
connotation, to a word denoting a horde, but not
when the word is derived from the name of their
5 3 112 5.3.112 5.3.112

2066 2404 leader. 5.3.113 5.3.111
The affix comes after the name of a wild band
after a word ending in --
4.1.98, without change of sense, but not in the
5 3 113 5.3.113 5.3.113
1100 3338 feminine. 5.3.114 5.3.112
To a name expressing multitude living by the trade
of arms, is added the affix when it is the name
among but not when it is the name of a
5 3 114 5.3.114 5.3.114

2067 562 , nor when the word is 5.3.115 5.3.113
The affix comes after the word , a class
5 3 115 5.3.115 5.3.115

2068 3277 of persons living by trade of arms. 5.3.116 5.3.114
The affix () comes without changing the sense
after etc. and after six warrior-stocks called
5 3 116 5.3.116 5.3.116

2069 1848 () . 5.3.117 5.3.115
The affix comes after etc. and the affix
comes after etc. without changing the sense
5 3 117 5.3.117 5.3.117

2070 2339 when these words denote warrior classes. . 5.3.118 5.3.116
The affix comes without changing the sense,
5. 6. and 7.
when
5 3 118 5.3.118 5.3.118

2071 306 those words end in the Patronymic affix 5.3.119 5.3.117
The affixes etc. -- 5.3.112,
5 3 119 5.3.119 5.3.119 2072 1555 etc. are called 1. 2. 3.5.3.118
5.4.1 4. 5. 6.
when preceded by a numeral, the sense being
that of distributive relation, and the final of the stem
5 4 1 5.4.1 5.4.1

2073 2356 is elided. 5.4.2 5.3.119
Also when the sense is of a punishment or a
5 4 2 5.4.2 5.4.2

2074 1826 donation. 5.4.3 5.4.1
The affix comes in the sense of 'like that or
5 4 3 5.4.3 5.4.3

2075 3838 speciality', after the words etc. . 5.4.4 5.4.2
After a participle ending in comes the affix
when the meaning is something not yet wholly
5 4 4 5.4.4 5.4.4

2076 170 completed. 5.4.5 5.4.3
Not so when a word in the sense of 'half' precedes
5 4 5 5.4.5 5.4.5

2077 2078 such participle. 5.4.6 5.4.4
The affix comes after the word when it
5 4 6 5.4.6 5.4.6

2078 2627 means 'an article of dress'. 5.4.7 5.4.5
3. 4. and after a stem
5 4 7 5.4.7 5.4.7

2079 422 ending in 5.4.8 5.4.6
The affix optionally may be added without
change of sense to a stem ending in when it
does not mean a point of the compass used in the
5 4 8 5.4.8 5.4.8

2080 3183 feminine gender. 5.4.9 5.4.7
The affix () is added without a change of
sense to a stem ending in the word when it
5 4 9 5.4.9 5.4.9
2081 1507 means appropriateness. () 5.4.10 5.4.8
The affix () is optionally added to a stem
ending in if it is compounded with something
5 4 10 5.4.10 5.4.10

2082 3833 with which another is made to take an equal place. () 5.4.11 5.4.9
To the affixes and ( -- 1.1.22)
ordained to come after the word --
5.3.55, or after a word ending in --
6.3.17, or after a finite verb --
5.3.56, 5.3.57,
or after an indeclinable, is added the affix , but
not if the excess belongs to a substance (and not to
5 4 11 5.4.11 5.4.11

2004 1092 an action or quality) and 5.4.12 5.4.10
In the (Vedas) the affix () also is
added after the above, under similar
5 4 12 5.4.12 5.4.12

3503 330 circumstances. () 5.4.13 5.4.11
The affix comes after the word ,
5 4 13 5.4.13 5.4.13 2083 189 without changing its sense. 5.4.14 5.4.12
The affix () comes without changing the
sense, after a word ending in the affix () when
5 4 14 5.4.14 5.4.14
3216 1578 the word is feminine. () 5.4.15 5.4.13
The affix () comes without changing the
5 4 15 5.4.15 5.4.15 3219 86 sense, after a stem ending in the affix () 5.4.16 5.4.14
The affix () is added to the word
5 4 16 5.4.16 5.4.16

2084 3272 when a word expressing 'fish' is to be made. () 5.4.17 5.4.15
The affix is added to a numeral when the
5 4 17 5.4.17 5.4.17

2085 3515 repetition of such an action is to be counted. 5.4.18 5.4.16
The affix () is added to the numerals 1. 2.
and 3. in the sense of counting the
5 4 18 5.4.18 5.4.18
2086 1959 repetition of an action. () 5.4.19 5.4.17
The word is substituted for before the affix
5 4 19 5.4.19 5.4.19

2087 886 () when an action is to be counted. () 5.4.20 5.4.18
The affix is optionally added to the numeral to
count the repetition of an action occurring in a not
5 4 20 5.4.20 5.4.20

2088 3216 distant period of time. 5.4.21 5.4.19
The affix ( with the feminine in grave ) is
added to a word in Nominative 1st-Case in
construction when the sense is 'made thereof' or
5 4 21 5.4.21 5.4.21
2089 1608 'subsisting therein'. 5.4.22 5.4.20
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
When that, whereof something is made or subsists
in, is a multitude, then the affixes expressing a
great quantity -- 4.2.37 etc. may also be
5 4 22 5.4.22 5.4.22

2090 3655 used to denote 'made thereof, subsisting therein'. 5.4.23 5.4.21
The affix comes without changing sense, after
5 4 23 5.4.23 5.4.23

2091 175 the words 1. 2. 3. and 4. 5.4.24 5.4.22
After a stem ending in the word being in the
Dative -4th Case in construction comes the affix
5 4 24 5.4.24 5.4.24

2092 1911 () in the sense of 'appointed for it'. () 5.4.25 5.4.23
The affix () comes after the words 1. and
2. being in the Dative -4th Case in construction
5 4 25 5.4.25 5.4.25

2093 2359 when the meaning is 'for the purpose of that'. () 5.4.26 5.4.24
The affix comes after in the Dative -4th
Case in construction, in the sense of 'for the
5 4 26 5.4.26 5.4.26
2094 104 purpose of that'. 5.4.27 5.4.25
The affix comes after without change of
5 4 27 5.4.27 5.4.27 2095 1916 sense. 5.4.28 5.4.26
The affix comes after without change of
5 4 28 5.4.28 5.4.28 2096 395 sense. 5.4.29 5.4.27
The affix comes after the words etc. without
5 4 29 5.4.29 5.4.29 2097 2861 changing their sense. .. 5.4.30 5.4.28
The affix comes without changing the sense,
5 4 30 5.4.30 5.4.30
2098 3036 after when it means a precious stone. 5.4.31 5.4.29
The affix comes after when it means
5 4 31 5.4.31 5.4.31
2099 3074 color which is not permanent. 5.4.32 5.4.30
The affix comes after the word meaning
5 4 32 5.4.32 5.4.32
2100 2900 a substance dyed red. 5.4.33 5.4.31
The affix is added to the word when it
5 4 33 5.4.33 5.4.33

2101 1064 means a passing colour or dyed with colour. 5.4.34 5.4.32
The affix comes without changing the sense
5 4 34 5.4.34 5.4.34
2102 3172 after the word etc. . 5.4.35 5.4.33
The affix comes after when it means the
5 4 35 5.4.35 5.4.35
2103 3140 purport of the message spoken by another. 5.4.36 5.4.34
The affix comes after the word
'occupation' when it occurs in connection therewith
(i.e. when it is the result of an oral message or
5 4 36 5.4.36 5.4.36

2104 1653 commission). 5.4.37 5.4.35
The affix comes after when it does not
5 4 37 5.4.37 5.4.37
2105 945 mean a species. 5.4.38 5.4.36
The affix comes after the words etc. (the
5 4 38 5.4.38 5.4.38
2106 2456 words retaining their sense). . 5.4.39 5.4.37
The affix comes after (the word retaining
5 4 39 5.4.39 5.4.39 2107 2796 its sense). 5.4.40 5.4.38
The affixes and come after when it
5 4 40 5.4.40 5.4.40
2108 3696 means 'excellence'. and 5.4.41 5.4.39
and
In the (Vedas) the affixes and
-
come after 1. and 2. when excellence is
5 4 41 5.4.41 5.4.41

3504 3276 denoted. 5.4.42 5.4.40
After a word signifying much or little, comes the
affix optionally when the word stands in
5 4 42 5.4.42 5.4.42

2109 2617 agreement with a verb (as ) 5.4.43 5.4.41
The affix comes optionally after crude forms
denoting numbers and words denoting units of a
coin in the singular number when a distributive
5 4 43 5.4.43 5.4.43

2110 3522 sense is to be expressed (and the word is a ). 5.4.44 5.4.42
The affix comes after that Ablative -5th case
which is ordained owing to the union with the
5 4 44 5.4.44 5.4.44

2111 2467 word 5.4.45 5.4.43
The affix comes after that Ablative -5th case
which has the force of an when this
relation arises owing to the union with the
5 4 45 5.4.45 5.4.45

2112 289 verbs (passive of ) and 5.4.46 5.4.44
The affix comes after that Instrumental -3rd
case which does not denote an agent and is
governed by a verb having the sense of 'to excel',
5 4 46 5.4.46 5.4.46

2113 103 'not to give away' and 'to blame'. 5.4.47 5.4.45
And The affix comes optionally after a word
ending in the Instrumental -3rd case-affix when
such a word is joined to the verb or the noun
5 4 47 5.4.47 5.4.47
2114 3944 not denoting an agent. 5.4.48 5.4.46
The affix comes optionally after a word ending
in the Genitive 6th-Case when the sense is that of a
5 4 48 5.4.48 5.4.48
2115 3493 party-name or function. 5.4.49 5.4.47
The affix comes optionally after a word
denoting a disease ending in the Genitive 6th-Case
5 4 49 5.4.49 5.4.49

2116 2958 when the healing of the same is denoted. 5.4.50 5.4.48
The affix comes after a word when the agent
has attained to the new state expressed by the
word, what the thing previously was not and when
the verbs 'to make', 'to be' and 'to be' are
5 4 50 5.4.50 5.4.50

2117 315 conjoined with it. 5.4.51 5.4.49
3. 4. 5. and 6. and there is
5 4 51 5.4.51 5.4.51

2121 346 elision of their final consonant. 5.4.52 5.4.50
The affix may be used optionally in the sense
of when something is changed in all its parts
5 4 52 5.4.52 5.4.52

2122 3233 into something else. 5.4.53 5.4.51
The affix comes after a word in the sense of
when it is in construction with the verb
and the meaning is that all things of a kind are
5 4 53 5.4.53 5.4.53
2124 314 changed into something else, though partially. 5.4.54 5.4.52
The affix comes after a word expressing 'a
master or lord' in the sense of 'dependent upon this'
when it is in conjunction with the above verbs 1.
5 4 54 5.4.54 5.4.54
2125 1626 'to make' 2. 'to be' 3. 'to be' and 4. 5.4.55 5.4.53
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix comes in the sense of 'to be given to
that' as well as the affix , in conjunction with
the above verbs 1. 'to make' 2. 'to be' 3.
5 4 55 5.4.55 5.4.55
2126 1907 'to be' and 4. and 5.4.56 5.4.54
After the words 1. 2. 3. 4. and 5.
ending in the Accusative -2nd case or Locative
-7th case, the affix is diversely used, having the
force of the Accusative -2nd case or Locative -7th
5 4 56 5.4.56 5.4.56

2127 1914 case. 5.4.57 5.4.55
The affix comes after the half of a word
denoting an imitation of an inarticulate sound when
such half consists of at least two syllables and
5 4 57 5.4.57 5.4.57

2128 399 when it is not followed by the quotation-mark 5.4.58 5.4.56
The affix comes after the word 1. 2.
3. and 4. when connected with the
verb 'to make' and meaning 'to plough in such a
5 4 58 5.4.58 5.4.58

2129 1137 way'. 5.4.59 5.4.57
The affix comes after a numeral followed by the
word the sense being 'to plough so many
5 4 59 5.4.59 5.4.59

2130 3519 times'. 5.4.60 5.4.58
The affix comes after the word when 'to
make' follows, when the sense is that of
5 4 60 5.4.60 5.4.60
2131 3624 'neglecting'. 5.4.61 5.4.59
followed by the verb 'to make' when the
5 4 61 5.4.61 5.4.61

2132 3602 sense is that of causing intense pain. 5.4.62 5.4.60
The affix comes after the word followed
by the verb 'to make' when the sense is 'to
5 4 62 5.4.62 5.4.62

2133 2204 disembowel'. 5.4.63 5.4.61
followed by 'to make' when the meaning is
5 4 63 5.4.63 5.4.63

2134 3746 ('to concede', 'gratify') 'to go with the grain'. 5.4.64 5.4.62
The affix comes after the word followed by
5 4 64 5.4.64 5.4.64

2135 1889 'to make' when the sense is that of roasting. 5.4.65 5.4.63
5 4 65 5.4.65 5.4.65
2136 3417 'to make' when the sense is that of roasting. 5.4.66 5.4.64
5 4 66 5.4.66 5.4.66

2137 3580 'to make' when not meaning 'to swear'. 5.4.67 5.4.65
5 4 67 5.4.67 5.4.67
2138 2724 'to make' in the sense of 'to shave'. 5.4.68 5.4.66
54068- The following affixes are added to the ends of
5 4 68 5.4.68 54160 5.4.68 676 3642 compounds without changing their sense. 5.4.69 5.4.67
The affixes are not applied to those words
5 4 69 5.4.69
5.4.69
954 2043 whose first member is a word expressing praise. 5.4.70 5.4.68
The affix is not applied to a word
5 4 70 5.4.70
5.4.70
955 1088 preceded by in the sense of reproach. 5.4.71 5.4.69
The affix does not come after a -
of words like etc. herein taught, when
5 4 71 5.4.71
5.4.71
956 2092 the negative particle precedes them. 5.4.72 5.4.70
The affix does not optionally come after a
5 4 72 5.4.72
5.4.72
957 2280 - of the word with 5.4.73 5.4.71
The affix comes after a denoting
numeral except when the last term of such is
5 4 73 5.4.73
5.4.73

851 2606 and 5.4.74 5.4.72
The affix comes after 1. 2. 3. 4.
and 5. when finals is compound, but not so
5 4 74 5.4.74
5.4.74

940 846 when is in conjunction with 5.4.75 5.4.73
5 4 75 5.4.75
5.4.75

943 58 when 1. 2. and 3. precede them. 5.4.76 5.4.74
The affix comes after the word when not
5 4 76 5.4.76
5.4.76

944 21 meaning 'the eye'. 5.4.77 5.4.75
The following words are irregularly formed by
adding the affix - 1. 2. 3. 4.
- 5. 6. 7. 8.

9. - 10. 11. 12.
- 13. 14. 15. 16.
- 17. - 18. 19. -
20. - 21. 22. - 23. - 24.
5 4 77 5.4.77
5.4.77

945

45

25. Irregular 5.4.78 5.4.76
preceded in a compound by the words or
5 4 78 5.4.78
5.4.78

946 2631 5.4.79 5.4.77
preceded by the words 1. 2. 3. in a
5 4 79 5.4.79
5.4.79

947 385 compound. 5.4.80 5.4.78
The affix comes after the words 1. and
2. when they follow the word in a
5 4 80 5.4.80
5.4.80

948 3467 compound. 5.4.81 5.4.79
5 4 81 5.4.81
5.4.81

949 268 follows 1. 2. and 3. in a compound. 5.4.82 5.4.80
follows the word in a compound and has the
5 4 82 5.4.82
5.4.82

950 2472 sense of the Locative. 5.4.83 5.4.81
The word is irregularly formed by adding the
affix and has the sense of 'suited to the length
5 4 83 5.4.83
5.4.83

951 188 of the cows'. 5.4.84 5.4.82
The words 1. and 2. are irregularly
5 4 84 5.4.84
5.4.84

952 1973 formed meaning a 'altar'. Irregular 5.4.85 5.4.83
The affix comes after the word preceded
5 4 85 5.4.85
5.4.85

953 786 by an (Preposition) in a compound. 5.4.86 5.4.84
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix comes after a - ending in
the word when a numeral or an indeclinable
5 4 86 5.4.86

5.4.86

786 1603 precedes it. 5.4.87 5.4.85
preceded by or or a word denoting a
portion of night, or or when the
compound is a - as well as when a numeral
5 4 87 5.4.87

5.4.87

787 450 or an indeclinable precedes 5.4.88 5.4.86
For is substituted when preceded by the
above words ( or or a word denoting a
portion of night, or or ) (and taking the
affix to be mentioned in
5 4 88 5.4.88

5.4.88
790 456 5.4.91). 5.4.89 5.4.87
This substitution of for does not take
place after a numeral when it forms a collective
5 4 89 5.4.89

5.4.89

793 2074 noun meaning a number of days taken as a unity. 5.4.90 5.4.88
And also after the word that stands last in the
above list (i.e. ) and this substitution does
5 4 90 5.4.90

5.4.90
794 713 not take place. 5.4.91 5.4.89
The affix is added to the words 1. 2.
and 3. when standing at the end of a -
5 4 91 5.4.91

5.4.91

788 2924 5.4.92 5.4.90
The affix comes after standing at the end of a
- when no elision of a -affix has
5 4 92 5.4.92

5.4.92

729 1328 taken place in forming such a 5.4.93 5.4.91
The affix comes after the word standing at
the end of a - when it has the sense of
5 4 93 5.4.93

5.4.93

795 29 'the most excellent of its kind'. 5.4.94 5.4.92
The affix comes after 1. 2. 3.
and 4. when at the end of a - it
5 4 94 5.4.94

5.4.94

796 230 denotes a genus or a name. 5.4.95 5.4.93
The affix comes after when preceded by 1.
5 4 95 5.4.95

5.4.95
797 1342 and 2. in a - 5.4.96 5.4.94
The affix comes after the word preceded by
5 4 96 5.4.96

5.4.96

798 107 in a - 5.4.97 5.4.95
The affix comes after the word ending in a
- when another thing not being a living
5 4 97 5.4.97

5.4.97

799 767 object is compared with it. 5.4.98 5.4.96
The affix comes after when preceded by
1. 2. 3. in a - as well as
5 4 98 5.4.98

5.4.98

800 718 when a thing is compared with it. 5.4.99 5.4.97
The affix comes after the word when at the
end of a (Numeral Determinative
5 4 99 5.4.99

5.4.99

801 2160 Compound). 5.4.100 5.4.98
5 4 100 5.4.100

5.4.100
802 356 preceded by the word in a - 5.4.101 5.4.99
To the word , at the end of a
(Numeral Determinative Compound) and to the
same, when preceded by the word in a -
the affix is added, according to the
5 4 101 5.4.101

5.4.101

803 1255 opinion of the Eastern Grammarians. 5.4.102 5.4.100
The affix is added to the word when
preceded by 1. or 2. in a -
5 4 102 5.4.102

5.4.102

In the (Vedas) the affix comes after a -
5 4 103 5.4.103

5.4.103

3505 180 in Neuter Gender ending in or - 5.4.104 5.4.102
The affix comes after the word in a -
when the compound denotes a person
5 4 104 5.4.104

5.4.104

805 2629 belonging to a certain country. 5.4.105 5.4.103
preceded by the words 1. and 2. in a -
5 4 105 5.4.105

5.4.105

806 1108 5.4.106 5.4.104
The affix comes after a denoting in
a palatal or a or or when the compound is a
5 4 106 5.4.106

5.4.106

930 1935 (collective noun taken as a unity). 5.4.107 5.4.105
The affix comes after the words etc. when
5 4 107 5.4.107

5.4.107

677 409 forming an .. 5.4.108 5.4.106
The affix comes after an
5 4 108 5.4.108

5.4.108
678 179 ending in as the final of a compound. 5.4.109 5.4.107
The affix comes optionally after an
ending with a neuter word whose final
5 4 109 5.4.109

5.4.109

680 2117 syllable is 5.4.110 5.4.108
5 4 110 5.4.110

5.4.110

681 2103 ending in 1. 2. and 3. 5.4.111 5.4.109
5 4 111 5.4.111

5.4.111
682 1540 ending in a letter of class (a mute letter). 5.4.112 5.4.110
The affix comes after an
ending in according to the opinion of the
5 4 112 5.4.112

5.4.112

683 1292 Grammarian 5.4.113 5.4.111
, final in a and denoting a portion
5 4 113 5.4.113

5.4.113

852 2607 of one's body. 5.4.114 5.4.112
The affix comes after a ending in
the word when the compound means 'a
5 4 114 5.4.114

5.4.114

853 38 piece of wood'. 5.4.115 5.4.113
5 4 115 5.4.115

5.4.115

854 1964 and preceded by 1. and 2. 5.4.116 5.4.114
The affix comes after a ending in a
5 4 116 5.4.116

5.4.116

832 301 feminine ordinal numeral or in the word 5.4.117 5.4.115
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
5 4 117 5.4.117

5.4.117

855 246 and preceded by 1. and 2. 5.4.118 5.4.116
The affix is added to the word final in a
when it expresses a name whereby
is substituted for , but not so when the
5 4 118 5.4.118

5.4.118

856 78 word precedes the word 5.4.119 5.4.117
The affix comes after the word final in a
when an (Preposition) precedes
5 4 119 5.4.119

5.4.119

858 781 it and is substituted for 5.4.120 5.4.118
The following -s are irregularly formed by
adding - 1. - 2. - 3. - 4. 5.
5 4 120 5.4.120

5.4.120

860 3766 6. - 7. - and 8. - 5.4.121 5.4.119
The affix comes optionally after the words 1.
and 2. final in a when
preceded by a negative particle or by the words 1.
5 4 121 5.4.121

5.4.121

861 2096 and 2. 5.4.122 5.4.120
The affix () comes invariably after 1.
and 2. final in a when the above
5 4 122 5.4.122

5.4.122

862 2185 particles 1. 2. and 3. precede them. () 5.4.123 5.4.121
5 4 123 5.4.123

5.4.123

3506 2585 The form is valid in the Vedas. 5.4.124 5.4.122
The affix ( ) comes after the word
when it is the last member of a and is
itself the only word without any other word joined
5 4 124 5.4.124

5.4.124

863 1994 with it or when the first member is a single word. ( ) 5.4.125 5.4.123
The word stands at the ending of a
when preceded by 1. 2. 3. and 4.
5 4 125 5.4.125

5.4.125

864 1489 5.4.126 5.4.124
The form is an irregularly formed
5 4 126 5.4.126

5.4.126

865 1824 when used in conjunction with a hunter. Irregular 5.4.127 5.4.125
The affix comes after a when the
5 4 127 5.4.127

5.4.127

866 609 compound denotes the reciprocity of an action. , 5.4.128
, , , ,
5.4.126
5 4 128 5.4.128

5.4.128

867 1967 The words etc. are valid forms of 5.4.129 5.4.127
After the words and there is the substitution
5 4 129 5.4.129

5.4.129

868 2509 of for when forming the 5.4.130 5.4.128
The substitution of for when the word
5 4 130 5.4.130

5.4.130

869 842 precedes it. 5.4.131 5.4.129
The syllable is the substitute of the final
5 4 131 5.4.131

5.4.131
483 836 in a 5.4.132 5.4.130
The is the substitute of the final of in a
5 4 132 5.4.132

5.4.132

870 1989 5.4.133 5.4.131
The substitution of does not optionally take
5 4 133 5.4.133

5.4.133
871 3123 place when the is a name. 5.4.134 5.4.132
For the final of is substituted in a
5 4 134 5.4.134

5.4.134
872 1512 5.4.135 5.4.133
For the final of is substituted when preceded
5 4 135 5.4.135

5.4.135

874 1271 by 1. 2. 3. and 4. in a 5.4.136 5.4.134
The is substituted for the final of at the
5 4 136 5.4.136

5.4.136

875 371 end of a when means 'a little'. 5.4.137 5.4.135
The is substituted for the final of at the
end of a when preceded by a word
5 4 137 5.4.137

5.4.137

876 766 denoting a thing with which it is compared. 5.4.138 5.4.136
The final of is elided when it is at the end of a
preceded by a word denoting a thing
with which it is compared but not so when such
5 4 138 5.4.138

5.4.138

877 2358 word is etc. 5.4.139 5.4.137
The words etc. have been formed by the
5 4 139 5.4.139

5.4.139

878 1114 similar elision of the of 5.4.140 5.4.138
The final of is elided also when a numeral or
5 4 140 5.4.140

5.4.140

879 3521 the word precedes it in a 5.4.141 5.4.139
For is substituted in a when a
numeral or precedes it and the whole word
5 4 141 5.4.141

5.4.141

880 3062 expresses a stage of life i.e. an age. 5.4.142 5.4.140
For is substituted in the (Vedas)
5 4 142 5.4.142

5.4.142
3507 1444 when final in a 5.4.143 5.4.141
For is substituted when in the feminine
5 4 143 5.4.143

5.4.143

881 3818 gender denoting a name. 5.4.144 5.4.142
Optionally is substituted for in a
when it is preceded by the words and
5 4 144 5.4.144

5.4.144

882 3228 5.4.145 5.4.143
The substitution of for is optional in a
when it is preceded by a word ending
5 4 145 5.4.145

5.4.145

883 31 in 1. or by 2. 3. and 4. 5.4.146 5.4.144
The final letter of is dropped in a
5 4 146 5.4.146

5.4.146

884 957 when it denotes age or condition of animals. 5.4.147 5.4.145
The word formed by the elision of the
5 4 147 5.4.147

5.4.147
885 1805 final of is the name of a mountain. 5.4.148 5.4.146
After and the final of is elided in a
5 4 148 5.4.148

5.4.148

886 750 5.4.149 5.4.147
After the final of is optionally elided in a
5 4 149 5.4.149

5.4.149

887 2415 5.4.150 5.4.148
denoting 'a friend' and 'a foe'
5 4 150 5.4.150

5.4.150

888 3773 respectively. 5.4.151 5.4.149
The affix comes after etc. final in a
5 4 151 5.4.151

5.4.151

889 817 5.4.152 5.4.150
The affix is added to a the last
member of which ends in when a feminine word
5 4 152 5.4.152

5.4.152
890 653 is denoted 5.4.153 5.4.151
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The affix is added to a the last
member of which is a feminine word ending in long
or defined as words or which ends in a
5 4 153 5.4.153

5.4.153
833 2108 short 5.4.154 5.4.152
After all other not covered by the
foregoing rules, may optionally be added the affix
5 4 154 5.4.154

5.4.154

891 3429 5.4.155 5.4.153
The affix does not come after a
5 4 155 5.4.155

5.4.155
893 2075 when a name is meant. 5.4.156 5.4.154
5 4 156 5.4.156

5.4.156
894 686 the last member of which ends in the affix 5.4.157 5.4.155
5 4 157 5.4.157

5.4.157
895 3059 ending in the word when it means 'praised'. 5.4.158 5.4.156
5 4 158 5.4.158

5.4.158

3508 855 ending in short in the (Vedas). 5.4.159 5.4.157
The affix does not come after the words
and final in a when they mean
5 4 159 5.4.159

5.4.159

896 2143 organs of the body. 5.4.160 5.4.158
The word is irregularly formed without
adding the affix though the last word is a
5 4 160 5.4.160

5.4.160
897 2213 word. 6.1.1 5.4.159
In the room of the first portion, containing a single
6 1 1 6.1.1 6.1.1 2175 889 vowel, there are two. 6.1.2 5.4.160
Of that whose first syllable begins with a vowel,
there are two in the room of the second portion
6 1 2 6.1.2 6.1.2 2176 64 containing a single vowel. 6.1.3 6.1.1
The letters , , and being the first letter of a
compound consonant and being part of the second
6 1 3 6.1.3 6.1.3
2446 2039 syllable, are not reduplicated. 6.1.4 6.1.2
6 1 4 6.1.4 6.1.4 2178 2434 The first of the two is called or Reduplicate. 6.1.5 6.1.3
6 1 5 6.1.5 6.1.5
426 813 The both are collectively called 6.1.6 6.1.4
So also the six roots beginning with are called
6 1 6 6.1.6 6.1.6
428 1476 , , , 6.1.5
6.1.7 , , ,
In the room of a short vowel of the Reduplicate of
6 1 7 6.1.7 6.1.7

3509 1746 the the roots etc., a long is susbtituted. 6.1.8 6.1.6
When the tense-affixes of the Perfect follow, there
is reduplication of the root, which is not already
6 1 8 6.1.8 6.1.8

2177 2992 reduplicated. 6.1.9 6.1.7
Of a non-reduplicate root ending in
(Desiderative) or (Intensive) affixes, there is
6 1 9 6.1.9 6.1.9

2395 3598 reduplication. 6.1.10 6.1.8
Of a non-reduplicate root there is reduplication
6 1 10 6.1.10 6.1.10
2490 3461 when the follows. 6.1.11 6.1.9
Of a non-reduplicate root there is reduplication
6 1 11 6.1.11 6.1.11
2315 1382 when the affix of the Aorist follows. 6.1.12 6.1.10
The participles , , and are
6 1 12 6.1.12 6.1.12 3629 1853 irregularly formed without reduplication. 6.1.13 6.1.11
There is vocalisation of the semi-vowel of the
affix 4.1.78 when followed in a -
6 1 13 6.1.13 6.1.13 1003 3501 compound, by the words and 6.1.14 6.1.12
There is vocalisation of the affix 4.1.78 when - -
6 1 14 6.1.14 6.1.14 1004 2578 the word follows in a compound. 6.1.15 6.1.13
The semi-vowels of the roots , , and
verbs are vocalised when followed by an affix
6 1 15 6.1.15 6.1.15 2409 3042 having an indicatory - 6.1.16 6.1.14
There is vocalisation of the semi-vowels of the
following verbs, when an affix having an indicatory
or follows - 'to take', 'to become old',
'to weave', 'to strike', 'to shine', 'to
deceive', 'to cut', 'to ask' and 'to
6 1 16 6.1.16 6.1.16

2412 1339 cook, to fry'. - 6.1.17 6.1.15
There takes place a vocalisation of the semi-vowels
of the reduplicate ( ) of both 6.1.15
6 1 17 6.1.17 6.1.17

2408 2996 and 6.1.16 words, when affixes of follow. 6.1.18 6.1.16
Of the causative verb 'to casuse one to sleep',
there is vocalisation of the semi-vowel, when the
6 1 18 6.1.18 6.1.18 2584 3891 affix of the Reduplicated Aorist follows. 6.1.19 6.1.17
There is vocalisation of the semi-vowel, of the
verbs 'to sleep', 'to shout' and 'to
cover', when followed by the affix of the
6 1 19 6.1.19 6.1.19 2645 3869 Intensive. 6.1.20 6.1.18
There is not vocalisation of the semi-vowel of ,
6 1 20 6.1.20 6.1.20 2646 2066 when the affix follows. 6.1.21 6.1.19
The verb is substituted for the verb 'to
worship, to observe', when the Intensive affix
6 1 21 6.1.21 6.1.21 2647 1408 follows. 6.1.22 6.1.20
The is the substitute of 'to swell', the
6 1 22 6.1.22 6.1.22 3044 3848 affixes follow. 6.1.23 6.1.21
The verb ( and ) when preceded by
changes its semi-vowel to a vowel, when a
6 1 23 6.1.23 6.1.23 3033 3815 affix follows. 6.1.24 6.1.22
There is vocalisation of the semi-vowel of the root
( ) 'to go' when the affix follows, when
6 1 24 6.1.24 6.1.24 3020 1929 the sense is 'coagulation' or 'cold to touch'. 6.1.25 6.1.23
There is vocalisation of preceded by the
6 1 25 6.1.25 6.1.25 3022 2473 , when the affixes follow. 6.1.26 6.1.24
There is optionally the vocalisation of the
followed by affixes, when the s and
6 1 26 6.1.26 6.1.26 3023 3245 precede it. 6.1.27 6.1.25
Optionally is formed in the sense of 'cooked', by
the vocalisation of the semi-vowel of before the
6 1 27 6.1.27 6.1.27 3067 3421 affix 6.1.28 6.1.26
is optionally the substitute of the root 'to
6 1 28 6.1.28 6.1.28 3072 2443 increase' before the affixes. 6.1.29 6.1.27
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
There is substitution of for when the affixes
6 1 29 6.1.29 6.1.29 2327 2997 of the Perfect ( ) and the Intensive ( ) follow. 6.1.30 6.1.28
There is optionally the vocalisation of the semi-
vowel before the affixes of the Perfect and the
6 1 30 6.1.30 6.1.30 2420 3229 Intensive. 6.1.31 6.1.29
There is optionally the vocalisation of the semi-
vowel, in the causative of , when followed by
6 1 31 6.1.31 6.1.31 2601 1591 the Desiderative and the Aorist affix. 6.1.32 6.1.30
There is the vocalisation of the semi-vowel of the
causative of before the Desiderative and the
6 1 32 6.1.32 6.1.32 2586 3982 Reduplicated Aorist affixes. 6.1.33 6.1.31
There is vocalisation of the semi-vowel of in the
6 1 33 6.1.33 6.1.33 2417 319 reduplicated form, in both the syllables. 6.1.34 6.1.32
In the , the semi-vowel of this root is
6 1 34 6.1.34 6.1.34 3510 2591 diversely vocalised. 6.1.35 6.1.33
-
6 1 35 6.1.35 6.1.35 3511 1409 For is diversely substituted in the 6.1.36 6.1.34
In the the following irregular forms are met
with - , , , , , -
6 1 36 6.1.36 6.1.36

3512 285 , , , 6.1.37 6.1.35
When a semi-vowel base has been vocalised, there
is no vocalisation of the other semi-vowel that may
6 1 37 6.1.37 6.1.37 363 2077 precede it in the same word. 6.1.38 6.1.36
In the substituted root 2.4.41, the in the
6 1 38 6.1.38 6.1.38 2413 2993 Perfect is not vocalised. 6.1.39 6.1.37
Before the tense-affixes of the Perfect that have an
indicatory 1.2.5, for the of may optionally be
6 1 39 6.1.39 6.1.39 2414 3086 substituted a 6.1.40 6.1.38
The semi-vowel of 'to weave' is not vocalised in
6 1 40 6.1.40 6.1.40 2415 3303 the Perfect. 6.1.41 6.1.39
The semi-vowel of 'to weave' is not vocalised in
6 1 41 6.1.41 6.1.41 3339 3037 the Participial affix follows. 6.1.42 6.1.40
The semi-vowel of 'to grow old' is not vocalised
6 1 42 6.1.42 6.1.42 3340 1533 when the affix follows. 6.1.43 6.1.41
The semi-vowel of ( ) 'to cover' is not
6 1 43 6.1.43 6.1.43 3341 3329 vocalised when the affix follows. 6.1.44 6.1.42
The vocalisation may optionally take place when
6 1 44 6.1.44 6.1.44 3342 3211 preceded by takes the affix 6.1.45 6.1.43
In a root, which is the system of grammatical
instruction (i.e. the ), ends with a dipthong (
, , , ), there is the substitution of for the
dipthong, provided that no affix with an indicatory
6 1 45 6.1.45 6.1.45 2370 529 follows it. 6.1.46 6.1.44
There is not the substitution of for the dipthong
6 1 46 6.1.46 6.1.46 2416 2070 of the root when the affixes of the Perfect follow. 6.1.47 6.1.45
In the roots and 'to move', there is the
substitution of the for the dipthong when the affix
6 1 47 6.1.47 6.1.47 3185 3851 follows. - 6.1.48 6.1.46
The substitution of for the dipthong takes place
in the causatives of the roots 'to buy, to - -
6 1 48 6.1.48 6.1.48 2600 1209 purchase', 'to study' and 'to conquer'. 6.1.49 6.1.47
The substitution of takes for the dipthong in the
causative of , when it does not refer to the next
6 1 49 6.1.49 6.1.49 2602 3737 life. - -- 6.1.50 6.1.48
And there is substitution of for the finals of 'to
hurt', 'to scatter' and 'to decay' when the affix
follows, as well as before those affixes which
6 1 50 6.1.50 6.1.50 2508 2784 demand this substitution for the dipthong. - 6.1.51 6.1.49
There is optionally the susbtitution of for the final
of 'to adhere', in the , when the affix
follows or such an affix as would demand this
6 1 51 6.1.51 6.1.51 2509 3220 substitution of the dipthong. -- - 6.1.52 6.1.50
There is optionally the substitution of in the room
of the dipthong of the verb 'to suffer pain', in - -
6 1 52 6.1.52 6.1.52 3513 1257 the 6.1.53 6.1.51
of the dipthong of the root 'to exert' when
preceded by the preposition and taking the affix - -
6 1 53 6.1.53 6.1.53 3375 269 6.1.54 6.1.52
--
of the dipthong of the roots and when in the
6 1 54 6.1.54 6.1.54 2569 1423 Causative. - 6.1.55 6.1.53
of the dipthong of the root in the causative, when
6 1 55 6.1.55 6.1.55 2603 2453 meaning 'to conceive an embryo'. - - 6.1.56 6.1.54
of the dipthong of the root 'to fear' in the
causative, when the fear is produced directly
6 1 56 6.1.56 6.1.56 2593 2622 through the agent of the causative. - 6.1.57 6.1.55
There is invariably the substitution of for the
dipthong of the root 'to smile' in the causative,
when the astonishment is produced directly through
6 1 57 6.1.57 6.1.57 2569 2183 the agent of the causative. - 6.1.58 6.1.56
The augment () comes after the or 'to
create' and 'to see', when an affix beginning
with a letter (the Mute and the Sibilant) follows:
6 1 58 6.1.58 -
6.1.58 2405 3781 provided that it has no indicatory - 6.1.59 6.1.57
The augment () augment comes optionally
after the of those roots which are exhibited in the
as , when such roots end in a
consonant having a has penultimate and are
followed by an affix beginning with a mute or
6 1 59 6.1.59 -
6.1.59

2402 198 sibilant and not having an indicatory 6.1.60 6.1.58
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
6 1 60 6.1.60 - 6.1.60 3514 3406 The word 'head', is found in 6.1.61 6.1.59
There is the substitution of this stem for
6 1 61 6.1.61 - 6.1.61 1667 2886 when a -affix beginning with follows. 6.1.62 6.1.60
There is the substitution of for when a
6 1 62 6.1.62 - 6.1.62 50 -affix beginning with a vowel follows. 6.1.63 6.1.61
In the weak cases (beginning with the accusative
plural) the following stems are substituted: for
, for , for , for ,
for , for , for , for ,
for , for , for ,
6 1 63 6.1.63 - 6.1.63

228 2294 for and for 6.1.64 6.1.62
There is the substitution of in the room of the
being the initial of a verbal root as enunciated in the
6 1 64 6.1.64 - 6.1.64 2264 2001 6.1.65 6.1.63
There is the substitution of for the initial of the
6 1 65 6.1.65 - 6.1.65 2268 1588 root in the 6.1.66 6.1.64
There is -substitution (elision) of the and
6 1 66 6.1.66 6.1.66 873 3033 when followed by any consonant except 6.1.67 6.1.65
There is the elision of the affix when reduced to
6 1 67 6.1.67 6.1.67 375 3307 the single letter 6.1.68 6.1.66
After a consonant there is the elision of the
nominative affix and the tense-affix and
05. (when reduced to the form of and ) being
consonants; and so also after the long vowels
and of the feminine (affix and ), there is
6 1 68 6.1.68 6.1.68 252 3927 199 the elision of the nominative affix 6.1.69 6.1.67
05. The consonant of the nominative-affix ( and its

substitute ) is elided in the Vocative singular
-F-
after a nominal-stem ending in or or a short
6 1 69 6.1.69 6.1.69 193 902 153 vowel. 6.1.70 6.1.68
In the , the elision of the case-ending ( )
of the nominative and accusative plural neuter, is
6 1 70 6.1.70 6.1.70 3516 3427 optional. -8 6.1.71 6.1.69
To a root ending in a short vowel is added the
augment () when a -affix having an -
6 1 71 6.1.71 - 6.1.71 2858 3972 indicatory follows. 6.1.72 6.1.70
In the following sutras up to 6.1.157 inclusive, the
61072- words 'in an unbroken flow of speech',
6 1 72 6.1.72 61157 - 6.1.72 145 3569 should be supplied. - 6.1.73 6.1.71
04.
The augment is added to a preceding short vowel
6 1 73 6.1.73 - 6.1.73 146 1474 120 also when follows an in an uninterrupted speech. 6.1.74 6.1.72
The augment is added to the parcticle and the
prohibitive particle , when follows an in a
6 1 74 6.1.74 - 6.1.74 147 484 continous text. 6.1.75 6.1.73
The augment is added to a long vowel, when
6 1 75 6.1.75 - 6.1.75 148 1884 followed by in a continous text. 6.1.76 6.1.74
04.
The augment is added optionally to a long vowel
6 1 76 6.1.76 - 6.1.76 149 2289 121 final in a full word () when followed by 6.1.77 6.1.75
02. The semi-vowels are the substitutes of the
-
corresponding vowels and (long and
6 1 77 6.1.77 6.1.77 47 597 21 short), when followed by a vowel. 6.1.78 6.1.76
02. For the vowels and are respectively
-
substituted and when a vowel
6 1 78 6.1.78 6.1.78 61 905 29 follows. 6.1.79 6.1.77
02.
The substitution of and for and also -
6 1 79 6.1.79 6.1.79 63 3142 31 takes place before an affix beginning with 6.1.80 6.1.78
For the final dipthongs and of a root, are
substituted and respectively, before an affix
-
beginning with , then only when such dipthong
6 1 80 6.1.80 6.1.80
64 2000 has been itself first evolved by that affix. 6.1.81 6.1.79
In and there is substitution of for
-
only then when the sense is that of 'to be possible
6 1 81 6.1.81 6.1.81 65 1226 to do'. 6.1.82 6.1.80
In the there is substitution of for when
-
the sense is that of 'exposed or put out for sale,
6 1 82 6.1.82 6.1.82 66 1205 saleable'. 6.1.83 6.1.81
-
6 1 83 6.1.83 6.1.83
3517 2647 The forms and are found in the 6.1.84 6.1.82
From here up to 6.1.111 inclusive is always to be
61084- supplied the phrase 'for the preceding and the
6 1 84 6.1.84 61111 6.1.84 68 878 following is substituted'. 6.1.85 6.1.83
And this single susbtitute is considered as the final
of the preceding (form) and the initial of the
6 1 85 6.1.85
-
6.1.85 75 251 succeeding (form). 6.1.86 6.1.84
The substitution of the final is to be
considered as to have not taken effect, when
otherwise would have changed to , or when the
6 1 86 6.1.86 6.1.86 3333 3478 augment () is to be added. 6.1.87 6.1.85
02. The is the single substitute of the final or
of a preceding word and the simple vowel of the
6 1 87 6.1.87 6.1.87 69 531 35 succeeding ( or + a vowel = ) 6.1.88 6.1.86
02. The is the single substitute of or of a
preceding word and the initial dipthong of the
6 1 88 6.1.88 6.1.88 72 3289 41 succeeding ( or + dipthong = ) 6.1.89 6.1.87
02. The is the single substitute of or + of
(root ) and (root ), and for or +
6 1 89 6.1.89 6.1.89
73 916 42 of (the substitute of in by 6.4.132). 6.1.90 6.1.88
The is the single substitute when the augment
6 1 90 6.1.90 6.1.90 269 490 is followed by any vowel. 6.1.91 6.1.89
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
02. The is the single substitute when the or

of a preposition () is followed by the short
6 1 91 6.1.91 6.1.91
74 788 50 of a verb. 6.1.92 6.1.90
According to the opinion of , the is
optionally the single substitute, when the or of
a preposition is followed by a Demoninative Verb
6 1 92 6.1.92 6.1.92

77 3124 beginning with 6.1.93 6.1.91
For the of a nominal stem + of the Accusative
6 1 93 6.1.93 6.1.93

285 950 case-ending and the single substitute is 6.1.94 6.1.92
02.
For the or of the Preposition + or of a

verbal root, the second vowel is the single
6 1 94 6.1.94 6.1.94

78 900 51 substitute. 6.1.95 6.1.93
02. For the or of or + the vowel of the

Preposition , the second vowel is the single
6 1 95 6.1.95 6.1.95
80 939 54 substitute. 6.1.96 6.1.94
For the or (not standing at the end of a or
full word) + of the Tense-affix, the second
6 1 96 6.1.96 6.1.96
2214 828 vowel is the single substitute. 6.1.97 6.1.95
Also when the short , not being final in a , is
followed by a letter, then in the room of both the
precedent and the subsequent - the single
substitute is the form of the subsequent i.e. the
6 1 97 6.1.97 6.1.97
191 109 6.1.98 6.1.96
The of is the single substitute for the (of a
word denoting imitation of an inarticulate sound) +
6 1 98 6.1.98 6.1.98

81 398 6.1.99 6.1.97
This substitution does not take place when a
sound-imitation word is doubled, here, however, for
the final + , the single substitute is optionally
6 1 99 6.1.99 6.1.99
82 2159 (the second vowel). 6.1.100 6.1.98
Of such a doubled sound-imitation word, to which
the affix is added which causes elision of the
final , for the final of the first member and the
initial consonant of the second member, such
subsequent consonant is always the single
6 1 100 6.1.100 6.1.100

2186 substitute. 6.1.101 6.1.99
02. When a single vowel is followed by a homogenous
vowel, the corresponding long vowel is the single
substitute for both the precedent and the
6 1 101 6.1.101 6.1.101 85 6 55 subsequent vowels. 6.1.102 6.1.100
05. For the simple vowel of a nominal-stem and for the
vowel of the case-affixes of the Nominative and the
Accusative in all numbers, there is the single
substitution of a long vowel corresponding to the
6 1 102 6.1.102 6.1.102
164 2485 146 first vowel. 6.1.103 6.1.101
05.
After such a long vowel homogenous with the first,
is substituted for the of the Acccusative case
6 1 103 6.1.103 6.1.103

196 1684 156 affix in the masculine. 6.1.104 6.1.102
05.
The substitution of a long vowel homogenous with

the first, does not take place when or is

followed by a vowel (other than ) of the case-
6 1 104 6.1.104 6.1.104
165 2146 147 affixes of the Nominative and the Accusative. 6.1.105 6.1.103
The substitution of a long vowel homogenous with
05.
the first, does not take place whena long vowel is
followed by a nominative or accusative case-affix
beginning with a vowel (other than ) or by the
182,
6 1 105 6.1.105 6.1.105

239 1883 214 Nominative Plural affix 6.1.106 6.1.104

In the Vedas, the long vowel may optionally be the
single substitute of both vowels in these cases last
6 1 106 6.1.106 6.1.106

3515 3105 mentioned. 6.1.107 6.1.105
05.
There is the single substitution of the first vowel,
when a simple vowel is followed by the of the
6 1 107 6.1.107 6.1.107 194 329 154 case ending 6.1.108 6.1.106
There is the single substitution of the first vowel for
6 1 108 6.1.108 6.1.108 330 3662 the vocalised semi-vowel and the subequent vowel. 6.1.109 6.1.107
02. In the room of or final in a , and the short
, which follows it, is substituted the single vowel of
6 1 109 6.1.109 6.1.109
86 899 56 the form of the first ( or ) 6.1.110 6.1.108
05.
In the room of or (in the body of a word), +

of the case-affix of the Ablative and Genitive

Singular, the single substitute is the form of the
6 1 110 6.1.110 6.1.110
246 1370 193 precedent. 6.1.111 6.1.109
In the room of + of the case-affix of the
Ablative and Genitive singular, the single substitute
6 1 111 6.1.111 6.1.111
279 851 is the letter short 6.1.112 6.1.110
05.
There is the substitution of for the of of the
Ablative and Genitive Singular after and ,
6 1 112 6.1.112 6.1.112 255 1258 203 when for the of those two stems is substituted. 6.1.113 6.1.111
04. The is the substitute of (the substitute of a

final 8.2.66) when an , which is not a , both
6 1 113 6.1.113 6.1.113 163 113 125 precedes and follows it. 6.1.114 6.1.112
04. The is the substitute of (the substitute of a
final 8.2.66) when it is followed by a soft
6 1 114 6.1.114 6.1.114 166 3930 126 consonant and preceded by an short 6.1.115 6.1.113
The final or and the following when occuring
in the middle half of a foot of a Vedic verse, retain
their original forms, except when the is followed
6 1 115 6.1.115 6.1.115 3518 2450 by or 6.1.116 6.1.114
The or retain their original form in the middle
of a Vedic verse, when the following words come
after them (though the in these has a and
following it) - , , , ,
6 1 116 6.1.116 6.1.116

3519 411 , 6.1.117 6.1.115
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
In the , the word when changed to ,
retains it original form when followed by a short
6 1 117 6.1.117 6.1.117 3520 2816 which is also retained. 6.1.118 6.1.116
In the , the short is retained after ,
, , and also in and after or
6 1 118 6.1.118 6.1.118

3521 544 when they stand before 6.1.119 6.1.117
In the , when the word is followed by
, the subsequent short is retained, as well
6 1 119 6.1.119 6.1.119 3522 33 as the preceding or 6.1.120 6.1.118
In the , when an is followed by a
Guttural or a , the antecedent or retains it s
6 1 120 6.1.120 6.1.120 3523 202 form, as well as this subsequent 6.1.121 6.1.119
In the , when the gravely accented of
follows or , the vowels retain their
6 1 121 6.1.121 6.1.121 3524 380 original form. 6.1.122 6.1.120
02.
After the subsequent may optionally be

retained everywhere, in the Vedas as well as in the
6 1 122 6.1.122 6.1.122 87 3677 57 secular literature. 6.1.123 6.1.121
02. According to the opinion of , there is the

substitution of for the of when it is
6 1 123 6.1.123 6.1.123
88 377 60 followed by any vowel. 6.1.124 6.1.122
02. The substitution of for the of is
compulsory when a vowel to be found in the word
6 1 124 6.1.124 6.1.124 ( ) 89 659 61 follows it. 6.1.125 6.1.123
02.
The (8.2.82 etc.) and (1.1.11 etc.)

vowels remain unaltered when followed by a vowel
6 1 125 6.1.125 6.1.125 90 2566 63 (so far as the operation of that vowel is concerned). 6.1.126 6.1.124
For the adverb , is substituted in the the
nasalised , when a vowel follows it, and it retains
6 1 126 6.1.126 6.1.126
3525 481 its original form. 6.1.127 6.1.125
According to the opinion of , the simple
02.
vowels with the exception of , when followed by a

non-homogenous vowel, retain their original forms;
6 1 127 6.1.127 6.1.127

91 600 72 and if the vowel is long, it is shortened. 6.1.128 6.1.126
02. According to the opinion of , the simple

vowel followed by retains its original form, and if
6 1 128 6.1.128 6.1.128

92 863 75 the vowel is long, it is shortened. 6.1.129 6.1.127
Before the word in the , a vowel is
6 1 129 6.1.129 6.1.129 98 303 treated like an ordinary vowel. 6.1.130 6.1.128
According to the opinion of , the 3
followed by a vowel is treated like an ordinary
6 1 130 6.1.130 6.1.130
99 677 vowel. 6.1.131 6.1.129
For the final of the nominal-stem , there is the
6 1 131 6.1.131 6.1.131 337 1863 substitution of , when it is a (1.4.14 etc.). 6.1.132 6.1.130
After and there is elision of the case-affix
(of the Nominative Singular), when a consonant
04.
follows it, when these words are not combined with

(5.3.71) and have not the Negative Particle in
6 1 132 6.1.132 6.1.132 176 910 133 composition. 6.1.133 6.1.131
In the , the case-affix of the nominative
singular is diversely elided after , when a
6 1 133 6.1.133 6.1.133 3526 3858 consonant follows it. 6.1.134 6.1.132
04.
The case affix of 'he', is elided before a vowel, if

by such elision the meter of the foot becomes
6 1 134 6.1.134 6.1.134 177 3788 134 complete. 6.1.135 6.1.133
Up to 6.1.157 inclusive, the following sentence is to
be supplied in every aphorism - 'before is added
6 1 135 6.1.135 6.1.135 2553 3751 '. 6.1.136 6.1.134
The augment is placed before even when the
augment 6.4.71 or the Reduplicate intervenes
6 1 136 6.1.136 6.1.136 2539 80 (between the preposition and the verb). 6.1.137 6.1.135
The augment is placed before when ,
, and are followed by the verb and the sense
6 1 137 6.1.137 6.1.137 2550 3658 is that of ornamenting. augment 6.1.138 6.1.136
The augment is placed before even when
, , and are followed by the verb and the
6 1 138 6.1.138 6.1.138 2551 3629 sense being that of combining. augment 6.1.139 6.1.137
The augment is placed before , when the
verb comes after , and the sense is that of 'to
take pains for something, to prepare, and to supply
6 1 139 6.1.139 6.1.139
2552 799 and ellipses in a discourse'. augment 6.1.140 6.1.138
verb comes after , and the sense is that of 'to
6 1 140 6.1.140 6.1.140 2539 1095 cut or to split'. augment 6.1.141 6.1.139
verb comes after and and the sense 'to
6 1 141 6.1.141 6.1.141 2540 3937 cause suffering'. augment 6.1.142 6.1.140
verb comes after and the sense is 'the
6 1 142 6.1.142 6.1.142
2688 288 scraping of earth by four-footed animals or birds'. augment 6.1.143 6.1.141
The word is irregularly, formed with the
6 1 143 6.1.143 6.1.143 1058 1129 augment and means 'a species of herb'. augment 6.1.144 6.1.142
The word is formed by the augment
6 1 144 6.1.144 6.1.144 1059 279 when the sense is that of 'uninterrupted action'. augment 6.1.145 6.1.143
The word is formed by , when meaning a
locality visited or not visited by cows, or when it
6 1 145 6.1.145 6.1.145 1060 1332 means quantity. augment 6.1.146 6.1.144
The word is formed by when meaning 'a
6 1 146 6.1.146 6.1.146 1061 588 place or position'. augment 6.1.147 6.1.145
The word is formed by when meaning
6 1 147 6.1.147 6.1.147 1062 584 something 'unusual'. augment 6.1.148 6.1.146
The word is formed by meaning
6 1 148 6.1.148 6.1.148 1063 3069 'excrement'. augment 6.1.149 6.1.147
The word is formed by meaning 'the
6 1 149 6.1.149 6.1.149 1064 284 part of a chariot'. augment 6.1.150 6.1.148
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The word is formed with optionally when
6 1 150 6.1.150 6.1.150 1065 3269 denoting a kind of bird, the other form being augment 6.1.151 6.1.149
In a , the is added to when it is second
member in a compound and is preceded by a short
6 1 151 6.1.151 6.1.151 3527 3973 vowel. augment 6.1.152 6.1.150
To the root 'to go, to punish', is added the
augment , when preceded by the preposition
6 1 152 6.1.152 6.1.152 1066 2469 , the form being augment 6.1.153 6.1.151
The words and are formed by
6 1 153 6.1.153 6.1.153 1067 2511 meaning the two Rishis of that name. augment 6.1.154 6.1.152
The word means 'a bamboo', and
6 1 154 6.1.154 6.1.154
1068 2754 means 'a medicant monk'. augment 6.1.155 6.1.153
word
6 1 155 6.1.155 6.1.155 1069 1075 The words and are names of cities. meaning 6.1.156 6.1.154
word
6 1 156 6.1.156 6.1.156 1070 1055 The word means 'a tree'. meaning 6.1.157 6.1.155
word
6 1 157 6.1.157 6.1.157 1071 2365 The words etc. are Names. meaning 6.1.158 6.1.156
A word is, with the exception of one syllable, word
6 1 158 6.1.158 6.1.158 3650 193 unaccented. meaning 6.1.159 6.1.157
A stem formed with the -affix has the acute
accent on the end-syllable, if it is formed from the
6 1 159 6.1.159 6.1.159 3680 1031 root ( ) or has a long in it. accent 6.1.160 6.1.158
The words etc. have acute accent on the last
6 1 160 6.1.160 6.1.160 3681 705 syllable. accent 6.1.161 6.1.159
An unaccented vowel gets also the acute accent,
6 1 161 6.1.161 6.1.161 3651 197 when on account of it preceding acute is elided. accent 6.1.162 6.1.160
6 1 162 6.1.162 6.1.162 3671 1997 A root has the acute on the end syllable. accent 6.1.163 6.1.161
A stem (formed by an affix or an augment or
substitute) having an indicatory gets acute on the
6 1 163 6.1.163 6.1.163 3710 1416 end syllable. accent 6.1.164 6.1.162
A stem formed with a -affix having an
6 1 164 6.1.164 6.1.164 3711 1649 indicatory , has acute on the end syllable. accent 6.1.165 6.1.163
A stem formed by a -affix having an accent-
6 1 165 6.1.165 6.1.165 3712 1084 indicatory , has acute accent on the end syllable. 6.1.166 6.1.164
The Nominative Plural () of has acute accent-
6 1 166 6.1.166 6.1.166 3713 1741 accent on the last syllable. 6.1.167 6.1.165
The word , followed by the Accusative Plural, accent-
6 1 167 6.1.167 6.1.167 3682 1386 has acute accent on the last syllable. 6.1.168 6.1.166
The case affixes of the Instrumental and of the
accent-
cases that follow it have the acute accent, if the
6 1 168 6.1.168 6.1.168 3714 3728 stem in the Locative Plural is monosyllablic. 6.1.169 6.1.167
The same case endings may optionally have the
acute accent, if the monosyllabic word stands at the
end of a compound, and has acute accent on the
accent-
final, when the compound can be easily
6 1 169 6.1.169 6.1.169

3715 254 unloosened. 6.1.170 6.1.168
In the , the case-endings other than the accent-
, get the acute accent when coming -
6 1 170 6.1.170 6.1.170

3716 75 after 6.1.171 6.1.169
The same ( ) case-endings have the
acute accent, when the stem ends in , also after accent-
after etc. (upto 6.1.63) after , , and -
6 1 171 6.1.171 6.1.171

3717 832 - 6.1.172 6.1.170
The case-endings after 'eight', accent-
6 1 172 6.1.172 6.1.172

3718 426 have acute accent, when it gets the form 6.1.173 6.1.171
After an oxytone Particle in the feminine suffix
, ( ) and the case endings beginning with vowels
(with the exception of strong cases) have acute
accent, when the participial affix has not the accent-
6 1 173 6.1.173 6.1.173

3719 3354 augment (i.e. is not ). 6.1.174 6.1.172
The same endings have the acute accent, when for
the acutely accented final vowel of the stem, a
accent-
semi-vowel is substituted, and which is preceded
6 1 174 6.1.174 6.1.174

3720 733 by a consonant. 6.1.175 6.1.173
But not so, when the vowel is of the feminine affix accent-
6 1 175 6.1.175 6.1.175

3721 2237 4.1.66, or the final of a root. 6.1.176 6.1.174
The otherwise unaccented ( ) takes the acute
accent, when an oxytoned stem ends in a light
vowel, or the affix has before it the augment accent-
6 1 176 6.1.176 6.1.176 3722 3970 8.2.16. 6.1.177 6.1.175
After an oxytoned stem which ends in a light vowel,
the genitive ending has optionally the acute accent-
6 1 177 6.1.177 6.1.177
3723 2156 accent. 6.1.178 6.1.176
In the , the ending has diversely the accent-
6 1 178 6.1.178 6.1.178
3724 1380 acute accent after the feminine affix 6.1.179 6.1.177
The case-endings beginning with a consonant,
have the acute accent after the Numerals called accent-
6 1 179 6.1.179 6.1.179

3725 3474 1.1.24, as well as after and 6.1.180 6.1.178
The above numerals, when taking a case-affix
beginning with a or , get the acute accent on
the penultimate syllable, when the said numerals
accent-
assume a form consisting of three or more
6 1 180 6.1.180 6.1.180

3683 1547 syllables. 6.1.181 6.1.179
accent-
6 1 181 6.1.181 6.1.181

3684 3218 In the Secular language this is optional. 6.1.182 6.1.180
The foregoing rules from 6.1.168 downwards have
no applicability after , and and words ending
in them; nor after a stem which before the case
ending of the Nominative Singular has or , nor
after , or after a stem ending in , nor as accent-
6 1 182 6.1.182 6.1.182

3726 2023 well as after and 6.1.183 6.1.181
After a case-ending beginning with or is accent-
6 1 183 6.1.183 6.1.183 3727 1870 unaccented. 6.1.184 6.1.182
After , a case-ending beginning with or is accent-
6 1 184 6.1.184 6.1.184

3728 2223 optionally unaccented. 6.1.185 6.1.183
An affix having an indicatory , is i.e. has accent-
6 1 185 6.1.185 6.1.185 3729 1731 circumflex accent. 6.1.186 6.1.184
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The Personal-endings and their substitutes
3.2.124-126 are, when they are 3.4.113
etc., unaccented after the charactertistic of the
Periphrastic Future ( ) after a root which in the
has an unaccented vowel or a (with the
exception of and ) as indicatory letter, as
well as after what has a final in the Grammatical accent-
6 1 186 6.1.186 6.1.186

3730 1718 System of Instruction ( ) 6.1.187 6.1.185
accent- -
The Aorist, the first syllable may optionally
6 1 187 6.1.187 6.1.187
3731 520 have the acute accent. 6.1.188 6.1.186
The acute accent is optionally on the first syllable
when a Personal-ending, being tense affix
beginning with a vowel, provided that the vowel is
not the augment , follows after etc., or after
6 1 188 6.1.188 6.1.188

3672 3867 accent- 6.1.189 6.1.187
The acute accent falls on the first syllable of the
reduplicate verbs when followed by an affix
beginning with a vowel (the vowel being not )
6 1 189 6.1.189 6.1.189 3673 320 and being a Personal-ending. accent- 6.1.190 6.1.188
Also when the unaccented endings of the three
persons in the singular follow, the first syllable of
6 1 190 6.1.190 6.1.190 3674 201 the reduplicate has the acute. accent- 6.1.191 6.1.189
The acute is on the first syllable of when the
6 1 191 6.1.191 6.1.191 3685 3688 case-endings follow. accent- 6.1.192 6.1.190
In , , , , , , , and , and
in their reduplicates, the acute accent is, before the
unaccented endings of the three persons
in singular, ( ), on the syllable which precedes accent-
6 1 192 6.1.192 6.1.192

3675 2679 the affix. 6.1.193 6.1.191
The acute accent falls on the syllable immediately
6 1 193 6.1.193 6.1.193 3676 2998 preceding the affix that has an indicatory accent- 6.1.194 6.1.192
The first syllable may be optionally acute when the
6 1 194 6.1.194 6.1.194 3677 525 absolutive affix follows. accent 6.1.195 6.1.193
The roots which are exhibited in with a final
vowel, may be optionally have the acute on the first
syllable, before the affixes of the Passive ( ),
6 1 195 6.1.195 6.1.195 3678 42 when the sense of the verb is Reflexive. accent 6.1.196 6.1.194
Before the ending of the Perfect, Second Person
Singular, when this ending takes the augment ;
the acute accent falls either on the first syllable, or
6 1 196 6.1.196 6.1.196
3732 1817 on this , or on the personal ending. accent- 6.1.197 6.1.195
Whatever is derived with an affix having an
indicatory or , has the acute accent invariably
6 1 197 6.1.197 6.1.197 3686 1554 on the first syllable. accent- 6.1.198 6.1.196
The first syllable of a Vocative gets the acute
6 1 198 6.1.198 6.1.198 3653 552 accent. accent 6.1.199 6.1.197
The acute accent is on the first syllable of and accent-
6 1 199 6.1.199 6.1.199 3687 2278 when followed by a strong case-ending. 6.1.200 6.1.198
The Infinitive in has the acute on the first accent-
syllable and on the last syllable at one and the -
6 1 200 6.1.200 6.1.200 3688 249 same time. words 6.1.201 6.1.199
The word has the acute on the first syllable and
6 1 201 6.1.201 6.1.201 3689 1225 on the last syllable at one and the same time. accent-word 6.1.202 6.1.200
The acute accent falls on the first syllable of , in
6 1 202 6.1.202 6.1.202 3690 1490 the sense of 'whereby one attains victory'. accent-word 6.1.203 6.1.201
The words etc. have the acute on the first
6 1 203 6.1.203 6.1.203 3691 3296 syllable. accent-word 6.1.204 6.1.202
The acute accent falls on the first syllable of that
word with which something is likened, provided that
6 1 204 6.1.204 6.1.204 3692 3545 it is a name. accent-word 6.1.205 6.1.203
A disyllabic Participle in ( ) when a Name
has the acute on the first syllable, but not if the first
6 1 205 6.1.205 6.1.205
3693 2207 syllable has an accent 6.1.206 6.1.204
6 1 206 6.1.206 6.1.206 3694 3414 Also and have acute on the first syllable. accent 6.1.207 6.1.205
The word meaning 'having eaten' has acute
6 1 207 6.1.207 6.1.207 3695 578 on the first syllable. accent 6.1.208 6.1.206
The word may have optionally the acute on
6 1 208 6.1.208 6.1.208 3696 2937 the first syllable. accent 6.1.209 6.1.207
In the , the words and have
6 1 209 6.1.209 6.1.209 3697 1523 optionally the acute on the first syllable. accent 6.1.210 6.1.208
In the , these words and have accent-
6 1 210 6.1.210 6.1.210 3698 2177 always the acute on the first syllable. 6.1.211 6.1.209
The acute accent is on the first syllable of accent-
6 1 211 6.1.211 6.1.211 3699 2877 and in the Genitive Singular. 6.1.212 6.1.210
accent-
The acute accent is on the first syllable of
-
6 1 212 6.1.212 6.1.212 3700 1369 and in the Dative Singular. pronouns 6.1.213 6.1.211
Whatever is formed by the affix , has, if it is a accent-
disyllabic word, the acute on the first syllable, with -
6 1 213 6.1.213 6.1.213 3701 2826 the exception of from pronouns 6.1.214 6.1.212
The acute accent is on the first syllable of , ,
accent-
, and , when they are followed by the affix
-
6 1 214 6.1.214 6.1.214 3702 679 pronouns 6.1.215 6.1.213
The acute accent is optionally on the first syllable of
6 1 215 6.1.215 6.1.215 3703 3226 and accent-word 6.1.216 6.1.214
The acute accent is optionally on the first syllables
6 1 216 6.1.216 6.1.216 3704 1801 of , , , , , and accent-word 6.1.217 6.1.215
What is formed by an affix having an indicatory ,
has acute on the penultimate syllable, the full word
6 1 217 6.1.217 6.1.217 3733 808 consisting of more than two syllables. accent-word 6.1.218 6.1.216
The acute accent may be optionally on the
penultimate syllable of the reduplicated Aorist in
6 1 218 6.1.218 6.1.218 3679 1383 , the word consisting of more than two syllables. accent-word 6.1.219 6.1.217
The before the affix has the acute accent,
6 1 219 6.1.219 6.1.219 3705 2716 when the word is a name in the Feminine Gender. accent- 6.1.220 6.1.218
The Names ending in have the acute accent accent-word-
6 1 220 6.1.220 6.1.220 3706 253 on the last syllable. Feminine 6.1.221 6.1.219
The Names ending in have the acute on the
6 1 221 6.1.221 6.1.221 3707 687 last syllable. accent- 6.1.222 6.1.220
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
In compound words ending in , the final vowel
of the preceding word has the acute accent in the
6 1 222 6.1.222 6.1.222 3652 1431 weak cases in which only of remains. accent-word 6.1.223 6.1.221
A compound word has the acute on the last
6 1 223 6.1.223 6.1.223 3734 3640 syllable. accent- 6.2.1 6.1.222
In a the first member preserves its
6 2 1 6.2.1 6.2.1 3735 2604 own original accent. 6.2.2 6.1.223
In a - the first member preserves its
original accent when it is a word - 1. meaning 'a
resemblance' or 2. an Instrumental or 3. a Locative
or 4. a word with which the second member is -
compared or 5. an indeclinable or 6. an Accusative
6 2 2 6.2.2 6.2.2

3736 1605 or 7. a Future Passive Participle the 6.2.3 6.2.1
The first member of a - preserves its
original accent when a word denoting colour is
compounded with another colour denoting word but -
6 2 3 6.2.3 6.2.3 3737 3070 not so when it is the word 6.2.4 6.2.2
original accent when the second term is or
-
and the compound expresses 'a measure or
6 2 4 6.2.4 6.2.4 3738 1290 mass'. 6.2.5 6.2.3
In a - having the word as its
-
second member, the first member denoting
6 2 5 6.2.5 6.2.5 3739 1851 inheritance preserves its original accent. 6.2.6 6.2.4
In a - having the words or as
its second member, the first member, when it -
denotes that which experiences an obstacle,
6 2 6 6.2.6 6.2.6 3740 2466 preserves its original accent. 6.2.7 6.2.5
original accent when the second member is the -
6 2 7 6.2.7 6.2.7 3741 2291 word denoting 'a pretext'. 6.2.8 6.2.6
6 2 8 6.2.8 6.2.8 3742 2200 word in the sense of 'a protection from wind'. 6.2.9 6.2.7
original accent when the second member is the
-
word having any other sense than that of
6 2 9 6.2.9 6.2.9 3743 3387 'autumnal'. 6.2.10 6.2.8
6 2 10 6.2.10 6.2.10 3744 165 word or denoting a genus. 6.2.11 6.2.9
original accent when the second member is the
-
word or expressing resemblance with
6 2 11 6.2.11 6.2.11 3745 3585 someone or something. 6.2.12 6.2.10
original accent when the second member is a
-
(Numeral Determinative Compound) denoting
6 2 12 6.2.12 6.2.12 3746 1951 'measure or quantity'. 6.2.13 6.2.11
Before the word 'a trader' the first member of
a - preserves its accent when it is a
-
word specifying the place wither one has to go or
6 2 13 6.2.13 6.2.13 3747 1269 the ware in which one deals. 6.2.14 6.2.12
original accent when the words 1. 2. 3.
-
and 4. when these words appear as
6 2 14 6.2.14 6.2.14 3748 2768 neuter. 6.2.15 6.2.13
-
original accent when its second term is or
6 2 15 6.2.15 6.2.15 3749 3745 and the sense is 'to feel delight' or 'is good'. 6.2.16 6.2.14
-
original accent when its second term is or
6 2 16 6.2.16 6.2.16 3750 2552 and the sense is 'agreeable to one' or 'desired'. 6.2.17 6.2.15
original accent when it denotes a thing possessed -
6 2 17 6.2.17 6.2.17 3751 3863 and when its second term is 6.2.18 6.2.16
-
original accent when it ends in and means
6 2 18 6.2.18 6.2.18 3752 2273 'master' or 'lord'. 6.2.19 6.2.17
The words , , and however do not
preserve their original accent in -
-
when coming before the word denoting 'master'
6 2 19 6.2.19 6.2.19
3753 2049 or 'lord'. 6.2.20 6.2.18
The word may optionally keep its accent in a
-
- before the word denoting
6 2 20 6.2.20 6.2.20 3754 3115 'master' or 'lord'. 6.2.21 6.2.19
original accent before words , and -
6 2 21 6.2.21 6.2.21
3755 577 , when it treats about a supposition. 6.2.22 6.2.20
6 2 22 6.2.22 6.2.22 3756 2432 word and the sense is 'this had been lately'. 6.2.23 6.2.21
original accent when the second member is 1.
-
2. 3. 4. and 5. in the
6 2 23 6.2.23 6.2.23

3757 3693 sense of 'what can be found in the vicinity thereof'. 6.2.24 6.2.22
-
The words etc. preserve their accent when
6 2 24 6.2.24 6.2.24 3758 3273 followed by an adjective word in a compound. 6.2.25 6.2.23
In a the first member consisting of a
(verbal noun) preserves its original accent
before the adjective forms built from --
5.3.60, -- 5.3.61, and --
5.3.64, and before a form
6 2 25 6.2.25 6.2.25 3759 3447 built from the word 6.2.26 6.2.24
In a the first member consisting of
6 2 26 6.2.26 6.2.26 3760 1111 the word preserves it original accent. 6.2.27 6.2.25
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
In a of followed by the
acutely accented ( ) falls on the first syllable of
6 2 27 6.2.27 6.2.27 3761 519 6.2.28 6.2.26
The first syllable of is optionally acutely

accented ( ) when the second member is a
6 2 28 6.2.28 6.2.28

3762 2405 word denoting 'the name of a horde'. 6.2.29 6.2.27
In a (Numeral Determinative
Compound) the first member preserves its original
accent before a stem ending in a simple vowel with
the exception of ( ) before a word denoting
time, as well as before 1. 2. and 3.
6 2 29 6.2.29 6.2.29
3763 601 6.2.30 6.2.28
Compound) the word may optionally preserve its
accent when followed by an -ending stem or by
6 2 30 6.2.30 6.2.30

3764 2616 a time-word or by 1. 2. and 3. 6.2.31 6.2.29
Compound) the first member may optionally
preserve its accent when followed by the words
6 2 31 6.2.31 6.2.31
3765 1874 and as its second members. 6.2.32 6.2.30
When a word ending in the Locative -7th case does
not denote time preserves its original accent when
followed by 1. 2. 3. and 4. in a
6 2 32 6.2.32 6.2.32
3766 3607 compound. 6.2.33 6.2.31
The particles 1. 2. 3. and 4. preserve
and
their accent before that word which specifies an
exclusion or a portion of day and night (in an
6 2 33 6.2.33 6.2.33 3767 2314 also). 6.2.34 6.2.32
The first member of a formed of names
denoting the (warrior) clans in the plural
number retains its original accent when the warrior
6 2 34 6.2.34 6.2.34
3768 2917 belongs to the clan of or 6.2.35 6.2.33
The numeral word standing as the first member of a
6 2 35 6.2.35 6.2.35 3769 3507 , preserves its accent. 6.2.36 6.2.34
When words denoting scholars are named after
their teachers and are compounded into a
6 2 36 6.2.36 6.2.36 3770 486 the first member retains its accent. 6.2.37 6.2.35
Also in the -s etc. the first
6 2 37 6.2.37 6.2.37 3771 1057 members retain their accent. ..
6.2.38 6.2.36
The word () retains its accent before the
following - 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 8. 9. and 10.
6 2 38 6.2.38 6.2.38

3772 2757 6.2.39 6.2.37
The words and retain their accent
6 2 39 6.2.39 6.2.39 3773 1238 before the word accent 6.2.40 6.2.38
The word retains its accent before and
6 2 40 6.2.40 6.2.40 3774 826 accent 6.2.41 6.2.39
The word retains its accent before 1. 2.
6 2 41 6.2.41 6.2.41 3775 1334 and 3. accent 6.2.42 6.2.40
The first member retains its accent in the following -
1. - 2. - 3. - 4. - -
5. - 6. - 7. - and 8.
6 2 42 6.2.42 6.2.42

3776 1115 etc. accent 6.2.43 6.2.41
A word in the Dative -4th Case as the first member
retains its accent when the second member
expresses that which is suited to become the
6 2 43 6.2.43 6.2.43 3777 1390 former. accent 6.2.44 6.2.42
Before the word the first member in the Dative
6 2 44 6.2.44 6.2.44 3778 351 -4th Case retains its accent. accent 6.2.45 6.2.43
The first member in the Dative -4th Case retains its
6 2 45 6.2.45 6.2.45 3779 1181 accent before a Past Participle in accent 6.2.46 6.2.44
Before the Past Participle in the first member
when it itself is not a Past Participle, retains its
6 2 46 6.2.46 6.2.46 3780 1022 original accent in a 6.2.47 6.2.45
Before the Past Participle in , a word ending in
the Accusative -2nd case retains its accent when it
6 2 47 6.2.47 6.2.47 3781 451 does not mean a separation. accent 6.2.48 6.2.46
A word ending in the Instrumental -3rd case retains
its accent before the Past Participle in when it
6 2 48 6.2.48 6.2.48 3782 1768 has a Passive meaning. accent 6.2.49 6.2.47
A word called -- 1.4.60, when standing
immediately before a Participle in having a
6 2 49 6.2.49 6.2.49 3783 1261 Passive significance, retains its accent. accent 6.2.50 6.2.48
An immediately preceding -- 1.4.60,
retains its original accent before (a word formed by)
a -affix beginning with which as an indicatory
6 2 50 6.2.50 6.2.50
3784 1711 but before accent 6.2.51 6.2.49
An immediately preceding -- 1.4.60,
retains its original accent before an Infinitive in
-- 3.4.14, but whereby
6 2 51 6.2.51 6.2.51
3785 1677 simultaneously the final has the acute as well. accent 6.2.52 6.2.50
An immediately preceding -- 1.4.60, not
ending in or retains its accent before an affix
6 2 52 6.2.52 6.2.52 3786 182 having a follows. accent 6.2.53 6.2.51
The -s and however retain their original
6 2 53 6.2.53 6.2.53 3787 2252 accent before when the affix follows. accent 6.2.54 6.2.52
The word when the first member of a
compound may optionally preserve its original
6 2 54 6.2.54 6.2.54 3788 691 accent. accent 6.2.55 6.2.53
The first member denoting the quantity of gold
retains optionally its original accent before the word
6 2 55 6.2.55 6.2.55 3789 3942 accent 6.2.56 6.2.54
The word when first in a compound optionally
6 2 56 6.2.56 6.2.56 3790 2488 retains its original accent when meaning 'a novice'. accent 6.2.57 6.2.55
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
The words and when as first member of
a compound optionally retain their original accent in
6 2 57 6.2.57 6.2.57 3791 967 a 6.2.58 6.2.56
The word optionally retains its original accent
in a before the words and
6 2 58 6.2.58 6.2.58
3792 569 6.2.59 6.2.57
in a before the words and
6 2 59 6.2.59 6.2.59
3793 2922 6.2.60 6.2.58
The word ending in Genitive 6th-Case
optionally retains its original accent before the word
6 2 60 6.2.60 6.2.60 3794 3485 accent 6.2.61 6.2.59
A word having the sense of 'always' optionally
retains its original accent before a Past Participle in
6 2 61 6.2.61 6.2.61 3795 1182 accent 6.2.62 6.2.60
The word when first member of a compound
optionally retains its original accent before a word
6 2 62 6.2.62 6.2.62 3796 1341 denoting 'a professional man or artisan'. accent 6.2.63 6.2.61
after a profession-denoting noun when praise is
6 2 63 6.2.63 6.2.63
3797 2923 expressed. accent 6.2.64 6.2.62
In the following up to --
6.2.91, inclusive, the
phrase 'the first syllable in -(the word standing in
62064- the Nominative 1st-Case) has the acute accent 1st-
6 2 64 6.2.64 62091 6.2.64 3798 523 ( )' is always to be supplied. acute 6.2.65 6.2.63
If the first member of a compound is in the Locative
-7th case or denoting the name of the Receiver of
Tax, has acutely accented ( ) first syllable,
when the second member is a word denoting 'what 1st-
6 2 65 6.2.65 6.2.65 3799 3610 is lawful', but not when it is acute 6.2.66 6.2.64
The first member of a compound has acute on the
first syllable when the second member denotes that
by whom the things denoted by the first are 1st-
6 2 66 6.2.66 6.2.66 3800 2865 regulated or kept in order. acute 6.2.67 6.2.65
The acute accent ( ) on the first syllable is
1st-
6 2 67 6.2.67 6.2.67 3801 3244 optional when the word follows. acute 6.2.68 6.2.66
The word is optionally acutely accented ( )
on the first syllable when followed by a word 1st-
6 2 68 6.2.68 6.2.68 3802 2362 denoting a professional man. acute 6.2.69 6.2.67
The first syllable of the first member of a compound
is acutely accented ( ) before a
(Patronymic) name or a Scholar-name and also 1st-
6 2 69 6.2.69 6.2.69
3803 1317 before and when a reproach is meant. acute 6.2.70 6.2.68
The first syllable of the word preceding gets
the acute accent ( ) when it denotes the 1st-
6 2 70 6.2.70 6.2.70 3804 36 ingredient of the same. acute 6.2.71 6.2.69
A word denoting food gets the acute accent ( )
on the first syllable when before a word which 1st-
6 2 71 6.2.71 6.2.71 3805 2639 denotes a repository suited to contain that. acute 6.2.72 6.2.70
A word denoting the object of comparison gets the
acute accent ( ) on the first syllable when
1st-
6 2 72 6.2.72 6.2.72 3806 1326 standing before , , and acute 6.2.73 6.2.71
A word denoting the object of comparison gets the
acute accent ( ) on the first syllable when the
second member is a word ending in the affix
and the compound expresses a calling by which 1st-
6 2 73 6.2.73 6.2.73 3807 16 one gets his living. acute 6.2.74 6.2.72
A compound, the second member of which is a
word ending in affix and which denotes the
sport of the Eastern people, gets the acute accent 1st-
6 2 74 6.2.74 6.2.74 3808 2530 ( ) on the first syllable. acute 6.2.75 6.2.73
A compound, the second member of which is a
word ending in the -affix and which denotes
a functionary, gets the acute accent ( ) on the 1st-
6 2 75 6.2.75 6.2.75 3809 84 first syllable. acute 6.2.76 6.2.74
And when such a compound ending in -affix
denotes the name of a professional man, but not
when the second term (derived from ), the
acute accent ( ) is on the first syllable of the first 1st-
6 2 76 6.2.76 6.2.76 3810 3398 word. acute 6.2.77 6.2.75
Also when such an compound ending in -
affix denotes a Name, the acute accent ( ) falls
on the first syllable but not when the second term is 1st-
6 2 77 6.2.77 6.2.77 3811 3534 acute 6.2.78 6.2.76
The words 1. 2. and 3. get the acute
accent ( ) on the first syllable when followed by
1st-
6 2 78 6.2.78 6.2.78 3812 1309 acute 6.2.79 6.2.77
A compound ending in -affix ( ) has the
acute accent ( ) on the first syllable of the first 1st-
6 2 79 6.2.79 6.2.79 3813 1581 member. acute 6.2.80 6.2.78
When the first member of a compound expresses
that with which resemblance is denoted then it has
acute accent ( ) on the first syllable before a
word formed by ( ) affix, only then, when
such latter word is radical without any preposition
and means 'giving out a definite sound like so and 1st-
6 2 80 6.2.80 6.2.80 3814 765 so'. acute 6.2.81 6.2.79
The compounds etc. have acute accent
1st-
6 2 81 6.2.81 6.2.81 3815 2864 ( ) on the first syllable. acute 6.2.82 6.2.80
When the first member is a word ending in a long
vowel or is 1. 2. 3. 4. and is
followed by , the acutely accented ( ) falls on 1st-
6 2 82 6.2.82 6.2.82 3816 1880 the first syllable. acute 6.2.83 6.2.81
In a word consisting of more than two syllables
followed by , the acute accent ( ) falls on the 1st-
6 2 83 6.2.83 6.2.83 3817 255 syllable before the last. acute 6.2.84 6.2.82
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
Before the first syllable of the first member as
acute accent ( ) when thereby inhabitants are 1st-
6 2 84 6.2.84 6.2.84 3818 1347 not meant. acute 6.2.85 6.2.83
The first member has acute accent ( ) on the
1st-
6 2 85 6.2.85 6.2.85 3819 1366 first syllable when followed by etc. acute 6.2.86 6.2.84
The words etc. get acute accent ( ) on the
1st-
6 2 86 6.2.86 6.2.86 3820 1471 first syllable when followed by the word acute 6.2.87 6.2.85
The first member which has not a in the first
syllable or which is not etc. gets the acute
1st-
6 2 87 6.2.87 6.2.87 3821 2514 accent ( ) on the first syllable before acute 6.2.88 6.2.86
The first syllable of etc. gets the acute accent
1st-
6 2 88 6.2.88 6.2.88 3822 2775 ( ) when follows. acute 6.2.89 6.2.87
The first member has an acute accent ( ) on the
first syllable before the word but not when it is
the word or , nor when it refers to a city in 1st-
6 2 89 6.2.89 6.2.89 3823 326 the lands of the Northern People. acute 6.2.90 6.2.88
A word of two or three syllables ending in a or
(with the exception of and ) standing before
the word has acute accent ( ) on the first 1st-
6 2 90 6.2.90 6.2.90 3824 359 syllable. acute 6.2.91 6.2.89
The following words do not get acute accent ( )
on the first syllable when standing before etc. -
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. and 6.
1st-
6 2 91 6.2.91 6.2.91
3825 2048 acute 6.2.92 6.2.90
In the following stras up to
6.2.110, inclusive, is to be
supplied the phrase 'the last syllable in a word
62092- standing in the Nominative 1st-Case has the acute
6 2 92 6.2.92 62110 6.2.92 3826 235 accent ( )'. 6.2.93 6.2.91
The acute accent ( ) is on the final of the word
standing as the first member before an end
attributive word in the sense 'whole, through and acute-1st-
6 2 93 6.2.93 6.2.93 3827 3673 through'. term 6.2.94 6.2.92
The last syllable of the first member before and
end
has the acute accent ( ) when the acute-1st-
6 2 94 6.2.94 6.2.94 3828 3532 compound is a Name. term 6.2.95 6.2.93
The last syllable of the first member get the acute end
accent ( ) when the word follows, the acute-1st-
6 2 95 6.2.95 6.2.95 3829 1112 compound denoting age. term 6.2.96 6.2.94
Before the word when the compound denotes
end
a mixture, the last syllable of the first member has
acute-1st-
6 2 96 6.2.96 6.2.96 3830 725 the acute accent ( ). term 6.2.97 6.2.95
Before a (Numeral Determinative
Compound), when the compound denotes a end
sacrifice, the last syllable of the first member has
acute-1st-
6 2 97 6.2.97 6.2.97 3831 1950 the acute accent ( ). term 6.2.98 6.2.96
Before the word when it is exhibited as Neuter,
end
the first member of the compound gets the acute
acute-1st-
6 2 98 6.2.98 6.2.98 3832 3618 accent ( ) on the last syllable. term 6.2.99 6.2.97
Before the word , when the compound denotes a
end
city of the Eastern People, the final of the final of
acute-1st-
6 2 99 6.2.99 6.2.99 3833 2396 the first member as the acute accent ( ). term 6.2.100 6.2.98
When the words and stand first, the first
end
member has the acute accent ( ) on the final
acute-1st-
6 2 100 6.2.100 6.2.100 3834 344 before the word term 6.2.101 6.2.99
But when the words 1. 2. and 3.
end
precede , the acute accent ( ) does not fall acute-1st-
6 2 101 6.2.101 6.2.101 3835 2081 on their final. term 6.2.102 6.2.100
The words 1. 2. 3. and 4. have
end
the acute accent ( ) on the last syllable before
acute-1st-
6 2 102 6.2.102 6.2.102 3836 1128 the word term 6.2.103 6.2.101
Words expressing (in space of time) have acute
accent ( ) on the last syllable when followed by
end
a word denoting a village or a country or a narrative
acute-1st-
6 2 103 6.2.103 6.2.103 3837 1857 before the word term 6.2.104 6.2.102
The direction denoting words have acute accent
( ) on the final, before the names of scholars end
when such names derived from those of their acute-1st-
6 2 104 6.2.104 6.2.104
3838 485 teachers. term 6.2.105 6.2.103
Words denoting direction and the word have
acute accent ( ) on the final before a word
end
which takes in the first syllable of the second
acute-1st-
6 2 105 6.2.105 6.2.105 3839 715 term by 7.3.12. term 6.2.106 6.2.104
The word has acute accent ( ) on the final,
end
being first member in a , when it is a acute-1st-
6 2 106 6.2.106 6.2.106 3840 2605 Name. term 6.2.107 6.2.105
The first member in a , before the
words 1. 2. and 3. , gets acute accent
end
( ) on the final syllable when the compound acute-1st-
6 2 107 6.2.107 6.2.107 3841 730 denotes a Name. term 6.2.108 6.2.106
A word before 1. 2. and 3. in a
end
gets the acute accent ( ) on the final, acute-1st-
6 2 108 6.2.108 6.2.108 3842 1241 when reproach is meant. term 6.2.109 6.2.107
In a having the word as its
second member, the first member ending in the end
feminine affix ( word) has the ac on its final acute-1st-
6 2 109 6.2.109 6.2.109 3843 2102 syllable. term 6.2.110 6.2.108
In a a Participle in a preceded by a
preposition, standing as the first member of the end
compound has optionally acute accent ( ) on acute-1st-
6 2 110 6.2.110 6.2.110 3844 2212 the last syllable. term 6.2.111 6.2.109
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
In the following stras up to 6.2.136,
inclusive, should always be supplied the phrase end
62111- 'the first syllable of the second member has the
acute-1st-
6 2 111 6.2.111 62142 6.2.111 3845 717 acute accent ( )'. term 6.2.112 6.2.110
In a the word standing as second
member has acute accent ( ) on the first end
syllable when it is preceded by a word denoting acute-1st-
6 2 112 6.2.112 6.2.112 3846 991 colour or mark. term 6.2.113 6.2.111
In a the second member has
end
acute accent ( ) on the first syllable when the acute-1st-
6 2 113 6.2.113 6.2.113 3847 3554 compound denotes a Name or Resemblance. term 6.2.114 6.2.112
In a expressing a Name or
comparison the second members 1. 2. 3.
end
and 4. have acute accent ( ) on the acute-1st-
6 2 114 6.2.114 6.2.114

3848 964 first syllable. term 6.2.115 6.2.113
In a denoting age (as well as a Name
end
or a Resemblance), the second member gets
acute-1st-
6 2 115 6.2.115 6.2.115

3849 3420 acute accent ( ) on the first syllable. term 6.2.116 6.2.114
After a Negative Particle, in a the
end
acute accent ( ) falls on the first syllable of 1.
acute-1st-
6 2 116 6.2.116 6.2.116 3850 2094 2. 3. and 4. term 6.2.117 6.2.115
After the adjective in a a stem
ending in and with the exception of
end
and has acute accent ( ) on the first acute-1st-
6 2 117 6.2.117 6.2.117 3851 3800 syllable. term 6.2.118 6.2.116
end
After the adjective in a the acute
acute-1st-
6 2 118 6.2.118 6.2.118 3852 1201 accent ( ) falls on the first syllable of etc. term .. 6.2.119 6.2.117
In a in the (Vedas) a word of
two syllables with acute accent ( ) on the first
end
syllable when preceded by gets acute accent
acute-1st-
6 2 119 6.2.119 6.2.119
3853 534 ( ) on the first syllable. term 6.2.120 6.2.118
In a in the (Vedas) after the
end
words and have acute accent ( ) on the acute-1st-
6 2 120 6.2.120 6.2.120
3854 3274 first syllable. term 6.2.121 6.2.119
In an the following second terms
end
have acute accent ( ) on their first syllable - 1.
acute-2nd-
6 2 121 6.2.121 6.2.121

3855 1131 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. and 7. term 6.2.122 6.2.120
Compound) the following second members get
end
acute accent ( ) on their first syllable - 1. 2.
acute-2nd-
6 2 122 6.2.122 6.2.122
3856 953 3. 3. and 4. term 6.2.123 6.2.121
The word at the end of a - when end
exhibited in the Neuter has acute on the first acute-2nd-
6 2 123 6.2.123 6.2.123 3857 1606 syllable. term 6.2.124 6.2.122
In a Neuter - ending in the acute
end
accent ( ) falls on the first syllable of the second acute-2nd-
6 2 124 6.2.124 6.2.124 3858 972 member. term 6.2.125 6.2.123
end
In a Neuter - ending in the first
acute-2nd-
6 2 125 6.2.125 6.2.125

3859 526 syllable of etc. have the acute accent ( ). term 6.2.126 6.2.124
The words 1. 2. 3. and 4. at the
end
end of a - have acute accent ( ) on acute-2nd-
6 2 126 6.2.126 6.2.126

3860 1428 the first syllable when a reproach is meant. term 6.2.127 6.2.125
The word at the end of a - has
end
acute accent ( ) on the first syllable when acute-2nd-
6 2 127 6.2.127 6.2.127 3861 1424 something is compared with it. term 6.2.128 6.2.126
In a - ending in 1. 2. and 3.
the acute accent ( ) falls on the first end
syllable of these when the compound denotes a acute-2nd-
6 2 128 6.2.128 6.2.128
3862 2340 food mixed or seasoned with something. term 6.2.129 6.2.127
The words 1. 2. 3. and 4. have
end
acute accent ( ) on their first syllable when at
acute-2nd-
6 2 129 6.2.129 6.2.129

3863 1132 the end of a - denoting a Name. term 6.2.130 6.2.128
The word has acute accent ( ) on the
end
first syllable when at the end of a -
acute-2nd-
6 2 130 6.2.130 6.2.130
3864 13 which is not a term 6.2.131 6.2.129
At the end of a non- - the
end
words etc. have acute accent ( ) on the first acute-2nd-
6 2 131 6.2.131 6.2.131

3865 3068 syllable. term 6.2.132 6.2.130
The word coming after a Masculine noun in a
end
- has a acute accent ( ) on the first acute-2nd-
6 2 132 6.2.132 6.2.132 3866 2384 syllable. term 6.2.133 6.2.131
The word does not have an acute accent ( )
on the first syllable when preceded by a word which end
falls under the category of teachers, kings, priests, acute-2nd-
6 2 133 6.2.133 6.2.133

3867 2140 wife's relations and agnates and cognates. term 6.2.134 6.2.132
The words etc. in a - have acute
accent ( ) on the first syllable when preceding end
word ends in a Genitive 6th-Case and does not acute-2nd-
6 2 134 6.2.134 6.2.134
3868 1427 denote a living being. term 6.2.135 6.2.133
The six words - 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
and 6. of stras 6.2.126-129 preceded by a
end
non-living Genitive 6th-Case word have acute
acute-2nd-
6 2 135 6.2.135 6.2.135
3869 3471 accent ( ) on the first syllable. term 6.2.136 6.2.134
The word at the end of a -
end
denoting 'a wood or forest' has acute accent ( ) acute-2nd-
6 2 136 6.2.136 6.2.136 3870 1101 on the first syllable. term 6.2.137 6.2.135
end
The word at the end of a - acute-2nd-
6 2 137 6.2.137 6.2.137 3871 2448 preserves its original accent. term 6.2.138 6.2.136
After , a word retains in a its
end
original accent when it is always of not more than
acute-2nd-
6 2 138 6.2.138 6.2.138

3872 3395 two syllables with the exception of . term 6.2.139 6.2.137
lagh laghu sutra-

Sutra krama
Kaumudi krama
. .
Akaaraadi
krama .
Next Previous
In a - a word ending in a affix
preserves its original accent when preceded by an
indeclinable called -- 1.4.60, or a noun
standing in intimate relation to a verb () or any
end
word which gives occasion for compounding (
acute-2nd-
6 2 139 6.2.139 6.2.139
3873 1259 -- 3.1.92) term 6.2.140 6.2.138
end
In etc. both members of the compound acute-2nd-
6 2 140 6.2.140 6.2.140

3874 814 preserve their original accent simultaneously. term 6.2.141 6.2.139
end
In a compound of the Names of Divinities, acute-2nd-
6 2 141 6.2.141 6.2.141
3875 1908 both the members retain their original accent. term 6.2.142 6.2.140
In a compound of the Names of Divinities,
both members of the compound simultaneously do
not retain their accent when the first syllable of the
end
second word is with the exception of 1.
acute-2nd-
6 2 142 6.2.142 6.2.142

3876 2238 2. 3. and 4. term 6.2.143 6.2.141
In the following stras up to the end of this chapter
should always be supplied the phrase 'the last end
62143- syllable of the second member has the acute
acute-2nd-
6 2 143 6.2.143 62199 6.2.143 3877 236 accent ( )'. term 6.2.144 6.2.142
The last syllable of the second member has the
acute accent ( ) in the verbal nouns ending in 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. and 8.
end
when preceded by a , a or an --
acute-2nd-
6 2 144 6.2.144 6.2.144 3878 1819 6.2.139 term 6.2.145 6.2.143
The Participle in has acute accent ( ) on the
end
final when it is preceded by or by a word with acute-2nd-
6 2 145 6.2.145 6.2.145 3879 3777 which the second member is compared. term 6.2.146 6.2.144
The Participle in has acute accent ( ) on the
last syllable when preceded by a or a or
end
an if the compound denotes a Name, but not
acute-2nd-
6 2 146 6.2.146 6.2.146
3880 3544 in etc. term .. 6.2.147 6.2.145
end
The word etc. ending in have acute
acute-2nd-
6 2 147 6.2.147 6.2.147 3881 2502 accent ( ) on the final. term .. 6.2.148 6.2.146
The final of Part Participles and
alone have
the acute accent ( ) in a compound denoting a
Name and a Benediction, the preceding word being end
a word standing in close relation to an action
acute-2nd-
6 2 148 6.2.148 6.2.148

3882 1052 () term 6.2.149 6.2.147
The Participle in has acute accent ( ) on the end
final when the compound denotes 'done by one in acute-2nd-
6 2 149 6.2.149 6.2.149

3883 637 such a condition'. term 6.2.150 6.2.148
After a as mentioned in

6.2.148, the second
member ending in the affix and denoting an
action in the Abstract or the object (i.e. having the end
senses of Passive Adjective), has the acute accent
acute-2nd-
6 2 150 6.2.150 6.2.150
3884 229 ( ) on the final. term 6.2.151 6.2.149
The words ending in or affixes and the
words 1. 2. 3. 4. and 5.
as well as etc. have acute accent ( )
end
on the final when at the end of a compound
acute-2nd-
6 2 151 6.2.151 6.2.151

3885 2739 preceded by word. term . 6.2.152 6.2.150
The word has acute accent ( ) on the final end
when preceded by a Noun in the Locative -7th acute-2nd-
6 2 152 6.2.152 6.2.152 3886 3614 case. term 6.2.153 6.2.151
The acute accent ( ) falls on the final of words
having the sense of and of when they are end
second members in a compound, preceded by a acute-2nd-
6 2 153 6.2.153 6.2.153 3887 837 term in the Instrumental -3rd case. term 6.2.154 6.2.152

sUtrANi सूत्राणि

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

sUtrANi सूत्राणि

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

lagh laghu sutra-

( ) Sutra text PadacCheda

You might also like